Home

MELSEC-L Analog-Digital Converter Module User`s Manual

1. CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS b To apply the offset gain values of one module to the other modules in the same system lex Here the offset gain setting of module No 1 is applied to modules No 2 to No 4 1 Save the offset gain values of module No 1 onthe O 4 2 Apply the offset gain values to modules No 2 to No 4 aCe __ mmg 2 Methods for saving and restoring offset gain values There are two methods for saving and restoring offset gain values e Saving and restoring by dedicated instructions e Saving and restoring by reading from and writing to the buffer memory sonjeA uegASHYO Buozs y pue Bulnes 648 139 140 a Saving and restoring by a dedicated instruction Use the dedicated instruction G P OGLOAD to temporarily save the offset ga
2. 2 CH2 Time Average Count Average Moving Average CH3 Time Average Count Average Moving Average 4 CH4 Time Average Count Average Moving Average SH aia CH5 Time Average Count y Average Moving Average CH6 Time Average Count 6H Syst 7H Sveni aea CH7 Time Average Count y Average Moving Average CH8 Time Average Count H t Averaging process setting used to replace Q64AD Q68ADV 0000H Q68ADI n m omo oo e oae oo e w oeoo OOOO a e oae ooo i 7 19 Latest error code 20 Setting range CH1 to CH4 0000H 24 Averaging process setting CH1 to CH4 0000H Averaging process setting 19H t 0000H 26 Conversion speed setting System area 0001H 27 Input signal error detection extension setting CH1 to CH4 0000H 28 Read Write 2 R W J R W R W R W a a a Zz R R W R W R W R a OJIOJ O JO R W R W Item enabled by turning on and off Operating condition setting request Y9 O O IOIOIJIOJO O Address decimal 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 ol oo O O 61 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Address Default Read Write 2 hexadecimal L60AD4 L60ADVL8 L60ADIL8 Input signal error detection System area extension setting CH5 to OOOOH CH8 Digital clipping enable disable O00FH setting crewosmamvave erstosmumvave emmma ooo e
3. 4 Switch to offset gain setting mode Check that the module is in offset gain setting mode and the RUN LED is flashing Apply the voltage or current to determine an offset value Specify the channel for setting a offset in Offset gain setting mode Offset specification Un G22 Offset gain setting mode Gain specification Un G23 must be set to 0 Setting plural channels at one time is also possible Turn on Channel change request YB Check that Channel change completed flag XB turns on Turn off Channel change request YB Apply the voltage or current to determine a gain value Specify the channel for setting a gain in Offset gain setting mode Gain specification Un G23 Offset gain setting mode Offset specification Un G22 must be set to 0 Setting plural channels at one time is also possible The following shows the procedure for switching the mode normal mode gt offset gain setting mode or offset gain setting mode normal mode e Dedicated instruction G P OFFGAN CHAPTER 7 VARIOUS SETTINGS Turn on Channel change request YB Check that Channel change completed flag XB turns on Turn off Channel change request YB Are the adjustments also necessary for other channels Turn on User range write request YA to register the offset gain setting into the A D converter module Turn off User range write request YA after checking that Offset gain s
4. The same process for errors is used when an alarm occurs uonoun 4 607 10113 948 Once the error history storage area becomes full subsequent errors will overwrite the previous errors starting from error history No 1 and continues sequentially thereafter Un G1810 to Un G1819 The overwritten history is deleted The stored error history is cleared when the power supply of the A D converter module is turned off or when the CPU module is reset 135 8 1 F Module Error Collection Function Common 136 Error history CPU module including built in I O and built in CC Link and error log intelligent function module are displayed on one screen Errors that occurred in the entire system can be monitored in reverse chronological order Point Programming tool Example of screen display No Error Code 00124 0070 00123 OCE4 00122 05DE 00121 0070 00120 0070 00119 O5DC 00118 0070 00117 OCE4 00116 OCE4 00115 O5DC 00114 0070 00113 OCE4 00112 0070 00111 OCE4 00110 O5DC 00109 0070 00108 0070 00107 0836 CPU 19 33 Error C1 occurred i i i I I I I 1 I I I I i Date and Time 2009 12 10 17 02 37 2009 12 10 17 00 05 2009 12 10 17 00 04 2009 12 10 16 15 50 2009 12 10 15 59 30 2009 12 10 15 45 02 2009 12 10 14 14 38 2009 12 10 14 12 03 2009 12 10 13 59 54
5. Unless otherwise specified this manual uses the following terms Term A D converter module Buffer memory Display unit Factory default setting GX Configurator AD GX Developer GX Works2 Head module L60AD4 L60ADIL8 L60ADVL8 Normal mode Offset gain setting mode Programming tool Switch setting User range setting Watchdog timer error Description A generic term for the L60AD4 LEOADVL8 and L60ADIL8 A memory in an intelligent function module where data such as setting values and monitoring values exchanged with a CPU module are stored A liquid crystal display to be attached to the CPU module A generic term for analog input ranges of 0 to 10V 0 to 5V 1 to 5V 10 to 10V 0 to 20mA and 4 to 20mA A setting and monitoring tool added in GX Developer for A D converter modules The product name of the software package for the MELSEC programmable controllers The abbreviation for the LJ72GF15 T2 CC Link IE Field Network head module The abbreviation for the L60AD4 analog digital converter module The abbreviation for the L6O0ADIL8 analog digital converter module The abbreviation for the LGOADVL8 analog digital converter module The drive modes set in the switch setting window Note that the normal mode is displayed as Normal A D Converter Processing D A Converter Processing Mode on the programming tool A generic term for GX Works2 and GX Developer A generic term for the setting items in the window that is di
6. Oaaoqaqqdaada ojaaqa Oa oa0qagdadaajojaaa Point When multiple errors or alarms occur the latest error code or alarm code is stored in Latest error code Un G19 6LD UN po9 10114 yseye7 Aq Buryoeyy ZL 1 177 11 3 Checking on the Module Error Collection Function The module error collection function can store the errors that occurred in the A D converter module to the CPU module Once being stored the errors remain even after powering off or resetting the CPU module 1 How to check the errors by the module error collection function To check the errors of the A D converter module collected by the CPU module open the Error History dialog box O Diagnostics gt System Monitor gt click the Error History Detail button Error History Stop Monitor Serial Port PLC Module Connection USB System Image Status Connection Channel List Refine Search Match all of the criteria below None Clear Refine Criteria Enter Refine Criteria Error History Error History List Error Details Displayed Errors Errors 2 2 Error Code Notation DEC HEX Model Name L604D4 Start YO Start I O 0010 ta a 0010 Mount Position Main block Oth slot 2010 04 21 12 54 07 L604D4 Error and Solution Intelligent Module Information Explanation The setting of the intelligent function module switch 5 is other than 0 f Solution Set a correct parameter value in the parameter
7. Buffer memory address Stored value Un G1122 0 s Un G1123 6 ms Un G1124 960 us 226 APPENDICES 45 CHO Trigger detection time Un G1154 to Un G1169 ENB The time that the hold trigger occurred is recorded For details on the logging function refer to the following e Logging Function Page 108 Section 8 14 The following figure shows how values are stored in CH1 Trigger detection time Un G1154 to Un G1157 b15 to b8 b7 to bO Un G1154 Un G1155 Day Un G1156 Un G1157 Item Storage contents Storage example First two digits of the year Last 2011H two digits of the year Month Day Stored in BCD code 329H Hour Minute 1035H Second 40H Day of the week e Wednesday 3 2H 4 Those are values when a hold trigger is detected at 10 35 40 on Tuesday March 29th 2011 Point Time units shorter than one second are not recorded When CHO Logging hold request Un G1008 Un G1011 is changed from On 1 to Off 0 CHO Trigger detection time Un G1154 to Un G1169 is cleared to zero sessaippy Aiowayy yng Jo sjieleg zZ xipueddy 22 46 CHO Flow amount integration enable disable setting Un G1300 to Un G1303 Ze Set whether the flow amount integration function is enabled or disabled For details on the flow amount integration function refer to the following e Flow amount integration function lt gt Page 123 Section 8 15 Flow amount integration enable disable setting Se
8. Controlled by the program Warning output flag Process alarm 0 Warning process alarm R 0 Un G50 y I ON i 3 5 Warning output signal OFF X8 192 APPENDICES 3 Operating condition setting completed flag X9 QHA When changing the value of a buffer memory area use Operating condition setting completed flag X9 as an interlock condition to turn on and off Operating condition setting request Y9 For the buffer memory items that require Operating condition setting request Y9 to be turned on and off to enable the new value refer to the following e List of Buffer Memory Addresses gt Page 28 Section 3 5 When Operating condition setting completed flag X9 is OFF the A D conversion processing is not executed When Operating condition setting request Y9 is on Operating condition setting completed flag X9 turns off Se gt Controlled by the A D converter module gt Controlled by the program Module READY X0 Operating condition setting completed flag X9 Operating condition setting request Y9 A D conversion completed flag XE jeubis jndu 1 xipueddy sjeuBls O I 40 silejeq xipueddy 193 4 Offset gain setting mode flag XAQ a Offset gain setting mode When registering the value which was adjusted with the offset gain setting to the module use Offset gain setting mode flag XA as an interlock condition to turn on and off User range write request YA
9. L60AD4 L60AD4 L60AD4 L60AD4 L60AD4 L60AD4 L60AD4 L60AD4 A value set in Input signal error detection extension setting Un G27 Un G28 is Disconnection detection 4 besides the set input range for the same channel is other than the following e 4 to 20mA Extended mode e 1 to 5V Extended mode The channel where the error has occurred fits in O The values set in CH1 Scaling lower limit value Un G62 to CH8 Scaling upper limit value Un G77 are outside the range of 32000 to 32000 The channel where the error has occurred fits in O The values set in CH1 Scaling lower limit value Un G62 to CH8 Scaling upper limit value Un G77 are as follows Scaling lower limit value gt Scaling upper limit value The channel where the error has occurred fits in O For some channels user range setting is used and besides the scaling function is enabled The channel with the invalid setting fits in O CHO Logging enable disable setting Un G1000 to Un G1003 is set to a value other than O and 1 The channel where the error has occurred fits in O Conversion speed is set to 20us and besides CHO Logging enable disable setting Un G1000 to Un G1003 is set to Enable 0 The channel where the error has occurred fits in O A value outside the setting range is set in one or both of CHO Logging cycle setting value Un G1032 to Un G1035 or and CHO Logging cycle unit setting Un G1040 to Un G1043 The channel where t
10. ON Completion device D T i Ty Completion status OFF o OFF Execution succeeded w indication device D 1 iscan 4 Errors The instruction has no errors GVO190 d 9 g xipusddy SUOH ONISU pe ed1peq Gg X ipu ddy 247 248 5 Program example The following shows the program to read out the offset gain setting value of the A D converter module installed in I O number X Y10 to X Y1F by turning ON M11 z1 a Sn Specifies voltage a Ses ee ey cei nC ys men fy en inp ny gsi sie enya Sl inl iy st i Se et te la em E a ey 2a el a a a Sets a control data Dedicated instruction GP OGLOAD GP OGLOAD U1 Processing at completion with an error 4 The L60ADVL8 or L60ADIL8 does not require the area surrounded by a broken line APPENDICES Appendix 5 4 G P OGSTOR Command G ocstor IL Command GP OGSTOR f Internal device device a EEE S 1 Setting data Device Description Setting range Data type Un Start I O number of module O to FEH BIN 16 bits Within the range of Device name specified device O Start number of device where the control data is stored Device which turns ON for one scan at the processing completion of the dedicated instruction Within the range of Bit specified device XOLS9O d vg XIpu ddy SUOH ONISU pa edipaq S X ipu ddy In error completion D also turns ON 4 Specify the device sp
11. R W R W R W D R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W D R W R W R W R W R W R W O Oe ee a Os Op Oe OO Oe OF ie R W R W R W R W D R W R W Item enabled by turning on and off Operating condition setting request Y9 O O 1 O O O0 O0 0 0 0 O O CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Item enabled by turning on and off Operating condition setting request Y9 Default Read Write 2 Address Address decimal hexadecimal L60AD4 L60ADVL8 L60ADIL8 CH5 P 105 69H System area TopaS alarm upper upper limit value CH6 Process alarm lower 106 6AH System area S a lower limit value CH6 Process alarm lower 107 6BH System area kiii w upper limit value CH6 Process alarm er 108 6CH System area upp lower limit value CH6 P 109 6DH System area ree alarm upper upper limit value H7 P 410 6EH System area C Oe alarm lower lower limit value 111 6FH System area CH7 Protease alarm lower upper limit value H7 P 412 70H System area C Ones alarm upper lower limit value H7 P 113 74H System area C jones alarm upper upper limit value H8 P 114 72H System area CH8 Iotee alarm lower lower limit value CH8 P 115 73H System area TOCE alarm lower upper limit value 116 74H System area CH8 Procese alarm upper lower limit value 117 75H System area CH8 Procese alarm upper upper limit value CH5 Input signal error 146 92H System area ii D
12. Scaling function Sets for scaling on 4 D con Scaling enable disable O Enable zl seen Scaling upper limit value Scaling lower limit value Li Disable 3 Set values for Scaling upper limit value and Scaling lower limit value Scaling function Sets for scaling on A D conversii vee Scaling enable disable setting O Enable N ven Scaling upper limit value 12000 a eee Scaling lower limit value 2000 2 Q 4 Seta value to Shifting amount to conversion value 2 O Shift function a Sip liane Fale dict Set shift function when A D c 3 130410000000000 4 or later O a AEEA EEEE EEEE Creo Kalire Corer err rer er rrrr rr rrrrerrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr rr rrrrr rrr rrr rrr rrr rrr rrr rrr yy 5 Set Digital clipping function enable disable setting to 0 Enable Digital clipping function Available to Product Information Set digital clipping function wl 130410000000000 4 or later ___ Bigital clipping function ares E enable disable setting fiiwailahle Fn Bendoct Infnematinn 1 Disable 101 Digital output values are processed in the order of 1 to 4 below and stored as scaling values digital operation values Processing method and timing for each function Change of the digital output value 1 Digital output value Digital output value Digital clipping a a i Output range 480 to 2
13. Un G54 to Un G61 2 2 0 ee ee 210 CH1 to CH8 Time Average Count Average Moving Average Un G1 to Un G8 199 Channel change completed flag XB 194 Channel change request YB 197 Conversion speed setting Un G26 205 Conversion speed switch function 15 Count AV ET AGC ema th oder ol Siete ge ew ae ee 71 Current input characteristic 237 Difference conversion function 103 269 Latest error code Un G19 201 Latest error code address Un G1800 233 Level data 0 to 9 Un G1072 to Un G1081 223 Logging data 2 244485 52464404085 6454 Ge 4 68 Logging function 0 000 108 Lower limit detection 02000 0 ee 82 Lower upper limit detection 82 Maximum and minimum values 68 Maximum and minimum values hold function 76 Maximum value minimum value reset completed flag RD iano ates tio ad shoe esate E E asada ie deep 196 Maximum value minimum value reset request YD 197 Mode switching setting Un G158 Un G159 213 Module error collection function 136 Module READY X0 0e0eeeeeeeee 192 270 Digital clipping enable disable setting Un G29 206 Moving average 2 eee eee 71 Digital clipping function 00 0 99 Digital output values 000008 68 O Disconnection detecti
14. _ 1840 to ise eee 1850 to H No No 1 9 ee 1860 t 1870 to No 7 No 1 E ee es 1880 t ee _ 1890 t s ere _ 1900 t0 76CH to 775H No 10 Same as No 1 E 1909 1910t0 276Hto77FH No 11 Same as No 1 E 1919 1920t0 780H to 789H No 12 Same as No 1 E 1929 1930t0 78AHto793H No 13 Same as No 1 E 1939 1940 t0 794H to 79DH No 14 Same as No 1 p 1949 1990 to 79EH to 7A7H_ No 15 Saneas No 1 1959 1900 to 7a8H to 7B1H No 16 Sameas No 1 E 1969 1970 to 7 agog ee cme a The default value is a value set after power on or after resetting the CPU module k This shows whether read or write from programs is possible R Readable W Writable 1814 BETE rina 0H to 71BH sossalppyy How y yng Jo IS S E 39 3 Logging section Un G5000 to Un G61439 Address decimal 5000 to 14999 15000 to 24999 25000 to 34999 35000 to 44999 45000 to 61439 40 Address i Read Write 2 hexadecimal L60AD4 L60ADVL8 L60ADIL8 1388H to 3A97H CH1 Logging data System area po 3A98H to 61A7H CH2 Logging data System area po 61A8H to 88B7H CH3 Logging data System area 88B8H to AFC7H CH4 Logging data System area EROR System area EFFFH The default value is a value set after power on or after resetting the CPU module h This shows whether read or write from programs is possible R Readable W Writable Item enabled by turning on and off Operating conditi
15. a Displayed in English Name Screen Input limits Setting item Screen display format Upperlimit Lower limit A D conversion enable disable setting A D CONVERSION Selection oo Average processing setting AVE PROCESSING Selection o Time A i k Count Average Moving TIME COUNT MOV 62500 0 Process alarm upper upper limit value 32768 Process alarm upper lower limit value 32768 Process alarm lower upper limit value 32768 Process alarm lower lower limit value 32768 Input signal error detection function FINPUTSIGERR sf Selection J i Input signal error detection setting value 0 Input signal tecti hanci tti input signal eror detecto ennancing setina pur sG en sa 149 su 199 BBueUd njeA Bules Jo S17 6 3 A D conversion enable disable setting Select ENABLE or DISABLE in the A D CONVERSION screen ia ems alee 1 Usethe A and W buttons to select ENABLE or DISABLE and then confirm with the button 4 Averaging process setting In the AVE PROCESSING screen select whether to perform sampling processing or averaging processing time average count average moving average AVE PROCESSING screen 71 Usethe A and W buttons to select SAMPLING TIME AVERAGE COUNT AVERAGE or MOVING AVERAGE and then confirm with the ok button If you selected any item other than SAMPLING proceed to step 2 TIME COUNT MOV screen 2 Move the cursor using the 4 and butto
16. b Enabling the setting Turn on and off Operating condition setting request Y9 to enable the setting c Default value All channels are set to 5000 36 CHO Level trigger condition setting Un G1056 to Un G1059 E3 When the level trigger is used with the logging function set the occurrence condition of the hold trigger For details on the logging function refer to the following e Logging function lt gt Page 108 Section 8 14 Setting Setting value Disable 0 Above 1 Below 2 Pass through 3 Inthe channel where a value other than the above setting values is set an error occurs Then the error code 2050 is stored in Latest error code Un G19 Error flag XF turns on and the logging cannot be performed e When CHO Logging enable disable setting Un G1000 to Un G1003 is set to Disable 1 the setting for CHU Level trigger condition setting Un G1056 to Un G1059 is ignored a Enabling the setting Turn on and off Operating condition setting request Y9 to enable the setting b Default value All channels are set to Disable 0 221 sessaippy Aiowayy yng Jo sjieleg zZ xipueddy 37 CHO Trigger data Un G1064 to Un G1067 EB When the logging function is used set the buffer memory address monitored for the occurrence condition of level trigger For details on the logging function refer to the following e Logging function lt gt Page 108 Section 8 14 a Setting range e Se
17. gt lt O am N R gt I D gt O lt JE o Spo op 7 ajg D 0 49 50 b L60ADVL8 c L60ADIL8 CHAPTER 6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 6 4 External Wiring The following describes the external wiring Point If the circuit between the terminals of unused channels is kept open and the A D conversion is enabled the A D converter module may output an undefined digital value To prevent this phenomenon perform any of the following measures Set A D conversion enable disable setting Un GO in the unused channel to A D conversion disable 1 Note that A D conversion enable disable setting Un GO from A D conversion enable 0 to A D conversion disable 1 reduces the conversion cycle For the L60AD4 or L60ADVL8 short circuit the input terminal V and V of the unused channel 1 L60AD4 1 For voltage input Signal source 10 to 10V 2 ve S00k e e b gt 500K2 ao Shield Bul eusa xXZ 79 2 For current input 2 _ SS qua 500k mee AO Seb 2502 v WZ J o 1 Ai m Signal source 0 to 20mA 4 For the wire use the shielded twisted pair cable 2 This indicates the input resistances of the L60AD4 3 For the current input always connect the terminals V and I 4 If there are potential differences between the AG terminal and GND of the external device connect the AG terminal to the GND of the external device D Always c
18. gt Not converted 0 28 Pass data classification setting Un G200 ZWZ3 This is the area for saving and restoring the offset gain setting value in user range Specify if the offset gain setting value to be saved or restored is either voltage or current b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO 0 ofofofofofofo o o o fo chacrsicHacH1 ee Data for b4 to b15 are fixed to 0 0 Voltage Even when the value is set the setting value is ignored 1 Current sessaippy Aiowayy yng Jo sjieleg zZ xipueddy 215 216 29 CHO Offset gain setting value saving area Un G202 to Un G233 Q This area stores data used to restore the offset gain setting value of the user range Data arrangement differs depending on the modules used EN Description Un G202 CH1 Industrial shipment settings offset value Un G203 CH1 Industrial shipment settings gain value Un G216 CH8 Industrial shipment settings offset value Un G217 CH8 Industrial shipment settings gain value Un G218 CH1 User range settings offset value Un G219 CH1 User range settings gain value Un G232 CH4 User range settings gain value L CH8 User range settings offset value Un G233 CH4 User range settings gain value H CH8 User range settings gain value In any of the following operations the data to be used is stored saved e Writing the initial setting by utility e Turning off and on User range write request YA in offset gain setting mode e Turning off and o
19. 1 E N Address 1 ie Address 1 E Address 2 CHO Latest pointer Address 2 i p ON Address 3 i DN Address 3 i CHO pomeri Jj Rides A the latest 0 rrr Address 4 the latest u 7 the oldest 1 i i i i E i i a The head pointer does not change until CHO Logging data Un G5000 to Un G44999 becomes full after the logging start The value is fixed to 0 The head pointer moves by one point when CHO Logging data Un G5000 to Un G44999 becomes full and the overwriting of data starts from the first address 113 7 When checking logging data without stopping logging Logging data can be checked during logging operation with CHO Head pointer Un G1090 to Un G1093 CHO Latest pointer Un G1098 to Un G1101 and CHO Number of logging data Un G1106 to Un G1109 To check logging data during logging operation follow the precautions below because logging data may be refreshed while data is being read out e Set the cycle to CHO Logging cycle setting value Un G1032 to Un G1035 so that data checking and reading surely complete before logging data is refreshed If the logging cycle is short logging data may be refreshed during data checking and reading e After obtaining the logging data which need to be checked monitor the variation of the head pointer and the number of logging data and obtain logging data just after the stored value has changed e Ifthe data refresh and the data being checked do not synchronize due to the
20. 129 130 6 Clearing the integrated flow amount The integrated flow amount can be cleared in a program The integrated flow amount can be cleared by changing the value of CHO Integrated flow amount clear request Un G1372 to Un G1375 while the flow amount integration function is operating CHO Integrated flow amount clear request Un G1372 to Un G1375 operates only when the flow amount integration function is enabled a Operation procedure to clear the integrated flow amount 1 CHU Integrated flow amount clear request Un G1372 to Un G1375 i I I L 1 i it 1 CHU Integrated flow amount ya Un G1332 to Un G1339 120 XK 122 KARA 2 l While the flow amount integration function is operating change the CHO Integrated flow amount clear request Un G1372 to Un G1375 of the channel to be cleared No request 0 Clear request 1 When the rise of No request 0 Clear request 1 is detected the value of CHO Integrated flow amount Un G1332 to Un G1339 of the corresponding channel is cleared to zero After it is cleared CHO Integrated flow amount clear flag Un G1380 to Un G1383 of the cleared channel turns Cleared 1 Confirm CHO Integrated flow amount clear flag Un G1380 to Un G1383 is Cleared 1 and change CHU Integrated flow amount clear request Un G1372 to Un G1375 Clear request 1 No request 0 When the fall of Clear request 1 gt No request 0 is detected CHO Integrated flow amount c
21. 520H to 523H 528H to 52BH 530H to 533H System area 534H Systemarea CH1 Integrated flow amount L System area Item enabled by turning on and off Operating condition setting request Y9 Om LOR Eom ke O O O O OJIOJOJO CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Item enabled by Address Address et turning on and off Read Write oF decimal hexadecimal L60AD4 L60ADVL8 L60ADIL8 Operating condition setting request Y9 1340 to 1352 to H1 Fl t int ti 1356 54CH ie ise anne ee System area R W temporary stop request 4357 54DH CH2 Flow amount integration Syste aiba RW E temporary stop request H3 FI t int ti 1358 54EH E OW AMOUN ago System area R W temporary stop request H4 FI t int ti 1359 54FH ete vee meunLialedi Alon System area R W temporary stop request 1360 to H1 Fl t int ti 1364 554H E A System area temporary stop flag OO oO 1365 555H CH2 Flow amount integration Systemares _ temporary stop flag i mi 1366 556H CH3 Flow amount integration Sysiamrarea es temporary stop flag T H4 FI t int ti 1367 557H E ee System area a lt temporary stop flag 3 fa 1368 to lt ae eee eS E z Q H1 Int ted fl t cl D request D n CH2 Int ted fl t cl request H3 Int ted fl tcl request request 1376 to t H1 Int ted fl t cl 1380 64H C ntegrated flow amount clear Systemae flag H2 Int ted fl t cl 1381 565H C ntegrated flow amount clear Sytema flag H3 Int ted fl t cl 1382 66H CH3 Inte
22. Scaling lower limit value screen SCALE LOW LIMIT 00000 Digital clipping enable disable setting screen DIGITALCLIP DISABLE ENABLE Conversion speed setting screen CONVERSION SPD 20us 80us Ims CHAPTER 9 DISPLAY UNIT Averaging process setting window AVE PROCESSING SAMPLING TIME AVERAGE COUNT AVERAGE MOVING AVERAGE Process alarm setting screen PROCESS ALARM DISABLE ENABLE Process alarm upper lower limit value screen PRALARM UPR LWR 00000 Process alarm lower lower limit value screen PRALARM LWR LWR 00000 Input signal setting value screen INPUT SIG VALUE 050 UOI ISUEI NU N Z 6 Scaling upper limit value screen SCALE UP LIMIT 00000 Shifting amount to conversion value screen SHIFT 00000 Input signal error detection extension setting screen INPUT SIG ENH DI SABLE UPR LWR LWR UPR DISCONNECT 147 b L60ADVL8 L60ADIL8 Standby screen Function selection screen Module setting _module Module setting_ start I O specification screen No specification screen Module setting module selection screen Initial setting change screen Change item selection menu screen Parameter valid drive confirmation screen Channel selection screen 148 u s uey Huiy s Jelu A D conversion enable and disable setting screen Averaging process setting wind
23. Start number of the device which tums on for one scan completion of the instruction 1 also tums on when failed 0000 Completed Other than 0000k Failed Error code mauus T Ri v9 uoonysu VOPUN 4 UOHEOUNWWOD 30S F s 3S01090S dS uojoeuu0d e 6 Execution condition of the instruction Structure of the instruction in the ladder mode Setting side User Device value is set by the user System Device value is set by the CPU module Detailed descriptions 3 Function of the in stru ction This instruction closes a connection specified in Disconnection of a connection The result of the SP SOCCLOSE instruction can be checked with the completion device 0 and 1 Completion device 0 Turns on in the END processing of a scan after completion of the SP SOCCLOSE instruction and tums off in the next END processing Completion device 1 Turns on or off according to the result of the SPSOCCLOSE instruction State Description When completed Remains off Tums on in the END processing of a scan after completion of the SP SOCCLOSE instruction and turns off When failed i in the next END processing Conditions for the error and 1 4 Error A detection of an operation error tums on the Error flag SM0 and a corresponding error code is stored in SDO error codes vai For the errors not described in this manual refer to the following I M E LS EC L C P U M od u le The device numb
24. e Input signal error detection flag Un G49 is cleared e Input signal error detection signal XC turns OFF e The ALM LED turns off e The alarm code 1100 which is stored in Latest error code Un G19 is cleared Setting the input signal error detection upper and lower limit values Set the input signal error detection upper and lower limit values in increments of 1 0 1 based on the input signal error detection setting value Input signal error detection setting value is reflected in both the input signal error detection upper and lower limit values a Input signal error detection upper limit value Add the gain value to Input range width gain value offset value multiplied by input signal error detection setting value Only a value equal to or greater than the gain value can be set The input signal error detection setting value is calculated by the following formula Input signal error detection Input signal error detection _ _upperlimitvalue O O O SO O Co e setting value Gain value of each range Offset value of each range Gain value of each range x 1000 b Subtract the gain value from Input signal error detection lower limit value This value is calculated by subtracting Input range width gain value offset value multiplied by input signal error detection setting value from the lower limit value of the input range Only a value equal to or smaller than the lower limit value of the range can be set The input
25. 2009 12 10 13 35 11 2009 12 10 11 11 45 2009 12 10 11 07 05 2009 12 10 11 07 04 2009 12 10 11 03 49 2009 12 10 11 03 48 2009 12 09 16 30 58 2009 12 09 16 29 33 2009 12 09 16 29 12 2009 12 09 16 29 11 aa gt a oog Error history CPU module 19 33 Error C1 Model Name L604D4 L604D4 L26CPU BT L26CPU BT L60D44 L60D44 L26CPU BT L60D44 L26CPU BT L26CPU BT L26CPU BT L604D4 L26CPU BT L604D4 L26CPU BT L26CPU BT L60D44 L60D44 L26CPU BT 4s Module A 2719 29 Error A1 occurred 19 34 Error B1 occurred 19 36 Error A2 occurred e Collects the errors and alarms that occurred in the A D converter module into the CPU module or the head module By holding the module errors in the CPU module memory that can hold data in the event of power failure the errors can be held even after powering off or resetting the CPU module or the head module Module B Start I O 0030 0030 0030 0010 0010 0010 0010 0010 0010 For details on the module error collection function refer to the following MELSEC L CPU Module User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals Module error log Time Module in error Error code 19 29 ModuleA Error A1 19 34 ModuleB Error B1 19 36 ModuleA
26. 4 x Number of used channels x 1 Conversion speed ms Set the averaging count to a value in the range of 4 to 62500 Set the moving average count to a value in the range of 2 to 1000 Set one of the following values in Conversion speed setting Un G26 e 20us 0 e 80us 1 e ims 2 Set the value in CHO Difference conversion trigger Un G172 to Un G175 to No request 0 or Trigger request 1 Set values so that they meet the following condition Offset value lt Gain value Correct the setting in Offset gain setting mode Offset specification Un G22 and or the Offset gain setting mode Gain specification Un G23 Correct the settings in CH1 Process alarm lower lower limit value Un G86 to CH8 Process alarm upper upper limit value Un G117 Set a value within the range of 0 to 250 in CHO Input signal error detection setting value Un G142 to Un G149 Set one of the following values in Input signal error detection extension setting Un G27 Un G28 for the channel where the error has occurred e Disable 0 e Upper lower limit detection 1 e Lower limit detection 2 e Upper limit detection 3 e Disconnection detection 4 Error code decimal 8201 900 910 990 1 3 2000 20100 2020 203011 20400 20501 2060 20700 Target Description and cause of error module L60AD4 L60ADVL8 L60ADIL8 L60AD4 L60ADVL8 L60ADIL8 L60AD4 L60ADVL8 L60ADIL8 L60AD4
27. 410H 411H 412H 413H 414H to 417H 4 1 418H 419H 41AH 41BH CH to 41FH 420H 421H 422H 423H 424H to 427H 4 2 428H 429H 42AH 42BH CH3 Logging data setting CH4 Logging data setting System area CH1 Logging cycle setting value CH2 Logging cycle setting value CH3 Logging cycle setting value CH4 Logging cycle setting value System area CH1 Logging cycle unit setting CH2 Logging cycle unit setting CH3 Logging cycle unit setting CH4 Logging cycle unit setting System area CH1 Logging points after trigger CH2 Logging points after trigger CH3 Logging points after trigger CH4 Logging points after trigger System area CH1 Level trigger condition setting CH2 Level trigger condition setting CH3 Level trigger condition setting CH4 Level trigger condition setting System area L60AD4 CH1 Trigger data CH2 Trigger data CH3 Trigger data CH4 Trigger data CH to 42FH System area 430H 431H 432H 433H 434H 435H 436H 437H 438H 439H 43AH 43BH Level data 0 Level data 1 Level data 2 Level data 3 Level data 4 Level data 5 Level data 6 Level data 7 Level data 8 Level data 9 CH1 Trigger setting value CH2 Trigger setting value L60ADVL8 L60ADIL8 System area System area System area System area System area System area System area System area System area System area System area System area System area System
28. Average Moving Average Un G1 to Un G4 is outside the range of 2 to 5000ms e The averaging time value set in CHO Time Average Count Average Moving Average Un G1 to Un G4 is less than 4 x Number of used channels x Conversion speed ms The channel where the error has occurred fits in O e The averaging time value set in CHO Time Average Count Average Moving Average Un G1 to Un G8 is outside the range of 4 to 5000ms e The averaging time value set in CHO Time Average Count Average Moving Average Un G1 to Un G8 is less than 4 x Number of used channels x 1 Conversion speed ms The channel where the error has occurred fits in O The averaging count value set in CHO Time Average Count Average Moving Average Un G1 to Un G8 is outside the range of 4 to 62500 The channel where the error has occurred fits in O The moving average count value set in CHO Time Average Count Average Moving Average Un G1 to Un G8 is outside the range of 2 to 1000 The channel where the error has occurred fits in O The value set in Conversion speed setting Un G26 is outside the range of 0 to 2 The value set in CHO Difference conversion trigger Un G172 to Un G175 is other than 0 and 1 The channel where the error has occurred fits in O When the user range is set or restored values are as follows Offset value gt Gain value The channel where the error has occurred fits in O When the offset gain setting is configured channe
29. CH2 e CH1 Averaging process setting Sampling processing e CH1 Logging cycle setting value 7000 e CH1 Logging cycle unit setting us Buffer memory address Bem S Stored value 1123 CH1 Logging cycle monitor value 6 uonoun4 Bulb6o7 p19 111 b When the logging function turns disabled The logging is not performed when any of the following error occurs after the logging function is enabled and Operating condition setting request Y9 is turned on and off e Error code 200 Setting error of CHO Time Average Count Average Moving Average Un G1 to Un G4 e Error code 300 Setting error of CHO Time Average Count Average Moving Average Un G1 to Un G4 e Error code 310 Setting error of CHO Time Average Count Average Moving Average Un G1 to Un G4 e Error code 360 Setting error of Conversion speed setting Un G26 e Error code 2000 to 2080 Setting error of a parameter setting item of the logging function Point When Operating condition setting request Y9 is turned on and off on the condition that the logging cycle determined by CHOI Logging cycle setting value Un G1032 to Un G1035 and CHO Logging cycle unit setting Un G1040 to Un G1043 is shorter than the conversion cycle an error occurs and logging does not start The error code 2020 is stored in Latest error code Un G19 Error flag XF turns on and the ERR LED turns on While Conversion speed is set as 20us 0 setting CHO Logging enable disable setting
30. E Analog input error detection Averaging Digital CH1 to CH4 function processing output value Input signal error P detection extension Digital clipping function function Scaling function Shift function Difference conversion function Logging Warning output function function Flow amount Scaling value integration digital function operation value Analog input CH1 to CH8 Digital output value Input signal error Averaging detection function processing Input signal error Scaling function detection extension function Warning output function Scaling value digital operation value Maximum value Integrated flow amount Logging data Maximum value Minimum value uonouny yeg Jo JOPJO Buissed0 d 4 8 68 1 2 3 4 5 Digital output values Digital values after sampling processing or averaging processing has been performed are stored Scaling values digital operation values Values obtained by operating the digital output value using the following functions are stored When the following functions are not used the same value as the digital output value is stored Module Function L60AD4 Digital clipping function scaling function shift function or difference conversion function L60ADVL8 L60ADIL8 Scaling function Maximum and minimum values The maximum and minimum values of the scaling values digital operation values are stor
31. End setup Cancel Screen for selecting a target intelligent function module Intelligent function module utility C MELSEC GPPW test 6 X Intelligent Function module parameter Online Tools Help m Select a target intelligent function module Start 1 0 No Module type 0010 4 D Conversion Module X Module model name Le0AD4 z Parameter setting module e ULE E FB Support Parameter Start 1 0 No Module model name Initial setting Auto refresh lt Auto refresh setting Module information Module type A D Conversion Module Start 1 0 No 0010 Module model name L60AD4 Module side Moue sida Transfer PLC side Buffer size Bhed direction Device word count SL a A a S A O O o mss O O o e CH1 Maximum value CH1 Minimum value peeve S S S e S S BE C S E S j j a al a EE i pE v Make text file End setup 1 APPENDICES 1 lt lt FB Support Parameter gt gt tab Select monitor test module screen FB conversion screen Online Monitor Test Select monitor test module FB conversion r Select monitor test module Start 1 0 No Module type 4 D Con poo FB program is generated from the following contents Start 1 0 Module model Initial Auto No name setting refresh Module model name LEQAD4 v FB program name Module implementation status Monitor Test r Module information Module type A D
32. Error A2 A lt CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 8 1 8 Error Clear Function Common When an error occurs you can clear the error from the system monitor By clicking the Error clear button in the system monitor the latest error code stored in Latest error code Un G19 is cleared and the ERR LED is turned off The operation is the same as Error clear request YF as well as executing error clear from the display unit However error history cannot be cleared For instructions on Error clear request YF and executing error clear from the display unit refer to the following e Error clear request YF lt _ gt Page 198 Appendix 1 2 5 e Checking Clearing an Error Page 155 Section 9 4 XO Diagnostics gt gt System Monitor gt Error Module Module s Detailed Information Module Monitoring Model Mame L6OAD4 PO Address 010 Mount Position Main block Oth slot 00 Product Information k30410000000000 4 et Production Number SS E Module Informatian Module Access Possible Status of External Power Supply neal Fuse Blown Status Status of PO Address Verify Moree o O Clear Hold Setting Noise Filter Setting Input Type Hi Information Remote Password Setting Status k Error Information Error and Solution Latest Error Code Update Error History Gonmbents 360 Clear Error History Error Clear No Error Code Display Format Solution uol ounjy
33. M1 CH2 A D conversion completed flag M2 CH3 A D conversion completed flag M20 to 27 Warning output flag M50 to 53 Input signal error detection flag M100 Module READY checking flag Y50 to 5F Error code notation BCD 4 digits LY42NT1P Y50 to 5F CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING 5 Program example when using the parameter of intelligent function module a Parameter setting Set the contents of initial settings in the parameter TT Project window Intelligent Function Module c gt L60AD4 gt Parameter 0030 L60AD4 Parameter Display Filter Basic setting oo AID conversion enable disable setting Averaging process setting Time Average Count 4yverage Moving Average Conversion speed setting E Warning output function Warning output setting Process alarm Upper upper limit value Process alarm upper lower limit value Process alarm lower upper limit value Process alarm lower lower limit value E Input signal error detection Input signal error detection setting Input signal error detection setting value Input signal error detection enhancing Available to Product Information 130410000000000 A or later Input signal error detection extension setting Scaling function Scaling enable disable setting Scaling upper limit value Scaling lower limit value Shift function E Available to Product Information 130410000000000 4 or later Shifting amount to conversion value Digital clipping function Av
34. The following describes the details of the A D converter module I O signals assigned to the CPU module The I O numbers X Y described in Appendix 1are for the case when the start I O number of the A D converter module is set to 0 Appendix 1 1 input signal 1 Module READY X0 QD Module READY X0 turns ON to indicate the preparation for the A D conversion is completed after the power on or after the reset operation of the CPU module and then the A D conversion is proceeded In the following cases Module READY X0 turns off e In the offset gain setting mode In this case the A D conversion processing is executed e When a watch dog timer error occurs to the A D converter module In this case the A D conversion processing is not executed 2 Warning output signal X89 QH Warning output signal X8 turns ON when the process alarm has been detected a Process alarm e Warning output signal X8 turns on when a digital output value of an A D conversion enabled channel becomes equal to or greater than the process alarm upper upper limit value or equal to or smaller than the process alarm lower lower limit value after validating the alarm output setting process alarm e Warning output signal X8 turns OFF when the digital output values fall within the setting range for all the A D conversion enabled channels The ALM LED also turns off along with the off of the signal gt Controlled by the A D converter module
35. This program performs the following operations using the dedicated instruction G P OFFGAN e first switches the mode to the offset gain setting mode by the dedicated instruction G P OFFGAN e second switches the channels for which the offset gain settings is configured e third writes the offset gain value to the A D converter module e finally switch the mode from offset gain setting mode to the normal mode by the dedicated instruction G P OFFGAN Switches to the offset gain setting mode MP Stores the setting data of the MOV K1 D1 dedicated instruction G OFFGAN in D1 Dedicated instruction G OFFGAN U3 D1 G OFFGAN Sets a np after offset gain setting Ty H1 DO Stores the target channel Sets a cannel to the offset setting number in DO pe X3A U3 Specifies the offset target mou we Eas channel MOV KO on Sets 0 for the gain target channel Sets a hah to the ha setting U3 wy Sets 0 for the offset target MOV KO G22 channel Switches the Sal g offset gain setting pA Turns on Channel change p Set we request Y3B E RST Y3B Turns off Channel change i request Y3B Registers the result of offset gain setting to the module i vn SET Y3A Turns on User range write request Y3A X3A Turns off User range write RST __Y3A request Y3A a E i U3 m l Specifies the gain target i l MOV DY ee channel Switches to the normal mode W Stores the setting data of the si MOV KO D1 dedicat
36. Time average 1H Count average 2H Moving average 3H e The channel to which a value out of the above setting range is written performs the operation in the sampling processing a Enabling the setting Turn on and off Operating condition setting request Y9 to enable the setting b Default value All channels are set to sampling OH as the default value Point When using Averaging process setting used to replace Q64AD Q68ADV or Q68ADI Un GQY the value set in Averaging process setting Un G24 Un G25 is ignored The operation is performed in the averaging process setting in Averaging process setting used to replace Q64AD Q68ADV or Q68ADI Un G9 APPENDICES 10 Conversion speed setting Un G26 ZUR Set the conversion speed for all channels When the value of 0003H to FFFFH is set an error occurs and the operation is performed in the previous setting Conversion speed Setting value 20us OH 80us 1H 1Ims 2H a Enabling the setting Turn on and off Operating condition setting request Y9 to enable the setting b Default value 80us 1 is set as the default value 11 Input signal error detection extension setting Un G27 Un G28 aiizy In the input signal error detection extension function set the error detection method for each channel When Input signal error detection extension setting Un G27 Un G28 is set to other than Disable 0 the input signal error detection extension function tu
37. Un G1000 to Un G1003 to Enable 0 causes an error and the logging is not performed The error code 2000 is stored in Latest error code Un G19 Error flag XF turns on and the ERR LED turns on When the input signal error detection function and the input signal error detection extension function are set setting CHO Logging enable disable setting Un G1000 to Un G1003 to Enable 0 causes an error and the logging is not performed The error code 2080 is stored in Latest error code Un G19 Error flag XF turns on and the ERR LED turns on 112 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 5 Number of logging data The number of valid data in CHO Logging data Un G5000 to Un G44999 can be checked with CHO Number of logging data Un G1106 to Un G1109 When the number of collected data is less than 10000 points When the number of collected data has reached 10000 points AddressO A Address 0 Address 0 Valid data A rs ress Address 2 Address 2 r o aI CHO Number of logging data 2 Address 3 Address 4 SoTa Address 4 Address 5 Address 5 o HBHREREEEEEeEEEEESEe NH l Invalid data I i Address 9998 The contents of the data are not guaranteed __ Address 9998 Address 9999 W Address 9999 _ V _ i The number of logging data increases one by one each time new data is stored When CHO Logging data Un G5000 to Un G44999 becomes full Number of logging data 10000 the next data is stored in the first add
38. Un G45 the values calculated by each function is stored using the following functions Module Functions L60AD4 Digital clipping function scaling function shift function or difference conversion function L60ADVL8 L60ADIL8 Scaling function 206 APPENDICES 14 Input signal error detection setting Un G47 CHB Set whether the input signal error detection is enabled or disabled for each channel Only the lower upper limit detection can be used as the detection method of an input signal error in this area For details on the input signal error detection function refer to the following e Input Signal Error Detection Function lt _ gt Page 77 Section 8 7 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 aancacdan a nna S a S b4 to b15 of the L60AD4 and b8 to b15 of 0 Enable the L6OADVL8 and L60ADIL8 are fixed to 0 1 Disable a Enabling the setting Turn on and off Operating condition setting request Y9 to enable the setting b Default value All channels are set to disable 1 as the default value Point When Input signal error detection extension setting Un G27 Un G28 is set to other than Disable 0 the setting in this area is ignored 15 Warning output setting Un G43 QA Set whether the alarm output of process alarm is enabled or disabled for each channel b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi noone oS Ao ey b4 to b15 of the L60AD4 and b8 to b15 of 0 Enable the
39. a L60AD4 Standby screen 2009 04 20 MON 12 00 00 Function selection screen CPU SETTINGS MOD MON TEST gt MOD SETTINGS Module setting_module P Module setting_start I O specification screen No specification screen MENU gt MOD SET SPECIFY 1 0 No MODULE LIST Module setting module selection screen 01 1 0 No 0010H BLT IN CC Link 02 1 0 No 0030H L60AD4 Change item selection menu screen A D CONVERSION AVE PROCESSING TIME COUNT MOV PROCESS ALARM PRALARM UPR UPR PRALARM UPR LWR PRALARM LWR UPR PRALARM LWR LWR INPUT SIG ERR INPUT SIG VALUE SCALING SCALE UP LIMIT SCALE LOW LIMIT SHIFT DIGITALCLIP INPUT SIG ENH Initial setting change screen INIT CHANGE Parameter valid drive confirmation screen The change will be applied to the parameter Channel selection screen CH1 CH2 CH3 Common setting item selection menu screen CONVERSION SPD CH4 COMMON usas0s eHueyo Puy s Jelu A D conversion enable and disable setting screen A D CONVERSION ENABLE DISABLE Time count moving average setting screen TIME COUNT MOV 00000 Process alarm upper upper limit value screen PRALARM UPR UPR 00000 Process alarm lower upper limit value screen PRALARM LWR UPR 00000 Input signal error setting screen INPUT SIG ERR DISABLE ENABLE Scaling setting screen SCALING DISABLE ENABLE
40. is set to CHO Logging hold request Un G1008 to Un G1011 an error occurs The error code 2070 is stored in Latest error code Un G19 Error flag XF turns on and the ERR LED turns on 1 Checking on logging stop Check that CHO Logging hold flag Un G1016 to Un G1019 is On 1 118 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 8 14 3 Level trigger When a value in the monitored buffer memory area of the A D converter module satisfies a preset condition a hold trigger is generated The target data of a level trigger is monitored on the refresh cycle of the digital output value or the scaling value digital operation value 1 Initial setting of a level trigger a Setting of a target to be monitored As a condition to generate a hold trigger set the buffer memory address to be monitored to CHO Trigger data Un G1064 to Un G1067 Item Setting range CHO Trigger data Un G1064 to Un G1067 0 to 4999 To monitor a device value of a module other than the A D converter module such as a device of the CPU module configure the setting as shown below e Set a value between 1072 and 1081 Level data O Un G1072 to Un G1081 to CHO Trigger data Un G1064 to Un G1067 e Write a value of the monitored device to Level data O Un G1072 to Un G1081 by using the MOV instruction Item Setting range Level data O Un G1072 to Un G1081 32768 to 32767 Usage example of Level data O Un G1072 to Un G1081 To monitor the data register D100 in
41. of CHO Logging data Un G5000 to Un G44999 For details on the logging function refer to the following e Logging Function lt Page 108 Section 8 14 When the value of CH2 Head pointer Un G1091 is 8551 CH2 Logging data Un G15000 Head pointer 8551 offset value from Un G15000 i i The latest data Latest data Un G23550 Un G23551 The oldest data 23551 15000 8551 E Point f The value in CHO Head pointer Un G1090 to Un G1093 is fixed to 0 since the oldest data is stored in the start address of CHO Logging data Un G5000 to Un G44999 while the data of first 10000 points is logged from the logging is stated After the number of collected data points reaches 10000 the place of CHO Latest pointer Un G1090 to Un G1093 increases one by one When CHO Logging hold request Un G1008 to Un G1011 is changed from On 1 to Off 0 CHO Head pointer Un G1090 to Un G1093 is cleared to zero APPENDICES 41 CHL Latest pointer Un G1098 to Un G1101 ZB The buffer memory address where the latest data is stored can be checked in CHO Logging data Un G5000 to Un G24999 This area stores the offset value 0 to 9999 counted from the start address CH1 Un G5000 CH2 Un G15000 CH3 Un G25000 CH4 Un G35000 of CHO Logging data Un G5000 to Un G44999 For details on the logging function refer to the following e Logging Function gt Page 108 Section 8 14 When the value of CH2 Latest poin
42. to 0 Enable uojouny Buiddijo jeybiq ZL Digital clipping function Available to Product Information Set digital clipping function wl 130410000000000 4 or later __ Digital clipping function F if enable disable setting jee ad A 0 Enable Logging function eane I fiiiwailahle Fo Prordirt Thfnrmabinn 1 Dizable 99 3 Setting example of when both the digital clipping function and scaling function are used When setting as follows for the A D converter module with input range of 0 to 5V e Scaling upper limit value 32000 e Scaling lower limit value O e Digital clipping function enable disable setting 0 Enable 1 Set A D conversion enable disable setting to 0 Enable kT Project window gt Intelligent Function Module gt module name gt gt Parameter A D conversion enable disable setting seen Averaging process setting Time Average Count 1 Disable 2 Set Scaling enable disable setting to 0 Enable Scaling function Sets for scaling on A D con 7 seve Scafting enable disable O Enable E Scaling upper limit value oo Scaling lower limit value Li Disable 3 Set values for Scaling upper limit value and Scaling lower limit value E Seating function Sets for scaling on A D conversi vee Scaling enable disable setting 0 Enable vee Scaling upper limit value 32000 i Scaling lower limit value
43. to conversion value 20000 Un G150 30000 sees see eee see dees 3 a I l 2 CH1 Scaling value digital operation value PA Un G54 vA a ee 1 Digital output value before adjustment 20000 Analog input voltage V 10 5 0 5 10 ae ge CH1 Scaling value a put ewaget digital operation value Un G54 4 Since the value exceeds the range of 32768 to 32767 it is fixed to 32767 the upper limit value 96 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 4 Setting example of when both the scaling function and shift function is used When the following settings are used for the A D converter module with input range of 0 to 5V e Scaling upper limit value 12000 e Scaling lower limit value 2000 e Shifting amount to conversion value 2000 1 Set A D conversion enable disable setting to 0 Enable TT Project window gt Intelligent Function Module gt gt module name gt Parameter Item CHI Basic setting Sets method of A D c _ 4B conversion enable disable setting 0 Enable X Averaging process setting Time Average Count 1 Disable 2 Set Scaling enable disable setting to 0 Enable Scaling function o Seating enable disable seen Scaling upper limit value n Scaling lower limit value Sets for scaling on A D con 0 Enable bi 1 Disable 3 Set values for Scaling upper l
44. 0 to 20mA 4 to 20mA Extended mode 5480 22979 User range setting 20480 20479 3 This is the maximum resolution in user range setting Point Use the value within the practical analog input range and practical digital output range If a value is out of the range the resolution and accuracy may not fall within the range of performance specifications Do not use the value in the dotted line region in the graph of current input characteristic Do not input a value of 30mA or more This may damage the elements UOISJIOAUDD G V JO DISIIB JOCIEUD UOISJBAUOD O I XIpUeddy 237 4 I O conversion characteristic of the L6OADVL8 Practical analog input range Practical analog input range 9191 9000 8000 oO g 2 O 5 gt 2 Pe z a T 3 j gS z Ke x 2000 Q D 2192 Q 16384 aL ee ld a 8000 15 10 5 0 1 5 10 15 8192 15 10 5 01 57 55 10 15 Analog input voltage V No Input range setting Offset value Digital output value 2 Resolution 0 to 8000 625uV Analog input voltage V 1 to 5V Extended mode 2000 to 9000 500uV Jser range sting 00 to 8000 nau 4 Set the offset value and gain value in the user range setting within the range satisfying the following conditions If the following conditions are not satisfied A D conversion may not be properly performed e Setting range for offset value and gain value 10 to 10V e gain value offset value gt 3 7V 2 When analog input
45. 4 Set Digital clipping function enable disable setting to 0 Enable Digital clipping function H Available to Product Information Set digital clipping function wl 130410000000000 4 or later ne Digital chipping function enable disable setting a Enable Logging function UiEnS faiwailahle Fa Bendiuct Tnfnematinon In this case scale conversion is performed on the digital clipped digital output value Therefore the digital output range of the scaling value digital operation value is determined as 0 to 32000 100 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 4 Setting example of when the digital clipping function scaling function and shift function are used together When setting as follows for the A D converter module with input range of 0 to 5V e Scaling upper limit value 12000 e Scaling lower limit value 2000 e Shifting amount to conversion value 2000 e Digital clipping function enable disable setting 0 Enable 1 Set A D conversion enable disable setting to 0 Enable WD Project window gt Intelligent Function Module gt module name gt Parameter tem E E a E Basic setting Sets method of A D c beste A D con EL O Enable enable disable setting Pos Averaging process setting ME Time Average Count 1 Disable 2 Set Scaling enable disable setting to 0 Enable
46. CC IE Field Network Configuration Setting Module No 1 Set up Network configuration Assignment Method 2 The column contents for refresh device will be changed corresponding to refresh parameter setting contents i Points Start Please reopen the window after completing refresh parameter setting when changing refresh parameter i Start End IE Setting EE Setting Refresh Des Number 5 PLCs Station No Station Type Points start End Points Start End RX RY i inteligent Device station ase co00 onrr 256 oooo corr ximongsey ivionnrese wi 4 Display the Auto Refresh setting screen for the A D converter module L60AD4 and configure the setting as follows X Project window gt Parameter gt Network Parameter gt Ethernet CC IE MELSECNET gt kea button Network Parameter CC IE Field Refresh Parameter Module No 1 Sele Assignment Method Points Start i Start End Link Side Ele Side a Transfer 5B Transfer SW pe fae G sie con ae 1000 ooon TransferS CCT dC Transfer G Transfer CCT dC Transfer E CC CCC 5 Write the set parameter to the CPU module of the master station and reset the CPU module or turn off and then on the programmable controller power supply W Online gt Write to PLC ma or Power OFF ON jNpoW pe H 0 P9 JOSUUOND SI NMponN JOWSAUND C V USUMA EOL 169 6 Settin
47. Conversion Module Start 1 0 No 0010 Module model name L60AD4 Setting item Current value CH1 A D conversion completed flag CH2 A D conversion completed flag r Flash ROM setting Details tet nue fla Current value Monitoring odule Bese display Cannot execute test edule Load file Make text file jiton Stop monitor qv soyeinByuod X9 Jo uonessdo Z 6 xipueddy ay 10 e1nfuo X9 JO adojsasq X9 BuisN u yM 6 xipueddy 267 Appendix 10 External Dimensions The following shows the external dimensions of A D converter module 1 L60AD4 L60ADVL8 L60ADIL8 DIN rail center 1 AA RACA ACA UCARA UCI RAUCA RACE ACAI 95 117 Unit mm 268 INDEX A D conversion accuracy 0200000 240 A D conversion completed flag Un G10 200 A D conversion completed flag XE 196 A D conversion enable disable function 69 A D conversion enable disable setting Un GO 199 A D conversion method 00000 ee 69 Averaging processing 000 0s eens 70 Sampling processing 000008 69 Addition of modules 000 eee eee 53 Auto refresh ead Race kG as ada te ae BA See Ge 59 Averaging process setting Un G24 Un G25 204 Averaging process setting used to replace Q64AD Q68ADV Q68ADI UN G9 2 0 0 200 CH1 Industrial shipment settings offset value L
48. LOA lt 6 inn sh os dp athe seater EMA aes he 4 218 CH1 to CH4 Logging points after trigger Un G1048 to UMG TOT a dt dae ate tee teh aot tite ht eae 221 CH1 to CH4 Number of logging data Un G1106 to JING 1109 Jeri eh ed Ka Reale ew dene has 225 CH1 to CH4 Shifting amount to conversion value Un G150 to Un G153 2 ee eee 213 CH1 to CH4 Trigger data Un G1064 to Un G1067 PS igs tees gehen a te Stel he Be as Gee ee 222 CH1 to CH4 Trigger detection time Un G1154 to ING 1169 wc ure ay ate taeda aed dee eateee wads 22 CH1 to CH4 Trigger pointer Un G1114 to Un G1117 ees E T EA iets eleva e 4 eee keen en ote coer cde ete 226 CH1 to CH4 Trigger setting value Un G1082 to GT OG Sie a wes etd ces oe a aie ak ea Dees ne a 223 CH1 to CH4 Unit scaling setting Un G1324 to GSAT Vere ses cc te athe eect ee ance a 229 CH1 to CH8 A D conversion status Un G1700 to WING 1707 sts ehh Gk ie io eee a Di be SG A 232 CH1 to CH8 Analog input monitor Un G1710 Un G1712 Un G1714 Un G1716 Un G1718 Un G1720 Un G1722 Un G1724 2 02000 232 CH1 to CH8 Analog input monitor unit Un G1711 Un G1713 Un G1715 Un G1717 Un G1719 Un G1721 Un G1723 Un G1725 233 CH1 to CH8 Digital output value Un G11 to Un G18 Seba lat Abs a seh ss dela Pua pak ener te a es copa atta 201 CH1 to CH8 Input signal error detection setting value Un G142 to Un G149 2 2 ee eee 212 CH1 to CH8 Scaling value digital operation value
49. MELSEC L series programmable controller to handle the product correctly When applying the program examples introduced in this manual to an actual system ensure the applicability and confirm that it will not cause system control problems MRelevant modules L60AD4 LGOADVL8 L60ADIL8 Remark Eo ooo eo ooo ooo Unless otherwise specified this manual describes the program examples in which the I O numbers of X Y00 to X YOF are assigned for an A D converter module For I O number assignment refer to the following MELSEC L CPU Module User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals Operating procedures are explained using GX Works2 When using GX Developer or GX Configurator AD refer to the following e When using GX Developer or GX Configurator AD Page 263 Appendix 9 EE SE SE SE ZE E ZE ZE ZE ZE ZE ZE ZE ZE I ZE E I T o o o o o o o o o o O o e o o o o o o o D D E E o E O e S D E o D o e e e e e a E a E COMPLIANCE WITH EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES 1 Method of ensuring compliance To ensure that Mitsubishi programmable controllers maintain EMC and Low Voltage Directives when incorporated into other machinery or equipment certain measures may be necessary Please refer to one of the following manuals e MELSEC L CPU Module User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection e MELSEC L CC Link IE Field Network Head Module User s Manual e Safety Guidelines This manual is included with
50. MODULE 1 2 Features 1 Common features of the A D converter module a Comparing monitoring the measurement target By using the input signal error detection function input range extension function or alarm output function process alarm the statuses of connected devices can be monitored easily b Easy setting with GX Works2 Programming is reduced since the initial setting or auto refresh setting can be configured on the screen In addition setting status and operation status of modules can be checked easily 2 Features of the L60AD4 a Response by high speed conversion The high speed conversion of 20us channel is achieved b Detailed control by high resolution In all analog input ranges the high resolution of 1 20000 is achieved c Reliability by high accuracy The accuracy for the maximum value of the digital output value is 0 1 25 5 C 0 2 0 to 55 C d Operation of digital output values The shift function digital clipping function and difference conversion function as well as the scaling function can represent the digital output value in a numeric value easy to understand according to the use environment e Logging function An analysis of data collected by logging function increases maintainability of used system N Tl 4 se P Cc s 4 gt n f Flow amount integration function The flow amount integration function executes the integral processing of input instantaneous
51. Module in the Project window 73 4 The mouse operation example for GX Works2 is provided below ME MELSOFT Series GX Works Unset Project PRG MAIN Project Edit Find Replace Compile View Online Debug Diagno Menu bar i XZ Online Z gt Write to PLC Select Online on the menu bar and then select Write to PLC 1 Jit e ES ET 4 UH lt gt L FS sFS F6 SFG Fe FS Fs s Navigation a ae CP Ga A 2 Ao Parameter Intelligent Function Module Global Device Comment A window selected in the view selection area is displayed W Project window 5 gt Parameter gt PLC Parameter Select Project from the view selection area to open the Project window In the Project window expand Parameter and select PLC Parameter Program Setting POU B Program a MAIN 3 Local Device Comment e Device Memory Device Initial Value T i a User Library is Connection Destination View selection area Unlabeled 11 Pages describing instructions are organized as shown below The following illustration is for explanation purpose only and should not be referred to as an actual documentation Instruction name Oshows the devices applicable to the instruction Descriptions Of me setting data and data type Descriptions Of control data if any 12 6 4 2 Disconnecting a connection SP SOCCLOSE
52. O O SVHOUGOSOOVUSUUEUESY D Or OT OO Stal er ic ON Q reise AR me g Paice ay ON RARA EEEIEE EEE E eee 913 Beseeenn a ON RARA Terminal block Terminal block ALM ALM E Ue E We L60ADVL8 RUN ERR 10 10V L6O0ADIL8 RUN ERR 0 20mA c L60ADIL8 E 47 3 Removal and installation of the terminal block The following shows how to remove and install the terminal block a Removal procedure 1 Open the terminal cover and loosen the terminal block mounting screw Terminal block mounting screw 2 Using the terminal block fixing holes as a fulcrum remove the terminal block b Installation procedure Temin 1 Fully insert the projections on the top of the terminal block into the terminal block fixing holes and press the terminal block until it snaps into place 2 Open the terminal cover and tighten the terminal block mounting screw Terminal block mounting screw P 48 CHAPTER 6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 6 3 Wiring 1 Wiring to a terminal block The following shows wirings to a terminal block a L60AD4 e For the voltage input c as or V s CH2 e mp ae CH3 SATE Te CH4 ca xO KC v a 3 gt _ O n E l T e For the current input Q CH1 cH1 V CH1 EAX Ae v N SLD CH2 CH2 Vt oe Spo Ne j SLD CH3 Ea I oO O lt L c3 KO
53. O characteristics resolution Accuracy accuracy for the maximum value of the digital output value Conversion speed Absolute maximum input Offset gain setting count Isolation method Dielectric withstand voltage Insulation resistance Number of occupied I O points External interface Applicable wire size Applicable solderless terminal Internal current consumption 5VDC Weight 0 to 20mA Current CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Model L60ADIL8 8 channels 0 to 20mADC input resistance 250 Q 8192 to 8192 32768 to 32767 Analog input range Digital output value Resolution 0 to 20mMA 2500nA 0 to 8000 4 to 20mA 2000nA Current 4 to 20mA Extended mode 2000 to 9000 2500nA 1660nA 2 Ambient temperature 20t5 C 0 to 55 C 4 to 20mA Within 0 2 16digit 4 to 20mA Extended mode 1ms channel Analog input range Within 1 80digit Current 30mA 4 Up to 10000 counts Between input terminals and programmable controller power supply photocoupler isolation Between input channels no isolation Between input terminals and programmable controller power supply 500VACrms for 1 minute Between input terminals and programmable controller power supply 50 0VDC 10MQ or higher 16 points I O assignment Intelligent 16 points 18 point terminal block 0 3 to 0 75mm R1 25 3 solderless terminals with sleeve are not usable 0 21A 0 19kg 4 For details on the I O conversion characteristics ref
54. O conversion characteristics refer to the following I O conversion characteristic of A D conversion Page 235 Appendix 3 2 Maximum resolution in the user range setting 3 Except when receiving noise influence 4 The default value is 80us channel 5 The logging function can be used only in the middle speed 80us channel or low speed 1ms channel 6 The flow amount integration function can be used only in the low speed 1ms channel gi This is a momentary current value which does not cause damage to internal resistors of the module The maximum input current value for constant application is 24mA 8 If the number of offset gain settings exceeds 50000 times an error error code 170 occurs 21 2 L60ADVL8 Item Number of analog input channels Analog input Voltage Digital output value Digital output When using the scaling function I O characteristics resolution Accuracy accuracy for the maximum value of the digital output value 3 Conversion speed Absolute maximum input Offset gain setting count 4 Isolation method Dielectric withstand voltage Insulation resistance Number of occupied I O points External interface Applicable wire size Applicable solderless terminal Internal current consumption 5VDC Weight Model L60ADVL8 8 channels 10 to 10 VDC input resistance 1 8M Q 16384 to 16383 32768 to 32767 Analog input range Digital output value Resolution 0 to 10V 0 to 1600
55. S X ipu ddy Appendix 5 2 G P OFFGAN Command G OFFGAN M Command GP OFFGAN f H Internal device device a ee Constant 1 Setting data Device Description Setting range Data type Un Start I O number of module 0 to FEH BIN 16 bits Mode change 0 ch d to th mod changed to the norma we e 0 1 BIN 16 bits 1 changed to the offset gain setting mode When a value other than above is set the mode is changed to the offset gain setting mode 2 Functions This instruction switches the operation mode of the A D converter module e Normal mode offset gain setting mode Offset gain setting mode flag XA is on and the RUN LED flashes e Offset gain setting mode normal mode Offset gain setting mode flag XA is off and the RUN LED is on Point When the mode is switched from the offset gain setting mode to the normal mode Module READY X0 turns from OFF to ON Note that if a program includes the initial settings to be executed at ON of Module READY X0 this instruction performs the initial setting process When the mode is switched from the offset gain setting mode to the normal mode the A D converter module operates under the previous operating condition lf the mode to be switched to is the same as the current mode if this instruction is performed when the operation mode is the normal mode and 0 Changed to the normal mode is set or when the operation mode is the of
56. The data collection can be stopped by using the status change of the data as a trigger The data retention around the trouble allows easy symptom analysis 1 Logging function a Collecting logging data Logging data is collected as follows e For each channel 10000 points of latest digital output values or scaling values can always be collected e The data can be collected at intervals of 80uUs at a minimum and of 3600s at a maximum An address where the latest oldest data is stored can be checked with the latest head pointer Digital output value or scaling value a or or ae digital operation value be eeeeeeee Address 0 lt 4 Head pointer The address of the oldest logging data can be checked Logging cycle Address 9998 i Address 9999 4 Latest pointer The address of the latest logging data can be checked Logging data are stored in buffer memory areas After the storage number has reached the maximum 10000 points the stored data is overwritten with the subsequent data in order from the Address 0 area 108 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS b Stopping logging Logging data is refreshed at high speed during logging To refer to the logging data without paying attention to the refresh cycle stop the logging operation Logging can be stopped by the hold trigger lt gt Page 115 Section 8 14 1 e A hold trigger allows two options Logging hold request or Level trigger e The num
57. This is the maximum resolution in user range setting Point Use the value within the practical analog input range and practical digital output range If a value is out of the range the resolution and accuracy may not fall within the range of performance specifications Do not use the value in the dotted line region in the graph of voltage input characteristic Do not input a value of 15V or more This may damage the elements 236 APPENDICES b Current input characteristic The following graph shows the current input characteristic Practical analog input range Practical analog input range Digital output value O 20000 3 A 4 1 5 J 9 0 30 20490 26 20 10 0 4 10 207 22 30 Analog input current mA No Input range setting Offset value Digital output value 2 Resolution 0 to 20000 3 4 to 20mA 4 to 20mA Extended mode mode zo ee a a 5000 to 22500 800nA 2 ees dani 1 Set the offset value and gain value in the user range setting within the range satisfying the following conditions If the following conditions are not satisfied A D conversion may not be properly performed e gain value lt 20mA offset value gt OMA e gain value offset value gt 16 0mA 2 When analog input is performed exceeding the range of digital output value the digital output value is fixed to the maximum or minimum Analog input current mA Digital output value Input range setting 4 to 20mA 480 20479
58. area System area System area System area System area System area System area System area System area System area System area Default 1 1 5000 5000 5000 5000 a o O O1 N Read Write 2 R W R W OJIOJOJO R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W OJIOJOJO R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W IW Item enabled by turning on and off Operating condition setting request Y9 O O O O O O Ov OO 0 OJIOJOJO CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Item enabled by 4 turning on and off Default Read Write 2 oe L60ADVL8 L60ADIL8 Operating condition setting request Y9 Address Address decimal hexadecimal L60AD4 1084 43CH CH3 Trigger setting value System area O 1085 43DH CH4 Trigger setting value System area O 1086 to 1089 43EH to 441H System area 1094 to 1117 45DH CH4 Trigger pointer System area 1122 462H 1123 1463H rl Loggmg cycle monitor value H2 Loggi monitor value 1127 467H 1128 468H 1129 469H ie Logging cycle monitor value 1130 46AH 1131 46BH _ _ a a C sossalppyy AIOWsl yng Jo IS S E Slsla an 1154 482H 1155 1156 1157 483H 484H 485H CH1 Trigger 1116 45CH CH3 Trigger pointer System area ae First two Last two digits of digits of System area the year the year
59. converts the output digital value to the set range of the scaling upper limit value and scaling lower limit value The converted values are stored in CHO Scaling value digital operation value Un G54 to Un G61 1 Concept of scaling setting J If the input range is set to 10 to 10V in the L60AD4 For the scaling lower limit value set a value corresponding to the lower limit value of the input range 20000 For the scaling upper limit value set a value corresponding to the upper limit value of the input range 20000 2 Calculation of the scaling value digital operation value The scaling value is calculated based on the following formulas Values after the decimal point are rounded off during scale conversion e Voltage 0 to 10V 0 to 5V 1 to 5V 1 to 5V Extended mode user range setting e Current 0 to 20mA 4 to 20mA 4 to 20mA Extended mode user range setting Scaling value _ _Dxx SH SL SL digital operation value DMax e When voltage is 10 to 10V Scaling value _ _DX X SH SL SH SL digital operation value Dmax DMin 2 Item Description Dy Digital output value DMax Maximum digital output value of the input range used DMin Minimum digital output value of the input range used Sy Scaling upper limit value SL Scaling lower limit value a Although the digital output value range in the extended mode is 5000 to 22500 L60AD4 or 2000 to 9000 L60ADVL8 L60ADIL8 this function scales digital output
60. digital operation value Un G57 222 APPENDICES 38 Level data O Un G1072 to Un G1081 ZB This is the area for storing the data to be monitored when the level trigger of the logging function is used 10 types of data are available Level data 0 Un G1072 to Level data 9 Un G1081 Use Level data O Un G1072 to Un G1081 to monitor device values in other than the A D converter module and generate triggers For details on the logging function refer to the following e Logging function Page 108 Section 8 14 a Setting range Setting range is 32768 to 32767 b Default value All are set to 0 39 CHO Trigger setting value Un G1082 to Un G1085 EH When the logging function is used set a level where a level trigger is generated For details on the logging function refer to the following e Logging function Page 108 Section 8 14 a Setting range Setting range is 32768 to 32767 b Enabling the setting Turn on and off Operating condition setting request Y9 to enable the setting c Default value All channels are set to 0 sessaippy Aiowayy yng Jo sjieleg zZ xipueddy 223 224 40 CHO Head pointer Un G1090 to Un G1093 ZB The buffer memory address where the oldest data is stored can be checked in CHO Logging data Un G5000 to Un G44999 This area stores the offset value 0 to 9999 counted from the start address CH1 Un G5000 CH2 Un G15000 CH3 Un G25000 CH4 Un G35000
61. ee ee ee ee ee ew ewe ew ew ee ee eB ee ee ee ee ee ee X X X X X X End creating a program 157 10 2 When Using the Module in a Standard System Configuration This section describes the following system configuration and a program example of operation condition 1 System configuration The following shows a system configuration example A D converter module L60AD4 CPU module L26CPU BT Input module LX40C6 Output module LY42NT1P COCA Ul x SSS Tas Vaais ais a8 O 4 ae S SSi SAG ae S INA A es FONACASS CA PAN 4 Power supply module L61P x00 XIY10 X Y30 X v40 xyso XEND cover LEC to to to to to XIYOF X Y2F X Y3F X Y4F X Y8F 2 Programming condition This program reads digital output values enabled for A D conversion at CH1 to CH3 in the A D converter module CH1 executes sampling processing CH2 executes averaging processing every 50 times and CH3 executes A D conversion every 10 moving averages If an error occurs in the module an error code is displayed in BCD notation 158 CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING 3 Switch setting Set the input range and the operation mode kT Project window Intelligent Function Module c gt L60AD4 c gt Switch Setting The following are available for the Input Range Setting for product information 130410000000000 A or later 4to 20mA extension mode 1 to 5V extension mode This dialog setting is linked to
62. flow amount from a flow meter and easily calculates the flow amount in a certain period By registering outputting the calculated flow amount system operation can be improved and man hours for programming can be reduced 3 Features of the L6QADVL8 and L60ADIL8 The L60ADVL8 and L60ADIL8 have the same basic function as that of the L6OAD4 and have the analog input capability twice as that of the L6OAD4 eight channels This reduces the number of analog input modules used lowers the cost and saves the spaces in the system that uses a large number of analog inputs 17 CHAPTER 2 PART NAMES The following table shows part names of the A D converter module FAR _ 6 A VA IA AATAY E imi a Description Levers for connecting modules Displays the operating status of the A D converter module On The module is operating normally Flashing In the offset gain setting mode Off The 5V power off or watchdog timer error has occurred RUN LED green Displays the errors and status of the A D converter module On an error has occurred except for error code 112 1 3 ERR LED red ee ep Flashing Error code 112 has occurred Off The module is operating normally Displays the alarm status of the A D converter module 4 ALM LED red On Alarm process alarm is occurring 2 Flashing Input signal error detection is occurring 2 Off The module is operating normally DIN rail hook A hook
63. in the changed channel However the integral processing stops in the channel in which A D conversion enable disable setting Un GO changes from Enable 0 to Disable 1 and CHO Integrated flow amount Un G1332 to Un G1339 maintains the value before changing e The integration cycle changes in the unchanged channel CHO Time Average Count Average Moving Average Un G1 to e The integration cycle changes in the changed channel However Un G4 Averaging process setting used to replace Q64AD Un G9 Averaging process setting Un G24 when the integration cycle is the same as that before changing CHO Integrated flow amount Un G1332 to Un G1339 of the changed channel is not cleared and the intergral processing continues CHO Integration cycle setting Un G1308 to Un G1311 e The intergral processing continues in the unchanged channel CHO Flow amount time unit setting Un G1316 to Un G1319 The parameter of the intergral processing changes in the changed channel CHO Unit scaling setting Un G1324 to Un G1327 Point e The intergral processing continues in the unchanged channel If Operating condition setting request Y9 is turned on and off and one of the following error occurs the flow amount integration function turns disabled Setting error of CHO Time Average Count Average Moving Average Un G1 to Un G4 error code 200 error code 300 error code 310 Setting error of Conversion speed setting Un G26 error c
64. malfunction Disposal Precautions CAUTION When disposing of this product treat it as industrial waste CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT 1 Mitsubishi programmable controller the PRODUCT shall be used in conditions i where any problem fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT if any shall not lead to any major or serious accident and ii where the backup and fail safe function are systematically or automatically provided outside of the PRODUCT for the case of any problem fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT 2 The PRODUCT has been designed and manufactured for the purpose of being used in general industries MITSUBISHI SHALL HAVE NO RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY AND ALL RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY BASED ON CONTRACT WARRANTY TORT PRODUCT LIABILITY FOR ANY INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONS OR LOSS OR DAMAGE TO PROPERTY CAUSED BY the PRODUCT THAT ARE OPERATED OR USED IN APPLICATION NOT INTENDED OR EXCLUDED BY INSTRUCTIONS PRECAUTIONS OR WARNING CONTAINED IN MITSUBISHI S USER INSTRUCTION AND OR SAFETY MANUALS TECHNICAL BULLETINS AND GUIDELINES FOR the PRODUCT Prohibited Application Prohibited Applications include but not limited to the use of the PRODUCT in e Nuclear Power Plants and any other power plants operated by Power companies and or any other cases in which the public could be affected if any problem or fault occurs in the PRODUCT e Railway compa
65. module L60AD4 Sampling processing Applicable without making any change Averaging process If the first order delay filter is set in the buffer memory address Q68AD G Count average Un GQ9 set the other averaging processing to the buffer memory Moving average address Un G24 First order delay filter Note the following Setting Un G24 e Set 0 to the buffer memory address Un G9 of the module Sampling processing Applicable without making any change Averaging process If the first order delay filter is set in the buffer memory address Q66AD DG Count average Un GQ9 set the other averaging processing to the buffer memory Moving average address Un G24 First order delay filter Note the following Setting Un G24 e Set 0 to the buffer memory address Un GQ of the module Sampling processing Averaging processing Q64ADH Count average Applicable without making any change Moving average Setting Un G24 260 APPENDICES b When a program is applied to the L60QADVL8 or L60ADIL8 Module Applied from Applied to Q68ADV Q68ADI Q68AD G L60ADVL8 L60ADIL8 Q66AD DG Point Averaging process specification Applied from Sampling processing Averaging processing Count average Setting Un G9 Sampling processing Averaging processing Count average Moving average First order delay filter Setting Un G24 Sampling processing Averaging processing Count average Moving average First order delay filter Setting U
66. offset value L Un G218 to CH4 User range settings gain value H Un G233 Offset gain value Reference value hexadecimal OV Approx 00000007H 1V Approx 00000CD4H Voltage 5V Approx 0000400CH 10V Approx 00008011H OmA Approx 00000007H Current 4mA Approx 00000CD4H 20mA 2 Approx 0000400CH 4 This is the value that is stored in user range offset value at the time of shipping 2 This is the value that is stored in user range gain value at the time of shipping b LE0ADVL8 e Reference table for CH1 Industrial shipment settings offset value Un G202 to CH8 Industrial shipment settings gain value Un G217 Address decimal peecription Reference value CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8 hexadecimal Industrial shipment settings offset 202 204 206 208 210 212 214 216 ia an nto Dee Approx 8000H e Reference table for CH1 User range settings offset value Un G218 to CH4 User range settings gain value Un G233 Offset gain value Reference value hexadecimal ov Approx 8000H 1V Approx 898CH 5V Approx AFBCH 10V 2 Approx DF79H 4 This is the value that is stored in user range offset value at the time of shipping 2 This is the value that is stored in user range gain value at the time of shipping 143 sonje A UleN NeSHO Bunozs y pue Huines 648 144 c L60ADIL8 e Reference table for CH1 Industrial shipment settings offset value Un G202 to CH8 Industrial shipment settings gain va
67. only and FD for word data only 4 In the Constant and Others columns a device s that can be set for each instruction is shown e The following data types can be used Data type Description Bit Bit data or the start number of bit data BIN 16 bit 16 bit binary data or the start number of word device BIN 32 bit 32 bit binary data or the start number of double word device BCD 4 digit Four digit binary coded decimal data BCD 8 digit Eight digit binary coded decimal data Real number Floating point data Character string Character string data Device name Device name data 13 Pages describing functions I O signals and buffer memory areas are organized as shown below The following illustration is for explanation purpose only and should not be referred to as an actual documentation 8 2 A D Conversion Enable Disable Function Each icon indicates the available module By disabling A D conversion forthe channels you are not using the conversion cycle can be reduced 1 Setting procedure Set A D conversion enable disable setting to 0 Enable WD Project window e Intelligent Function Module lt gt module name lt gt Parameter eee S Ie CHi Basic setting Sets method of A D c A D conversion enable disable setting O Enable Averaging process setting 8 3 A D Conversion Method Y Sets whether to perform sampling processing or averaging processing for each channel 1 Sampling processing Analog input v
68. pesca Input signal error detection setting 1 Disable F Input AEE E popia setting valie O Item Setting range Input signal error detection setting value 0 to 25 0 Point if 4 Disconnection Detection is set to a channel whose input range is not 4 to 20mA Extended mode or 1 to 5V Extended mode an error occurs The error code 820 is stored in Latest error code Un G19 and Error flag XF turns on The setting in Input signal error detection setting is ignored when Input signal error detection extension setting is set to other than 0 Disable An input signal error is detected according to the setting of Input signal error detection extension setting When the specifications of disconnection detection 2mA 4 to 20mA Extended mode or 0 5V input range 1 to 5V Extended mode do not fill the needs of the system set Input signal error detection setting to 2 Lower Detection and set Input signal error detection setting value to a judging value to detect a disconnection 84 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 8 9 Warning Output Function Process Alarm Common Outputs an alarm when the digital output value enters a preset range When an operation function such as the scaling function is used the scaling value digital operation value is the target of detection Within the warning output range Out of the warning output range Included Digital output value Warning issued Upper u
69. resolution 1 12000 or 1 16000 SOLOS O UM S8DUSJOYIG Q X pu ddy Average time 4 to 5000ms 2 to 5000ms Averaging process setting used to replace Q68ADV or Q68ADI Un GQ9 Averaging process setting used to replace Q64AD Un G9 Averaging process setting Un G24 Averaging process specification E E E E H YY Ss Fixed to 000 i 00H With temperature drift correction 01H to FFH eligant tunetion value other than 00n Without temperature drift correction module switch setting OH Normal Resolution Mode 1H to FH OH Normal resolution mode iu 1H to Fu A value other than On High resolution mode ivalle olner than Or lt Pigiresoluion mode Ou Normal Resolution Mode 1H to FH A D conversion processing value other than Ou Offset gain setting mode When Operating condition setting request YQ is turned from OFF to ON digital values are cleared Q64AD has no scaling value Digital output value When Operating condition setting request Y9 is turned from scaling value OFF to ON digital values and scaling values are held 259 Appendix 8 1 Precautions for Applying Q Series Sequence Program The initial setting program of a Q series A D converter module is applicable to the program of the L60AD4 L60ADVL8 L60ADIL8 for the input signals and the buffer memory assignment of the L60AD4 L60ADVL8 L60ADIL8 are compatible between the L6OAD4 L60ADVL8 L60ADIL8 and Q64AD Q68ADV Q68ADI The reso
70. shall be accepted by Mitsubishi s local overseas FA Center Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ 4 Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability Regardless of the gratis warranty term Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation of damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi loss in opportunity lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi products special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not compensation for accidents and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products replacement by the user maintenance of on site equipment start up test run and other tasks 5 Changes in product specifications The specifications given in the catalogs manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice 273 TRADEMARKS Microsoft Windows Windows Vista Windows NT Windows XP Windows Server Visio Excel PowerPoint Visual Basic Visual C and Access are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States Japan and other countries Intel Pentium and Celeron are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corp The SD and SDCH logos are either registered trademarks or trademarks of SD 3C LLC All other company names and product names used in
71. signal error detection setting value is calculated by the following formula Lower limit value of each Input signal error detection Input signal error detection _ range lower limit value x 4000 setting value Gain value of each range Offset value of each range CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS Remark Eo ooo ooo ooo oer er The following table lists the lower limit value offset value or gain value for each range Analog input range Gain value x J Voltage Analog input value when the digital output value is as follows Analog input value set as a Analog input value set as a User range setting e 20000 for the L60AD4 offset value by the user gain value by the user e 8000 for the L60ADVL8 Current Analog input value when the digital output value is as follows Analog input value set as a Analog input value set as a e 20000 for the L60AD4 offset value by the user gain value by the user e 8000 for the L60ADIL8 User range setting EE EE SE ZE ZE ZE ZE ZE ZE ZE ZE ZE IE IE I I S S S I D D o o o o O eee o o een o D o O o D O O ewan O O O O O O a S S D a D D D O e CUO 19 UOI OUN4 uonoa q 10114 JeubIs yndu 2 8 6 Example of input signal error detection To detect an input signal error when the analog input value is 2 4mA or smaller in a channel where an input range is set to 4 to 20mA substitute the following values into the input signal error detection lower limit value e Input signal error detection lower li
72. the function i 8 2 conversion cycles Analog input values are converted into digital at every sampling cycle Page 69 Section Sampling processing a and stored in the buffer memory as digital output values 8 3 1 A D conversion is performed for a set period of time and averaging processing is performed on the total value excluding the maximum Time and the minimum values The values obtained in averaging Page 70 Section average processing are stored in the buffer memory The number of processing 8 3 2 a times within a set period of time changes depending on the number of channels where A D conversion is enabled AID A D conversions are performed a set number of times and averaging processing is performed on the total value excluding the maximum and the minimum values The values obtained in averaging processing are stored in the buffer memory The time taken for the mean value calculated through average processing to be stored in the buffer memory changes depending on the number of channels where A D conversion is enabled conversion method Averaging processing Page 71 Section 8 3 2 b Count average The average of a specified number of digital output values is calculated at every sampling cycle and is stored in the buffer memory Because the target set of values for averaging processing shifts to another to involve a subsequent value at every sampling processing the latest digital output
73. the LGOADVL8 and L60ADIL8 Turn on and off Operating condition setting request Y9 Record the stored values of the following buffer memory areas e Pass data classification setting Un G200 L60AD4 only e Un G202 to Un G233 7 For the source A D converter module Turn off the power supply Replace the A D converter module Turn on the power supply Write the previously recorded data into the following buffer memory areas e Pass data classification setting Un G200 L60AD4 only e Un G202 to Un G233 Turn on User range write request YA For the destination A D converter module Check that Offset gain setting mode flag XA is on Turn off User range write request YA Check that the destination A D converter module operates with the restored offset gain values When replacing modules you can prevent the saved offset gain value data from getting deleted by doing one of the following before turning the power off e Use latch settings for the internal device of the destination module e Save the data onto an SD memory card To write data use the SP FWRITE instruction To read data use the SP FREAD instruction e Store the saved data Areas used differ depending on the modules For details refer to the following e List of Buffer Memory Addresses gt Page 28 Section 3 5 141 sonje A uleD eso Buuojsey pue Bulres 648 142 Turn on and off Operating condition setting request Y
74. update the difference conversion reference value restart the difference conversion by changing Difference conversion trigger Trigger request 1 gt No request 0 gt Trigger request 1 again ON Operating condition setting OFF request Y9 ON Operating condition setting completed flag X9 OFF CHU Difference conversion trigger Un G172 to Un G175 Trigger request 1 No request 0 Trigger request 1 Scaling value digital operation value 9950 10001 X 10100 10010X 10510 X 12000 412100 X 13250 13000 13310 CHU Difference conversion Updated reference value 10000 X10000 410000 X10000 410000 X 10000 410000 A 10000 13000 13000 Un G180 to Un G183 en Not updated CHO Scaling value Gigi operation vee X a0 X Xio X10 Xoo Xaa Krooi o Yai Un G54 to Un G57 CHL Difference conversion aw N ar status flag Converting difference 1 Converting difference 1 Un G190 to Un G193 l c Operation of the maximum value and the minimum value The maximum value and the minimum value of the values acquired by the difference conversion are stored in CHO Maximum value and CHO Minimum value during the difference conversion However values before the difference conversion may be stored as follows To update the maximum value and the minimum value after the difference conversion start turn on and off Maximum value minimum value reset request YD tigger UMGI72 to Uni i7s Neweauest OX Toere OOOO trigger Un G172 t
75. us 1 ms 2 to 1000 times e L60ADVL8 L60ADIL8 Setting item Setting range Time Average 4 to 5000ms Count Average 4 to 62500 times Moving Average 2 to 1000 times Poya UOISJBAUOD C V 8 13 8 4 Input Range Extension Function Common Using this function the available input range in 4 to 20mA and 1 to 5V can be extended Input range sa Input range ie setting Input range Digital output value setting Input range Digital output value 4 to 20mA 0 to 8000 lt 1 to 5V 2000 to 9000 1 to 5V 1 to 5V L60ADVL8 L60ADIL8 Exten To dmode 00t055V L60ADVL8 L60ADIL8 1 Overview e The analog input value can be monitored in the extended mode even if errors vary depending on sensors and the analog input value is less than 4mA or 1V in the input range of 4 to 20mA and 1 to 5V e The slope of I O characteristics of the extended mode is the same as that of the normal range However the upper limit value and the lower limit value of the input range and the digital output value are extended For details refer to I O Conversion Characteristic of A D Conversion lt _ gt Page 235 Appendix 3 e The resolution is the same between the extended input range and the input range of 4 to 20mA and 1 to 5V for the L60AD4 800nA and 200uV This enables the A D conversion with higher resolution compared to the use of the input range of 0 to 20mA and 0 to 5V for the L60AD4 resolution of 1000nA and 250uV 2 Setting procedure
76. used Input signal error detection upper limit value Input signal error E Gain value of Gain value of Offset value of 9 detection setting value each range each range each range 1000 Input signal error detection lower limit value Input signal error Lower limit value Gain value of 7 Offset value of x detection setting value of each range each range each range 1000 x When the input signal error detection setting value is set to 100 10 Range to be used 4 to 20mA The upper and lower limit values of input signal error detection are as follows 100 Input signal error 20 20 4 x 21 6mA detection upper limit value 4000 100 Input signal error 4 20 4 x 2 4mA detection lower limit value 1000 e Conditions vary as follows depending on the setting in Input signal error detection extension setting Un G27 Un G28 Input signal error detection Detection condition extension setting Un G27 Un G28 iti Lower upper limit detection 1 At the input signal error detection upper limit value or the input signal error detection lower limit value Lower limit detection 2 At the input signal error detection lower limit value Upper limit detection 3 At the input signal error detection upper limit value e In 2mA or less or 0 5V or less Disconnection detection 4 e The setting of CHO Input signal error detection setting value Un G142 to Un G149 is ignored e Input range other than 4 to 20mA e
77. used to mount the module to a DIN rail 5 6 Terminal block 3 18 pin screw terminal block for connecting input signal lines of such as external devices 7 Terminal block cover Covers for preventing electric shock while the power is on 8 Serial number display Displays the serial number printed on the rating plate 4 Error Code List lt _ gt Page 179 Section 11 4 2 Alarm Code List Page 183 Section 11 5 3 Terminal Block for the signal assignment of the terminal block 3 Page 46 Section 6 2 18 CHAPTER 2 PART NAMES Memo 19 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS This chapter describes general specifications performance specifications function list list of I O signals and list of buffer memory address 3 1 General Specifications For the general specifications of the A D converter module refer to the following The manual Safety Guidelines the manual supplied with the a CPU module or head module 20 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 2 Performance Specifications The following table shows the performance specifications of the A D converter module Model Item L60AD4 Number of analog input channels 4 channels Voltage 10 to 10 VDC input resistance 1M Q Analog input 0 to 20mADC input resistance 250 Q Digital output value 20480 to 20479 Digital output When using the scaling function 32768 to 32767 Analog input range Digital output value Resolution 0 to 10V S00uUV 0 to 5V 0 to 20000 250uV 1 to
78. value 5 0 0 Disable default value 1 Upper and Lower Detection Input signal error Input signal error detection extension j Page 82 2 Lower Detection i detection extension setting Section 8 8 3 Upper Detection 4 Disconnection Detection 0 Enable Scaling enable disable setting 1 Disable default value Page 88 Scaling functi Ka Scaling upper limit value 32000 to 32000 default value 0 Section 8 10 Scaling lower limit value 32000 to 32000 default value 0 Buijes 19J WELeILed Z l P 94 Shift function Shifting amount to conversion value 32768 to 32767 default value 0 oon Section 8 11 Digital clipping Digital clipping function enable disable 0 Enable Page 99 function setting 1 Disable default value Section 8 12 Of Item Setting value Reference 0 Enable Loggi le disabl tti pgging eiaplealedere Peng 1 Disable default value acing Gateeseitin 0 Digital Output Value agmg g 1 Scaling Value Digital Operation Value default value us 80 to 32767 default value 4 Logging cycle setting value ms 1 to 32767 default value 4 s 1 to 3600 default value 4 0 us Logging cycle unit setting 1 ms default value 2 S Page 108 Logging function 2 ead Logging points after trigger 1 to 10000 default value 5000 Section 8 14 0 Disable default value 1 Above 2 Below 3 Pass Through Level trigger condition setting CH1 default value 54 CH2 default
79. values that are within the range of 0 to 20000 L60AD4 or 0 to 8000 L60ADVL8 L60ADIL8 For the setting example of scaling using the extended mode refer to the following e Example of scaling setting lt _ gt Page 90 Section 8 10 4 88 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 3 Setting procedure 1 Set A D conversion enable disable setting to 0 Enable kT Project window gt Intelligent Function Module gt gt module name gt Parameter Item CH1 Basic setting Sets method of A D c AB conversion enable disable setting peeved p Averaging process setting HI Time Average Count 1 Disable 2 Set Scaling enable disable setting to 0 Enable Scaling function Sets for scaling on 4 D con Sealing enable disable o Enable ne Scaling upper limit value cee Scaling lower limit value 1 Disable 3 Set values for Scaling upper limit value and Scaling lower limit value E Scaling function Sets for scaling on A D con vee Scaling enable disable setting 0 Enable vee Scaling upper limit value 16000 o Scaling lower limit value 4000 Item Setting range Scaling upper limit value 32000 to 32000 Scaling lower limit value Point Even if you set the scaling upper limit value and the scaling lower limi
80. when using GX Developer and GX Configurator AD 1 Compatible software version For compatible software version refer to the following MELSEC L CPU Module User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection Appendix 9 1 Operation of Gx Developer Configure the setting on the following screen when using GX Developer Screen name Application Reference I O assignment Set the type of module to be installed and the range of I O signal Page 263 Appendix 9 1 1 Switch setting Configure the switch setting of an intelligent function module Page 264 Appendix 9 1 2 Offset gain setting Configure the setting when using the user range setting for the input range Page 63 Section 7 5 2 1 I O assignment Configure the setting from I O assignment in PLC parameter kT Parameterc gt PLC parameter c gt I O assignment L parameter setting PLC name PLC system PLC file PLC RAS 1 PLCORAS 2 Device Program Boot file ere 10 assignment Built in Ethernet port Built in 0 function zetting ml Assignment a E ee cich seting Pie Lc TT Detailed setting oo llr E o E o E o D E _J aS ey o O Assigning the 0 address tt not necessary as the CPU does it automatically Leaving this setting Blank will not cause an error to occur JadojaAeq X9 Jo uonesedo 6 xipusddy Gvy soleinByu0Dd X9 JO sadojaasq XH BuisN u yM 6 Xipueddy Item Description Type Select Intelli Model name
81. y Maximum value minimum value L OFF reset request YD Maximum value minimum value ee Se reset completed flag XD 8 A D conversion completed flag XE Gaia A D conversion completed flag XE turns on when all A D conversion enabled channels complete the first A D conversions 9 Error flag XPE Error flag XF turns ON when an error occurs SSeS gt Controlled by the A D converter module gt Controlled by the program Latest error code Un G19 Error flag XF Error clear request YF a Turning off Error flag XF Error flag XF turns when the error cause is eliminated and either of the following two operations is performed e Turning on and off Error clear request YF e Turning on and off Operating condition setting request Y9 At the time of turning on Error clear request YF or Operating condition setting request Y9 Error flag XF and Latest error code Un G19 are cleared When Operating condition setting request Y9 is turned on and off A D conversion is reset and resumes from the beginning 196 APPENDICES Appendix 1 2 Output signal 1 Operating condition setting request Y9 QHA Turn on and off Operating condition setting request Y9 to enable the initial settings of the A D converter module For the timing of turning on and off the signal refer to the following e Operating condition setting completed flag X9 lt Page 193 Appendix 1 1 3 For the buffer mem
82. 0 625uV 0 to 8000 1 to p 1toBV 500uV Voltage W to 10V 16000 to 16000 625yV 1 to 5V Extended mode 2000 to 9000 500uV Ambient temperature 25 5 C 0 to 55 C 0 to 10V Within 0 2 32digit Within 1 160digit Voltage Analog input range Within 0 2 1 6digit Within 1 80digit 10 to 10V Within 0 2 32digit Within 1 160digit 1 to 5V Extended mode Within 0 2 1 6digit Within 1 80digit 1ms channel Voltage 15V Up to 10000 counts Between input terminals and programmable controller power supply photocoupler isolation Between input channels no isolation Between input terminals and programmable controller power supply 5 00VACrms for 1 minute Between input terminals and programmable controller power supply 50 0VDC 10MQ or higher 16 points I O assignment Intelligent 16 points 18 point terminal block 0 3 to 0 75mm R1 25 3 solderless terminals with sleeve are not usable 0 20A 0 19kg 1 For details on the I O conversion characteristics refer to the following I O conversion characteristic of A D conversion lt _ Page 235 Appendix 3 2 Maximum resolution in the user range setting 3 Except when receiving noise influence 4 If the number of offset gain settings exceeds 10000 times an error error code 170 occurs 22 3 L60ADIL8 Item Number of analog input channels Analog input Current Digital output value Digital output When using the scaling function I
83. 000 of CHO Logging data Un G5000 to Un G44999 To refer to the logging data check which area has valid data with CHO Number of logging data Un G1106 to Un G1109 CHOI Logging data Un G5000 to Un G44999 117 uonoun4 Bulb6o7 p19 8 14 2 Logging hold request A hold trigger is generated from a program at any timing Logging starts when On 1 is set to CHO Logging hold request Un G1008 to Un G1011 and stops after a preset number of the data is collected CH1 Logging hold request Un G1008 OFF 0 ON 1 A hold trigger is executed i The logging is held CH1 Logging data g Un G5000 to Un G14999 The data before the last CH1 Logging 10000 points are discarded points after trigger Un G1048 CH1 Number of logging data Un G1106 lt 10000 points apes gt Controlled by the A D converter module Point The following delay time occurs until the A D converter module receives a hold trigger after the value in CHO Logging hold request Un G1008 to Un G1011 is changed to On 1 Trigger delay Logging cycle Actual logging cycle Scan time of the CPU module Check that On 1 is set to CHO Logging hold flag Un G1016 to Un G1019 and change the value in CHO Logging hold request Un G1008 to Un G1011 to Off 0 If the value in CHO Logging hold request Un G1008 to Un G1011 is changed to Off 0 before the logging stops the logging does not stop Ifa value other than Off 0 and On 1
84. 0479 20000 e E e cece g aA af Output range 0 to 20000 ni d l p g 1 Digital output va Je 2 Value after Pi digital clipping 2 Value after digital clipping i e 14000 Scaling 12009 Upper limit value 20000 12000 Lower limit value 0 2000 Shift addition 4000 gf eee Adds 2000 to the value after scaling 2000 Analog input voltage V 4 Scaling value digital operation value 4 Scaling value digital operation value Input voltage V Scaling value digital operation value Point When the digital clipping function is used with the scaling function shift function and difference conversion function the scale conversion shift addition and difference conversion are executed on the value after digital clipping For details refer to the following e Processing each function lt _ gt Page 67 Section 8 1 102 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 8 1 3 Difference Conversion Function The scaling value digital operation value at the start of this function is treated as O reference value Thereafter values that increase or decrease from the reference value are stored in the buffer memory Scaling value digital operation value 20000 CHU Scaling value digital operation value Un G54 to Un G57 2500 CHO Difference conversion trigger Un G172 to Un G175 CHO Scaling value digital operation value CHU Difference conversion reference value Un G180 to Un G18
85. 1 If the input range setting is incorrect correct 1 Is input range setting correct the switch setting A digital output value is not updated if an input signal error is detected Check if Input signal error detected 3 is set to CHO A D conversion status Un G1700 to Un G1707 If Input signal error detected 3 is set check the values in Input signal error detection extension setting Un G27 Un G28 Input signal error detection setting Un G47 and CHO Input signal error detection setting value Un G142 to Un G149 and check that the input signal error detection upper limit value and the input signal error detection 2 Is there any input signal error lower limit value are appropriate For details on the input signal error detection function and input signal error detection extension function refer to the following e Input Signal Error Detection Function lt _ gt Page 77 Section 8 7 e Input Signal Error Detection Extension Function lt _ gt Page 82 Section 8 8 If the values are appropriate change the analog input value so that an input signal error does not occur After turning on and off Operating condition setting request Y9 compare the values of CH1 Industrial shipment settings offset value Un G202 to CH8 User range settings gain value Un G233 with the values in the range reference tables If the stored values are not desired offset gain values perform the offset gain setting again For the range referenc
86. 2 MITSUBISHI W NM ELECTRIC Mitsubishi Programmable Controller MELSEG L MELSEC L Analog Digital Converter Module User s Manual L60AD4 L60ADVL8 L60ADIL8 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Read these precautions before using this product Before using this product please read this manual and the relevant manuals carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly The precautions given in this manual are concerned with this product only For the safety precautions of the programmable controller system refer to the user s manual for the CPU module used In this manual the safety precautions are classified into two levels N WARNING and N CAUTION NWARNING Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions resulting in death or severe injury Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions N CAUTION resulting in minor or moderate injury or property damage Under some circumstances failure to observe the precautions given under CAUTION may lead to serious consequences Observe the precautions of both levels because they are important for personal and system safety Make sure that the end users read this manual and then keep the manual in a safe place for future reference Design Precautions NWARNING Do not write any data to the system area and write protect area R of the buffer memory in the intelligent function module Als
87. 25 126 3 Concept of unit scaling Unit scaling adjusts the number of digits of the integrated flow amount by multiplying instantaneous flow amount x DT T by a multiple of 10 Set the unit scaling to store the value after the decimal point of instantaneous flow amount x DT T in CHO Integrated flow amount Un G1332 to Un G13339 When the value of instantaneous flow amount x DT T is 123 45 By setting 100 as a unit scaling the value of instantaneous flow amount x DT T turns 12345 and the value after the decimal point can be stored in CHO Integrated flow amount Un G1332 to Un G1339 The following table lists the indications of the calculated value of DT T acquired by the combination of CHO Flow amount time unit setting Un G1316 to Un G1319 and CHO Integration cycle setting Un G1308 to Un G1311 and the value set in CHO Unit scaling setting Un G1324 to Un G1327 Setting value of CHO Flow amount Setting value of CHO Integration ee time unit setting Un G1316 to cycle setting Un G1308 to DT T Indication of unit scaling Un G1319 T Un G1311 DT sl CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 4 Setting procedure 1 2 3 4 5 6 Set A D conversion enable disable setting to 0 Enable WTD Project window gt Intelligent Function Module gt gt module name gt Parameter Basic setting Sets method of A D c AB conversion enable disable setting aa i see Averaging process setting it Time Average
88. 27 3 5 List of Buffer Memory Addresses 0 00 ccc eee eee ete 28 CHAPTER 4 PROCEDURES BEFORE STARTING THE OPERATION 41 CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 43 5 1 Overall System Configuration 0 0 0 eee eee eee neas 43 52 Applicable System scwcd dit be deo a a wide wish bk eh ates heel ee aR eee 44 5 3 Restrictions When A D Converter Module is Connected to Head Module 44 CHAPTER 6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 45 6 1 Installation Environment and Installation Position 0 0 0 0 ccc ee 45 Or OMMA EBOOK egarria ee Bee hat he nee a a oH ots ee ek Ree Oe ee oe ee eh es oe aeS 46 BS AIAG cee cars in Desai tenn r e re ae Oona aie accel ds ed eee aerate ed erate oes 49 OA Extemal WINING aca avs ars Bio aed eee ats ee ee ee wae a ae a nate nana ann ae 4 51 CHAPTER 7 VARIOUS SETTINGS 53 TA Addition OF MOQUICS eier a2 pe hive Bate packet ie ate Bees chon ee ee ae w bone odo OE BS 53 Gee SOWING SEUNG 2 tech tek Beats oer e he aes eee ess Syahid Shoe ene et ete 54 Zo salameler Sotera eirs Beir 2h BE Lene E a sh be ee ee hehe 56 FA AUO RONS iee thet bases otdebee oeae hh ow eee see ekbees obescees oad 59 To HOUSE Galli OMING edern nite Bee are the Re Bee e tute nook Shes cree hes Sree ete 60 7 5 1 Setting from GX Works2 Offset Gain Setting 0 0 0 eee 60 7 5 2 Setting from a program ss ac 3 diac ew LAO ee de wide dd ad ee t Ee eae dl Ges Hos oda dead wo 63 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 67 8 1
89. 3 CHL Scaling value digital operation value Un G54 to Un G57 CHO Difference conversion status flag Not converted 0 Un G190 to Un G193 A Converting difference 1 N Not converted 0 1 Operation of the difference conversion function When the difference conversion starts the scaling value digital operation value at that time the data stored inside the A D converter module before difference conversion is determined as the difference conversion reference value The value acquired by subtracting the difference conversion reference value from the scaling value digital operation value is stored in CHO Scaling value digital operation value Un G54 to Un G57 Therefore CHO Scaling value digital operation value Un G54 to Un G57 at the start of this function is 0 since the scaling value digital operation value equals to the difference conversion reference value at the start UO OUN UOISJSAUOD SOUSISOHIG E48 Scaling value digital operation value _ Scaling value l l Difference conversion reference value after difference conversion digital operation value 103 2 How to use difference conversion 104 a Starting difference conversion 1 Change CHO Difference conversion trigger Un G172 to Un G175 from No request 0 to Trigger request 1 The rise of No request 0 gt Trigger request 1 is detected as a trigger When the trigger is detected the scaling value digital operation va
90. 4 175 11 1 Checking on the Module Detailed Information The following describes how to check the errors on the module detailed information KO Diagnostics gt System Monitor 1 Select the A D converter module in Main System Monitor button Manbock a a a E E a LOZCPU P ET OC E isPoint Built in 1 0 16Point 0000 a a RE I Error Major Error A Moderate Error Ay Minor Error Assignment Error Assignment Incorrect lt 2 Module s Detailed Information of the Module s Detailed Information A D converter module is displayed E Pan MmOoOOMOOD ocr Rim Far iselm Git Error and Solution Contents Al Glear Error History solution Al The e cpa his ast equentially displayed from i an old error atest error is displayed at the bottom ine 176 CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 2 Checking by Latest Error Code Un G19 The following describes how to check the error codes and alarm codes in Latest error code Un G19 W Online gt Monitor gt Device Buffer Memory Batch Device i Device Name TiC Set Value Reference Program Reference Buffer Memory Module Start HES Address bec Modify Value Display Format Open Display Format Save Display Format Pec FE cle lala le lFle s 4 al2 i fo 011619 jojojojololojojojo ooo 0 112 ooo oo 0 le
91. 5 2 Section 6 1 6 4 Section 7 1 7 2 7 3 7 4 7 5 7 5 1 Section 8 3 8 4 8 5 8 6 8 8 Section 9 3 April 2010 SH NA 080899ENG B 9 4 Section 10 2 CHAPTER 11 Section 11 4 11 6 APPENDICES 2 Section 5 3 Section 7 5 1 Section 10 3 APPENDICES 8 1 Section 7 5 2 COMPLIANCE WITH EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES MANUAL PAGE ORGANIZATION Section 1 2 Section 3 2 3 2 1 3 3 3 5 Section 7 1 7 2 7 3 7 4 7 5 Section 8 1 8 3 8 6 8 7 8 9 October 2011 SH NA 080899ENG C 8 10 8 16 8 18 8 19 Section 9 2 9 3 Section 10 1 10 2 10 3 Section 11 1 11 4 11 5 11 6 Appendix 1 1 1 1 2 Appendix 2 Appendix 3 Appendix 9 1 9 2 Section 8 4 8 8 8 11 8 12 8 13 8 14 8 15 Appendix 7 July 2014 SH NA 080899ENG D Addition of the new models LGOADVL8 and L60ADIL8 and overall review due to its addition December 2014 SH NA 080899ENG E SAFETY PRECAUTIONS CHAPTER 2 Section 5 1 6 2 8 19 10 2 Appendix 10 June 2015 SH NA 080899ENG F Partial correction Appendix 2 Japanese manual version SH 080877 F This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual 2010 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION 272 WARRANTY Please confirm the following product warranty detai
92. 5V 200uV Voltage 10 to 10V 20000 to 20000 500uV I O characteristics resolution 1 to 5V Extended mode 5000 to 22500 200uV User range setting 20000 to 20000 307V 0 to 20mA 1000nA 0 to 20000 4 to 20mA 800nA Current 4 to 20mA Extended mode 5000 to 22500 800nA User range setting 20000 to 20000 1230nA 2 Within 0 1 20digit Accuracy Ambient temperature accuracy for the 2545 C maximum value of the Ambient temperature i re F digital output value 0 to 55 C Within 0 2 40digit High speed 20us channel Conversion speed Medium speed 80us channel Low speed 1ms channel Absolute maximum input Voltage 15V Current 30mA Offset gain setting count Up to 50000 counts Between I O terminals and programmable controller power supply photocoupler isolation Isolation method i Between input channels no isolation SUOIEOIJIOAdS SOUBWOLAd ZE Dielectric withstand voltage Between I O terminals and programmable controller power supply 500VACrms for 1 minute Insulation resistance Between I O terminals and programmable controller power supply 500VDC 10MQ or higher Number of occupied I O points 16 points I O assignment Intelligent 16 points External interface 18 point terminal block Applicable wire size 0 3 to 0 75mm Applicable solderless terminal R1 25 3 solderless terminals with sleeve are not usable Internal current consumption 5VDC 0 52A Weight 0 19kg 4 For details on the I
93. 7 to bO Un G1154 Un G1155 Day Un G1156 Un G1157 Day of the week e First two digits of the year last two digits of the year month day hour minute and second are all stored in the BCD code Inthe day of the week segment one of the following values in the BCD code indicating the corresponding day is stored Storage contents Sunday OOH Monday 01H Tuesday 02H Wednesday 03H Thursday 04H Friday 05H Saturday 06H Point The trigger detection time is obtained from the clock data of the CPU module Therefore when a hold trigger is generated right after the programmable controller system is powered on the A D converter module may not obtain the clock data from the CPU module If the module could not obtain the time the trigger detection time is recorded as 0 0 0 on January 1st 2000 116 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 4 Restarting logging To restart logging change the value in CHO Logging hold request Un G1008 to Un G1011 from On 1 to Off 0 After logging is restarted the value is stored from the head buffer memory area of CHO Logging data Un G5000 to Un G44999 In addition Off 0 is stored in CHO Logging hold flag Un G1016 to Un G1019 It may take time until On 1 is stored in CHO Logging hold flag Un G1016 to Un G1019 after the value in CHO Logging hold request Un G1008 to Un G1011 is changed to On 1 To restart logging check that On 1 is stored in CHO Logging hold flag Un G1016 to Un G1019 and
94. 9 Record the stored values of the following buffer memory areas e Pass data classification setting Un G200 L60AD4 only e Un G202 to Un G233 Write the previously recorded data into the following buffer memory areas e Pass data classification setting Un G200 L60AD4 only e Un G202 to Un G233 Turn on User range write request YA Check that Offset gain setting mode flag XA is on Turn off User range write request YA Check that the destination A D converter module operates with the restored offset gain values End e To apply the offset gain values of one module to the other modules Set Pass data classification setting Un G200 unnecessary for the LGOADVL8 and L60ADIL8 For the source A D converter module For the destination A D converter module CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 3 Range reference tables Below are reference ranges to be used for saving and restoring offset gain values a L60AD4 e Reference table for CH1 Industrial shipment settings offset value L Un G202 to CH4 Industrial shipment settings gain value H Un G217 Address decimal Pass data rae ant Reference value Description classification hexadecimal CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 setting Voltage Approx 00000007H 202 203 206 207 210 211 214 215 Industrial shipment settings offset value Voltage Approx 00008011H 204 205 208 209 212 213 216 217 Industrial shipment settings gain value e Reference table for CH1 User range settings
95. A D converter module 11000 127 The following formulation shows the integrated flow amount with the above settings Fow amount infegration function E Araitaife fo Product Information Set flow amount integration fi PIO 00000000Q Q0 A or later Flow amount integration 0 Enabled enable disable setting Integration cycle setting i Flow amount time unit setting com Unit scaling setting 500 ms Li rnin 2 x 100 Integrated flow amount Instantaneous flow amount x x Unit scaling Previous amount 500 5000 x 60000 x 100 11000 127 4166 666 11000 127 15166 7936 15166 acquired by rounding off the value after the decimal point is stored in CHO Integrated flow amount Un G1332 to Un G1339 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 5 Flow amount integration temporary stop The flow amount integration can be stopped temporarily through a program Flow amount integration function can be temporarily stopped by changing the value of CHO Flow amount integration temporary stop request Un G1356 to Un G1359 during its operation CHO Flow amount integration temporary stop request Un G1356 to Un G1359 operates only when the flow amount integration function is enabled a Operation procedure to stop the flow amount integration temporarily 1 While the flow amount integration function is operating change the CHO Flow amount integration temporary stop request Un G1356 to Un G1359 of the channel to be stopped
96. Buffer memory monitor test screen Buffer memory address input format selection screen 2 Buffer memory address setting screen 3 Buffer memory monitor screen 4 Press the button Use the A and YW buttons to select DEC for the input format of the buffer memory address and then confirm with the button Move the cursor using the lt and gt buttons then increment or decrement the value at the cursor using the A and W buttons and set the value to 19 Confirm with the button You can check the error that occurred in the Buffer memory monitor screen 155 sJOU Buues D pue Bulyoeuy 6 2 Clearing errors An error can be cleared by eliminating the cause of the error and turning on and off Error clear request YF from Device Monitor Test lex When an error occurs in the A D converter module with a start I O number of 10 CPU monitorfest screen 71 Usethe A and YW buttons to select DEV X 1 gt CPUE 4 TAb MENU gt CPU MON TES MON TEST and then confirm with the button 4 Device monitor screen 2 Press the lt j button 4 Device selection window 3 Usethe A and W buttons to set the device to Y Confirm with the button 4 DEVICE No SET screen 4 Set the device as a target of Error clear request Y1F Confirm with the button 4 Device monitor screen 5 Press the button 4 Device test screen 6 Press the button lt lt 7 Use the A a
97. CH3 Scaling upper limit value CH4 Scaling lower limit value CH4 Scaling upper limit value System area System area System area System area System area System area System area System area System area L60ADVL8 L60ADIL8 CH5 Scaling lower limit value CH5 Scaling upper limit value CH6 Scaling lower limit value CH6 Scaling upper limit value CH7 Scaling lower limit value CH7 Scaling upper limit value CH8 Scaling lower limit value CH8 Scaling upper limit value CH1 Process alarm lower lower limit value CH1 Process alarm lower upper limit value CH1 Process alarm upper lower limit value CH1 Process alarm upper upper limit value CH2 Process alarm lower lower limit value CH2 Process alarm lower upper limit value CH2 Process alarm upper lower limit value CH2 Process alarm upper upper limit value CH3 Process alarm lower lower limit value CH3 Process alarm lower upper limit value CH3 Process alarm upper lower limit value CH3 Process alarm upper upper limit value CH4 Process alarm lower lower limit value CH4 Process alarm lower upper limit value CH4 Process alarm upper lower limit value CH4 Process alarm upper upper limit value System area System area System area CH5 Process alarm lower lower limit value CH5 Process alarm lower upper limit value CH5 Process alarm upper lower limit value Default Read Write 2 R W R W R W R W J R W R W R W
98. CHO Scaling value digital operation value Un G54 to Un G57 When the digital clipping function scaling function shift function or difference conversion function is not used the same value as the one in CHO Digital output value Un G11 to Un G14 is stored a When the non compatible version of the L60AD4 is used When the scaling function is not used the value is not stored in CHO Scaling value digital operation value Un G54 to Un G57 256 APPENDICES 2 Maximum value minimum value hold function The digital output value is stored in CHO Maximum value Un G30 Un G32 Un G34 Un G36 and CHO Minimum value Un G31 Un G33 Un G35 Un G37 When any of the following functions is used a value operated by the function is stored e Digital clipping function e Scaling function e Shift function e Difference conversion function For details on the maximum value minimum value hold function refer to the following e Maximum value minimum value hold function gt Page 76 Section 8 6 a When the non compatible version of the L60AD4 is used When the scaling function is not used the digital output value is stored in CHO Maximum value Un G30 Un G32 Un G34 Un G36 and CHO Minimum value Un G31 Un G33 Un G35 Un G37 When the scaling function is used the scaling value digital operation value is stored in CHO Maximum value Un G30 Un G32 Un G34 Un G36 and CHO Minimum value Un G31 Un G33 Un G35 Un G37 3 Inp
99. Conversion speed setting 1 80us Warning output function Sets for warnings on A D conversion Warning output setting 1 Disable 1 Disable 1 Disable Process alarm upper upper limit o o value Process alarm upper lower limit o o value Text box type Process alarm tower upper timi 0 0 value Process alarm lower lower limit o o value Input signal error detection A D conversion Input signal error detection setting 1 Disable 1 Disable 1 Disable 1 Disable pee signal error detection setting 5 0 5 0 5 0 5 0 Input signal error detection enhancing Available to Product Information 130410000000000 4 or later Input signal error detection Set input signal error detection enhancing when 4 D conversion is executed Input signal error detection enhancing function will be detected by the Input signal error detection setting value extension setting O Disable O Disable O Disable O Disable Scaling function Sets for scaling on 4 D conversion Scaling enable disable setting 1 Disable 1 Disable 1 Disable 1 Disable Scaling upper limit value 0 0 0 0 Scaling lower limit value 0 0 0 0 Shift function fAvailahle ta Product Sets whether to permit or prohibit output of 4 D conversion value 2 Double click the item to change the setting and input the setting value e Items to input from the pull down list Double click the item to set to display the pull down list Select the item e Items to input from the text box Double click the it
100. Count 1 Disable Set Conversion speed setting to 2 1ms ew Cn rension speed setting 2 1ms H Warning output function gasa Warning output setting Process alarm unner unner limit Set Flow amount integration enable disable setting to 0 Enabled Flow amount integration function Available to Product Information Set flow amount integration f 130410000000000 4 or later am Ao amount nfegration enable disable setting vee Integration cycle setting O Enabled z Flow amount time unit setting 1 Disabled Set a value for Integration cycle setting 0 Enabled dJntegration cycle setting SOO MS aaan oe Flow amount tine unit setting Set a value for Flow amount time unit setting How amount fine ont setting cow Unit scaling setting Set a value for Unit scaling setting ve Flow amount tine unit setting ine Cnt scaling setting Item Setting range Integration cycle setting 1 to 5000ms 127 uoljOUN uonesbeju JUNOWY MO 4 G8 128 Iy When the flow meter connected to the A D converter module output the instantaneous flow amount range cm min in analog at intervals of 500ms e Integration cycle setting 500ms e Flow amount time unit setting 1 min e Unit scaling setting 2 x 100 e Value in CHO Scaling value digital operation value Un G54 to Un G57 when integral processing is performed 5000 e Previous amount 11000 Maintained amount inside the
101. EGOADVL8 the same scaling value digital operation value is stored for the analog input voltage V 92 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS When the following values are set for a channel with the user range of 2 to 10V in the L60AD4 e Scaling enable disable setting 0 Enable e Scaling upper limit value 16000 e Scaling lower limit value 4000 E Scaling function Sets for scaling on A D com ae Scaling enable disable setting O Enable lt Scaling upper limit value 16000 Scaling lower limit value 4000 The digital output values and scaling values digital operation values are as follows Digital output value Scaling upper limit value 16000 20000 o nnn nnn Scaling lower limit value 4000 Analog input voltage V Scaling value Analog input voltage V Digital output val 6 20000 8000 A 15000 5000 2 10000 2000 7 5000 1000 o0 O 4 5000 7000 63 G 10000 10000 a 8 15000 13000 S 10 20000 16000 S When the user range is set to 2 to 10V in the L6OADVL8 the same scaling value digital operation value is stored for the analog input voltage V 93 8 11 Shift Function 94 Using this function the set shifting amount to conversion value can be added shifted to the digital output value and it can be stored in the buffer memory When the shifting amount to conversion value is changed it is reflected to the scaling value digital operation value in real time Therefore fine adj
102. ER 8 FUNCTIONS 2 Operation of a level trigger To use a level trigger set On 1 to CH Logging hold request Un G1008 to Un G1011 in advance At the point where On 1 has been set the module becomes the trigger condition wait status Data collection starts when the trigger condition has been satisfied and stops when the set points of the data have been collected CH1 Logging hold request Un G1008 ore oN Trigger condition established unestablished Unestablished Established I 1 A hold trigger is executed The logging is held CH1 Logging data ts Un G5000 to Un G14999 1 CH1 Logging The data before the last points after trigger 10000 points are discarded Un G1048 CH1 Number of logging data Un G1106 lt 10000 points pdks gt Controlled by the A D converter module Point The target data of a level trigger is detected on the refresh cycle of the digital output value or the scaling value Therefore the data when a hold trigger is generated may not be stored in CHO Logging data Un G5000 to Un G44999 depending on the setting of the logging cycle To store the data when a hold trigger is generated in CHO Logging data Un G5000 to Un G44999 arrange related settings so that the conversion cycle of the target value a trigger data and the logging cycle actual logging cycle have the same time period Stored value of a device to be monitored 1 Logging cycle Conversion C
103. Enter the model name of the A D converter module Points Select 16 point Start XY Enter a desired start I O number of the A D converter module 263 2 Intelligent function module switch setting Configure the setting from Switch setting in PLC parameter Parameterc gt PLC parameter gt I O assignment lt gt Click the Switch setting button Switch setting for I O and intelligent function module Input format Select HEX Slat Type A TEAS aR Sa ca a S ae eens ea Eee Bees uilt in 140 function Type Inteli teal Lis sr sss a Oooo Oooo Oooo Item Setting item Analog input range Input range setting Input range setting CH1 to CH4 4 to 20mA OH 2 Switch 1 i i i 0 to 20mMA 1H H 1 to 5V 2H CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1 0 to 5V 3H 10 to 10V 4H Input range setting Switch 2 ADVL8 ADIL8 4 to 20mA Extended mode AH E E H 1 to 5V Extended mode BH A Megha User range setting FH Switch 3 a 0 Fixed blank JOLI tae o Fixed to 0004 Switch 4 OH Normal A D converter processing mode 1H to Fu A value other than On 1 Offset gain setting mode Switch 5 i 0 Fixed blank 4 The operation is the same when any value within the setting range is set 2 When OH is set for the LE6OADVL8 the operation with the setting 5H analog input range of 0 to 10V is applied 3 For the L60AD4 set 0000H a Setting range of the input range setting by modules The sett
104. For the offset gain setting refer to the following e Offset gain setting lt gt Page 60 Section 7 5 See gt Controlled by the A D converter module gt Controlled by the program Module READY X0 OFF ON ON Offset gain setting mode flag XA User range write request YA b Normal mode In the user range setting restoration use Offset gain setting mode flag XA as an interlock condition to turn on and off User range write request YA For user range setting restoration refer to the following e Save restoration of offset gain value lt gt Page 138 Section 8 19 e gt Controlled by the A D converter module gt Controlled by the program Module READY X0 an Offset gain setting mode flag XA User range write request YA 5 Channel change completed flag XBQ When changing a channel to perform the offset gain setting in the offset gain mode use Channel change completed flag XB as an interlock condition to turn on and off Channel change request YB For the offset gain setting refer to the following e Offset gain setting gt Page 60 Section 7 5 ci ieee gt Controlled by the A D converter module Controlled by the program Offset gain setting mode Offset specification Un G22 Channel where offset or gain is specified Offset gain setting mode Gain specification Un G23 Channel change completed OFF flag XB Channel change request YB 194 APPEND
105. G152 Sets CH3 Shifting amount to conversion SET 39 Turns on Operating condition setting request RST M100 X30 Y39 X39 l ae p RST Y39 Turns 4 Operating condition setting Reads digital output values request X40 X30 X3E Y39 ce 5 MOV G10 K1MO J Reads A D conversion completed flag MO U3 cl MoV GA D11 Reads CH1 Digital output value M1 U3 clov G12 D12 Reads CH2 Digital output value ijja i U3 R H ling val MOV G56 D13 eads CH3 Scaling value 164 digital operation value CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING Process alarm occurrence status and processing at warning occurrence SM400 Uc ee 4 EJ_ iT MOV GEO K2IM20 J Reads Warning output flag a a Process alarm M22 Processing when a warning occurs for i Processing when a warning occurs ae CH2 process alarm upper limit value M23 Processing when a warning occurs for ii Processing when a warning occurs ae CH2 process alarm lower limit value Input signal error defection status and processing at error detection SM400 Os eee 3 YN NMO G49 K1M50 J Reads Input signal error detection flag See M50 i Processing when an input signal error is detected Processing at input signal error detection in CH1 X43 X3C _ KR SYS CSET Y3F Turns on Error clear request to reset the Error code display and reset processing input signal error X3F U3 BCD G19 K4Y50 Outputs the error code in BCD X44 m e YF Turns on Error clear request Y3F Turns off Error clear
106. ICES 6 Input signal error detection signal XCO QAB a Turning Input signal error detection signal XC ON e Input signal error detection signal XC turns to on when an analog input value exceeds the range set with CHO Input signal error detection setting value Un G142 to Un G149 in any channel which has been A D conversion enabled after validating Input signal error detection setting Un G47 e Input signal error detection signal XC turns to on when an analog input value exceeds the range set with CHO Input signal error detection setting value Un G142 to Un G149 in any channel which has been A D conversion enabled after setting the detection condition in Input signal error detection extension setting Un G27 Un G28 When the disconnection detection is set the signal ignores the setting for CHO Input signal error detection setting value Un G142 to Un G149 and turns to on at the disconnection detection When Input signal error detection signal XC turns on the following operations are applied e A D conversion completed flag Un G10 of the corresponding channel turns off stores 0 e The digital output value or scaling value digital operation value of the corresponding channel obtained immediately before the error is detected is held e ALM LED flashes b Turning Input signal error detection signal XC OFF After setting the analog input value within the range set turn on and off Error clear request YF and Input si
107. JE9 O JOA QL he error history is sequentially displayed From an old error The latest error is displayed at the bottom line Stop Monitor 137 8 19 Saving and Restoring Offset Gain Values Common 138 With the A D converter module the offset gain value of the user range can be saved and restored In the event that the A D converter module fails and need to be replaced you can restore the offset gain values of the failed A D converter module onto a replacement A D converter module In addition if multiple A D converter modules are connected on a system the offset gain values set for one of the modules can be applied to the other modules However if you save and restore the offset gain values the accuracy after the restoration decreases by approximately three times compared to that before the restoration Reconfigure the offset gain as necessary 1 Procedure for saving and restoring offset gain values a To restore offset gain values onto a new replacement module 1 Save the offset gain values 2 Replace A D converter unit by Ms bs iS a Ss Ms Ni g Ms 3 Restore the offset gain values
108. L60ADVL8 L60ADIL8 Scaling function b Enabling the setting Turn on and off Operating condition setting request Y9 to enable the setting c Default value 0 is set as the default value Point Change the setting value to use the warning output function process alarm since 0 is set as the default value 211 sessaippy Aiowayy yng Jo sjieleg zZ xipueddy 22 CHO Input signal error detection setting value Un G142 to Un G149 QA Set the setting value to detect an input analog value error for each channel For details on the input signal error detection function and input signal error detection extension function refer to the following e Input signal error detection function lt gt Page 77 Section 8 7 e Input signal error detection extension function lt gt Page 82 Section 8 8 a Setting procedure e Setting range is 0 to 250 0 to 25 0 Set in increments of 1 0 1 e When a value out of the setting range above is set to a channel an error occurs in the channel an error code 800 is stored in Latest error code Un G19 and Error flag XF turns on The operation is performed in the setting configured before the error occurrence e The input signal error detection upper and lower limit values are calculated as follows based on the input signal error detection setting value The calculating input signal error detection upper and lower limit values will be different depending on the input range to be
109. LEOADVL8 and L60ADIL8 are fixed to 0 1 Disable a Enabling the setting Turn on and off Operating condition setting request Y9 to enable the setting b Default value All channels are set to disable 1 as the default value sessaippy Aiowayy yng Jo sjieleg zZ xipueddy 207 16 Input signal error detection flag Un G49 Q Input signal status can be checked with this flag b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 bd b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 o ojo o o o o o fensjenz cnejensjenajcnsjenejen1 a A S b4 to b15 of the L60AD4 and b8 to b15 of 0 Normal the L6QADVL8 and L60ADIL8 are fixed to 0 1 Input signal error a Input signal error detection flag Un G49 status e When the detection method is set in Input signal error detection extension setting Un G27 Un G28 Input signal error detection flag Un G49 corresponding to each channel is turned to input signal error 1 when the analog input value out of the setting range for CHO Input signal error detection setting value Un G142 to Un G149 is detected according to the set condition of the detection method e When Input signal error detection setting Un G47 is set to Enable 0 and Input signal error detection extension setting Un G27 Un G28 is set to Disable 0 Input signal error detection flag Un G49 corresponding to each channel is turned to input signal error 1 when the analog input value out of the setting range for CHO Input signal error detection setting value
110. NpoN JO UOHIPPY L Z IW Specify start address 0010 Hi 1 Module Occupy 16 points Title Setting Title Item Description Module Type Set Analog Module Module Selection Module Name Select the name of the module to connect Mounted Slot No Set the slot No where the module is connected Mount Position Specify start X Y The start I O number hexadecimal of the target module is set according to the slot address No Setting any start I O number is also possible Title Setting Title Set any title 53 7 2 Switch Setting Set the operation mode and the input range used in each channel 1 Setting procedure Open the Switch Setting dialog box T Project window gt Intelligent Function Module gt gt module name gt Switch Setting Normal A D Converter Processing Mode 4 to 20mA extension mode 1 to SV extension mode x ow 54 CHAPTER 7 VARIOUS SETTINGS e 4 to 20mA default value e 0 to 20mA e 1to 5V e 0 to 5V For the L60AD4 e 10 to 10V e O to 10V e 4 to 20mA Extended mode e 1 to 5V Extended mode e User range setting Input Range Setting Set the input range used in each channel e 1to 5V e 0 to 5V e 10 to 10V e 0 to 10V default value e 1 to 5V Extended mode e User range setting e 4 to 20mA default value e 0 to 20mA e 4 to 20mA Extended mode e User range setting For the L60QADVL8 For the L60ADIL8 Set the operation mode Norma
111. Processing Order of Each Function 0 0 ccc ee eee eens 67 8 2 A D Conversion Enable Disable Function 0 0 0 0 eee ees 69 8 3 AID Conversion Method oi 222 3 2c3ecieeeoded nttedeeeyotans caches estoseeseen 69 8 4 Input Range Extension Function 0 0 ee ee eee teenies 14 8 5 Conversion Speed Switch Function 0 0 0 aaaea ea ee eens 75 8 6 Maximum and Minimum Values Hold Function nananana aaa aaa 76 8 7 Input Signal Error Detection Function saa aaee eee ee 7 8 8 Input Signal Error Detection Extension Function 0 0 00 cee ees 82 8 9 Warning Output Function Process Alarm 0 0 00 ees 85 O10 Scalig FUNGUO eserdi 2 Beets crock tok o Mack ede eet yak vice Rye and a E Samet ea 88 Oe lt hr UMGCHON bia 2 stein feet ee Aces a ed 0g PE LNG ook Sn key cats aan ae Eee See 94 8 12 DiditalClippInNG FUNCION 622k 2an5eeeebyae have tees boos thanks veeoewe sade ees 99 8 13 Difference Conversion Function 0 000 cc cece eee eee eens 103 0 14 Coggino FUNCION ot sere oe oS Eater oie ed dS BAP enh ore See kL aids re eee aoe ores 108 O14 1 2510 DDIM IOG IM Gir eee 050d wok a lh sek ee eg as he iti de A hock hws nth gl Bk a a Se 115 S142 LOQGING hold TCGUCSE zs gxcng gorda coe elaca re aera et ee Ebene Ee aS eee ene eS 118 0143 Covel rigge sot areas Seed ete Darvas bee G geen tome WS 119 8 14 4 Initial setting for the logging function 0 cc
112. R W detection setting value CH6 Input signal 147 93H System area nee agna aiia detection setting value CH7 Input signal 148 94H System area he ees a detection setting value s O R W O R W O R W O R W O R W O R W O R W O R W O R W O R W O R W O D O OO OO R W O R W O J O sossalppyy AIOWsl yng Jo sI S E 50 50 50 50 CH8 Input signal error 149 95H Syst R W 150 96H CH1 Shifting amount to conversion RIW value 151 97H CH2 Shifting amount to conversion RW _ value 152 98H CH3 Shifting amount to conversion RW value R W H4 Shifti tt i 153 99H a ifting amount to conversion 158 9E 159 9F I Mode switching setting R W O I 172 ACH CH1 Difference conversion trigger R W 173 ADH CH2 Difference conversion trigger R W 174 AEH CH3 Difference conversion trigger R W 31 Address decimal 175 176 to 179 180 181 182 183 184 to 189 190 191 192 193 194 to 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 32 Address Default Read Write 2 hexadecimal L60AD4 CH4 Difference conversion trigger L60ADVL8 L60ADIL8 AFH R W BOH to B3H System area CH1 Diff i B4H ifference conversion Syslemara reference value CH2 Difference conversion B5H vo System area reference value CH3 Difference conversion B6H as System area reference v
113. Set the input range into the extended mode in Input Range Setting of Switch Setting Point If the input range extended mode function and the following functions are simultaneously used the scaling value digital operation value may exceed the range of 32768 to 32767 Module Function L60AD4 Scaling function shift function or difference conversion function L60ADVL8 L60ADIL8 Scaling function In this case a value fixed at the upper limit value 32767 or at the lower limit value 32768 is stored as a scaling value digital operation value Ex when 32000 is set for the scaling upper limit value and 32000 is set for the scaling lower limit value for the L60AD4 the following operation is performed e When the digital output value is 20240 or greater 32767 is stored as a scaling value digital operation value e When the digital output value is 240 or smaller 32768 is stored as a scaling value digital operation value 74 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 8 5 Conversion Speed Switch Function You can select from three conversion speeds e High speed 20 us channel e Medium speed 80 us channel e Low speed 1 ms channel 1 Setting procedure 1 Set A D conversion enable disable setting to 0 Enable TH Project window gt Intelligent Function Module gt module name gt Parameter Item E Basic setting Sets method of 4 Dec AAD conversion enable disable setting Ave
114. Un G142 to Un G149 is detected e When an error is detected in any A D conversion enable or input signal error detection enable channels Input signal error detection signal XC is turned to ON b Clearing Input signal error detection flag Un G49 To clear Input signal error detection flag Un G49 adjust the analog input value so that it falls within the setting range then turn on and off Error clear request YF Turning on and off Operating condition setting request Y9 also clears Input signal error detection flag Un G49 but A D conversion is reset and resumed from the beginning 208 APPENDICES 17 Warning output flag Process alarm Un G50 QH Alarms can be checked if the alarm is the upper limit alarm or lower limit alarm for each channel For details on the warning output function refer to the following e Warning Output Function Process Alarm Page 85 Section 8 9 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b3 b2 b1 bO b8 to b15 of the L60AD4 are 0 Normal fixed to 0 1 Alarm ON a Warning output flag Process alarm Un G50 status e When the digital output value is out of the range specified in CH1 Process alarm lower lower limit value Un G86 to CH8 Process alarm upper upper limit value Un G117 Warning output flag Process alarm Un G50 corresponding to each channel is turned to alarm ON 1 e When an error is detected in any A D conversion enable or alarm output enable channels Warning output signa
115. Un G202 to CH4 User range settings gain value H UMG233 anes earl casein cori au a te oka rede ts Senta a 216 CH1 Industrial shipment settings offset value Un G202 to CH8 User range settings gain value Un G233 eaa pd thet tb esto ace etait eee cbc aa Aico htt Se orl Ac Se 216 CH1 Maximum value Un G30 to CH8 Minimum value UM G4S ow iced eed ey ee wae OMe Bae e oa 206 CH1 Process alarm lower lower limit value Un G86 to CH8 Process alarm upper upper limit value Un G117 Seb aS te ee Gtk ks esd I Gye ele EEEE eh ots 211 CH1 Scaling lower limit value Un G62 to CH8 Scaling upper limit value Un G77 206 210 CH1 to CH4 Difference conversion reference value Un G180 to Un G183 0 000000 214 CH1 to CH4 Difference conversion status flag Un G190 0 WING193 2 6 43 025 0 40 oS ea dot ates 215 CH1 to CH4 Difference conversion trigger Un G172 to UMGITO enemy eather nee eee aA ore een ares 214 CH1 to CH4 Flow amount integration enable disable setting Un G1300 to Un G1303 228 CH1 to CH4 Flow amount integration temporary stop flag Un G1364 to Un G1367 005 231 CH1 to CH4 Flow amount integration temporary stop request Un G1356 to Un G1359 230 CH1 to CH4 Flow amount time unit setting Un G1316 to UMGTS 19 oxic ate tat Sets a dna eaten a ele 229 CH1 to CH4 Head pointer Un G1090 to Un G1093 de heed sede Sse en ee ak ee eed ee Sie ane ts tence 224 CH1 to CH4 Integ
116. When the difference conversion function is used with the digital clipping function scaling function and shift function each scaling value digital operation value is determined as a difference conversion reference value if other than No request 0 or Trigger request 1 is set in CHO Difference conversion trigger Un G172 to Un G175 during the difference conversion an error occurs Though the difference conversion continues Even if the digital clipping function scaling function and shift function are set valid the difference conversion reference value is not updated To update the difference conversion reference value stop the difference conversion change the setting of CHO Difference conversion trigger Un G172 to Un G175 from Trigger request 1 to No request 0 Then enable the digital clipping function scaling function and shift function and resume the difference conversion change the setting of CHO Difference conversion trigger Un G172 to Un G175 from No request 0 to Trigger request 1 For how to enable each function refer to the following e Digital Clipping Function gt Page 99 Section 8 12 Scaling Function L gt Page 88 Section 8 10 e Shift function gt Page 94 Section 8 11 UOHOUN UOISJSAUOD SOUSISOHIG E48 107 8 14 Logging Function AD4 This function stores 10000 points of digital output values or scaling values digital operation values in the buffer memory for each channel
117. a Un G5000 to Un G44999 This area stores the offset value 0 to 9999 counted from the start address CH1 Un G5000 CH2 Un G15000 CH3 Un G25000 CH4 Un G35000 of CHO Logging data Un G5000 to Un G44999 For details on the logging function refer to the following e Logging Function lt Page 108 Section 8 14 When the value of CH2 Trigger pointer Un G1115 is 8550 CH2 Logging data Un G15000 Trigger pointer 8550 offset value from Un G15000 i Un G23550 Data at the time when a trigger is activated Pp 23550 15000 8550 Un G24999 Point When CHO Logging hold request Un G1008 to Un G1011 is changed from On 1 to Off 0 CHO Trigger pointer Un G1114 to Un G1117 is cleared to zero 44 CHO Logging cycle monitor value Un G1122 to Un G1133 ZW This is the area for storing the actual logging cycle which is calculated from the update cycle of data to be logged When Operating condition setting request Y9 is turned on and off the logging cycle is stored in CHO Logging cycle monitor value Un G1122 to Un G1133 in the corresponding channel where the logging function is enabled For details on the logging function refer to the following e Logging function lt gt Page 108 Section 8 14 The following figure shows how values are stored in CH1 Logging cycle monitor value Un G1122 to Un G1124 b15 to bO Un G1122 Un G1123 Un G1124 When the calculated value of logging cycle in CH1 is 6960us
118. ailable to Product Information 130410000000000 4 or later Digital clipping Function enablesdisable setrinn O Sampling Processing 1 Disable 0 Enable 2 Count Average O Enable o BO Times O 20us Sets for warnings on A D conversion 0 Enable o 20000 18000 3000 lo 0 Sets for input signals on A D conversion O Enable 1 Disable 10 0 5 0 o O Disable O Disable Sets for scaling on A D conversion 1 Disable 1 Disable o 0 a Set shift function when 4 D conversion is executed Set digital clipping function when A D conversion is executed 1 Disable ill 1 Disable 1 Disable O Sampling Processing 0 Enable a Moving Average 10 Times o 1 Disable 1 Disable 0 0 0 oO 0 0 oO 0 1 Disable 5 0 1 Disable 5 0 Ye Set input signal error detection enhancing when A D conversion is executed Input signal error detection enhancing function will be detected by the Input signal error detection setting value O Disable O Disable O Enable 1 Disable 32000 0 0 0 O Enable 1 Disable Sets method of A D conversion control 161 uoneinbiyuoDy Wae1SAS psepue s e Ul jnpon 2y BuISA UBUAA zol 162 b Auto refresh setting Rae Project windowc gt Intelligent Function Module c gt L60AD4 c gt Auto_Refresh n 0030 L60AD4 Auto_Refresh Display All l CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING c Writing paramete
119. alue CH4 Difference conversion B7H System area reference value B8H to BDH System area CH1 Difference conversion status BEH flag System area CH2 Difference conversion status flag OU TI L E l L L System area CH3 Difference conversion status flag System area CH4 Difference conversion status flag System area C2H to C7H System area C8H Pass data classification setting C9H System area R W CAH CH1 Industrial shipment settings on Industrial shipment RW offset value L settings offset value CBH CH1 Industrial shipment settings GRI ngusial shipment RW offset value H settings gain value CCH ap Industrial shipment settings coe Industrial shipment RW gain value L settings offset value CDH aa Industrial shipment settings one maustral shipment RW gain value H settings gain value CEH CH2 Industrial shipment settings Gra Industrial shipment RW offset value L settings offset value CFH CH2 Industrial shipment settings one mee shipment RW offset value H settings gain value DOH one Industrial shipment settings ore Industrial shipment RW gain value L settings offset value DIH Gra Industrial shipment settings ole mene tel shipment RW gain value H settings gain value D2H CH3 Industrial shipment settings CrS Industrial shipment R W offset value L settings offset value D3H CH3 Industrial shipment settings ore maustrigl shipment RW offset value H settings gain value D4H wie Industrial s
120. alue becomes the following value Module Digital output value L60AD4 20000 e 8000 1 to 5V 0 to 5V 1 to 5V Extended mode user range setting e 16000 10 to 10V 0 to 10V L6O0ADIL8 8000 L60ADVL8 UOISJOAUDD G V JO DISIWB OCIEUD UOISJIBAUOD O I XIpueddy 235 3 I O conversion characteristic of the L60AD4 a Voltage input characteristic The following graph shows the voltage input characteristic Practical analog input range Practical analog input range 22979 e i 20000 D oO gt a a a 2 5 0 g D 5000 A D 5480 15 10 5 0 1 5 10 15 20480 15 10 5 01 5 5 5 10 15 Analog input voltage V No Input range setting Offset value Digital output value Resolution Analog input voltage V 0 to 20000 z m 500uV 5 1 to 5V Extended mode 5000 to 22500 200V 4 Set the offset value and gain value in the user range setting within the range satisfying the following conditions If the following conditions are not satisfied A D conversion may not be properly performed e Setting range for offset value and gain value 10 to 10V e gain value offset value gt 4 0V 2 When analog input is performed exceeding the range of digital output value the digital output value is fixed to the maximum or minimum Digital output value Input range setting 1 to 5V 480 0 to 5V 20479 10 to 10V 20480 1 to 5V Extended mode 5480 22979 User range setting 20480 20479 3
121. alues are converted into digital at every sampling cycle and stored in the buffer memory area as digital output values Point The conversion cyde is calculated by Conversion speed x Number of channels where A D conversion is enabled Conversion can be enabled or disabled per channel By disabling D conversion for the channels you are not using the conversion cyde can be reduced The following shows setting exam ples of the conversion cycle Forthe L604D4 Number of channels where AD conversion is enabled CH1 to CH3 three channels in total Conversion speed 80ps middle speed Conversion cyde 80 us channel x 3 channels 240 us For details on conversion speed setting refer to the following Conversion Speed Switch Function LF Page 76 Section 8 5 Forthe L604DVL8 and L60ADIL8 Number of channels where AD conversion is enabled CH1 to CH seven channels in total Conversion speed 1ms fixed Conversion cyde 1 msichannel x 7 channels 7 ms The meaning of each icon is as follows Icon Description R The corresponding buffer memory area I O signal or function is common to the A D converter modules regardless of the model AD4 The corresponding buffer memory area I O signal or function is for the L6OAD4 ADVL8 The corresponding buffer memory area I O signal or function is for the LEOADVL8 ADIL8 The corresponding buffer memory area I O signal or function is for the L6OADIL8 14 TERMS
122. amamma o emmma oo e Srema oreve EE o o M o a a OOOFH AD4 2FH Input signal error detection setting OOFFH ADL8 3 000FH AD4 30H Warning output setting OOFFH ADL8 31H Input signal error detection flag OOOOH Warning output flag Process alarm 0000H Ce a OOOFH AD4 35H Scaling enable disable setting OOFFH A R W aoe CH5 Scaling value digital System area operation value CH6 Scaling value digital System area oe G operation value CH7 Scaling value digital System area watts n operation value CH8 Scaling value digital System area eee nrene operation value Item enabled by turning on and off Operating condition setting request Y9 O 29 s ss ppy AoW yng Jo IS S E Address decimal 78 to 85 30 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 15 76 TT 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 Address hexadecimal 3EH 3FH 40H 41H 42H 43H 44H 45H 46H 47H 48H 49H 4AH 4BH 4CH 4DH 4EH to 55H 56H 57H 58H 59H 5AH 5BH 5CH 5DH SEH 5FH 60H 61H 62H 63H 64H 65H 66H 67H 68H L60AD4 CH1 Scaling lower limit value CH1 Scaling upper limit value CH2 Scaling lower limit value CH2 Scaling upper limit value CH3 Scaling lower limit value
123. are 4 x 0 02 rounded down The processing is performed 187 times and its average value is output Point The valid lower limit setting value for the time average is calculated by minimum processing count of 4 x conversion speed x number of channels where A D conversion is enabled If the processing count becomes less than 4 due to the setting time an error occurs error code 200 and a digital output value comes out to O zero The following shows an example of the valid lower limit setting value e Number of channels where A D conversion is enabled CH1 to CH4 four channels in total e Conversion speed 1ms Valid lower limit setting value 4 x 1 ms channel x 4 channels 16 ms 70 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS b Count average A D conversions are performed a set number of times and averaging processing is performed on the total value excluding the maximum and the minimum values The values obtained in averaging processing are stored in the buffer memory area The time taken for the mean value calculated through average processing to be stored in the buffer memory area changes depending on the number of channels where A D conversion is enabled Processing time Setting time x Conversion speed x Number of channels where A D conversion is enabled For the L60AD4 the processing time for the following settings is calculated below Item Setting Number of channels where A D conversion is enabled 4 channels CH1 to CH4 Con
124. average processing Conversion speed x Number of channels where A D conversion is enabled ms 4 In the flow amount integration function the conversion speed can be set in ims Therefore the conversion speed is 1ms 2 The value after the decimal point is rounded off If the setting value of CHO Integration cycle setting Un G1308 to Un G1311 is not an integral multiple of the updating cycle of CHO Scaling value digital operation value Un G54 to Un G57 the maximum value of an integral multiple less than the value set in CHO Integration cycle setting Un G1308 to Un G1311 is calculated as the integration cycle Check the calculated integration cycle which is stored in CHO Integration cycle monitor value Un G1348 to Un G1351 Ex When the integration cycle is calculated with the following settings e A D conversion enable in CH1 to CH3 e Averaging process setting is 0 Sampling processing e Integration cycle setting is 5000 Since the updating cycle of CHO Scaling value digital operation value Un G54 to Un G57 is 3ms the integration cycle is determined as 4998ms the maximum cycle of an integral multiple of 3ms uoloun uonesbeju JUNOWY MO GL 8 Point If CHO Integration cycle setting Un G1308 to Un G1311 is less than the updating cycle of CHO Scaling value digital operation value Un G54 to Un G57 the flow amount integration function turns disabled and an error error code 2120 occurs 1
125. b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 p Data section Sign bit 1 Negative 2 Positive a Updating cycle When the averaging processing is performed the value is updated in each specified averaging process cycle When the averaging processing is not performed the value is updated in each sampling cycle Point When the functions above are not used the same value as the one in CHO Digital output value Un G11 to Un G18 is stored 20 CH1 Scaling lower limit value Un G62 to CH8 Scaling upper limit value Un G77 QD Set the range of scale conversion for each channel For details on scaling function refer to the following e Scaling Function lt Page 88 Section 8 10 a Setting range e Setting range 32000 to 32000 scaling upper limit value gt scaling lower limit value e When a value set to a channel is out of the setting range above or a value does not satisfy scaling upper limit value gt scaling lower limit value an error occurs to the channel Then an error code is stored in Latest error code Un G19 Error flag XF is turned ON and the operation is performed in the setting configured before the error occurrence e When Scaling enable disable setting Un G53 is set to Invalid 1 the setting for CH1 Scaling lower limit value Un G62 to CH8 Scaling upper limit value Un G77 are ignored b Enabling the setting Turn on and off Operating condition setting request Y9 to enable the setting c Default val
126. ber of data points to be collected after a hold trigger occurs can be set Logging data are stored in buffer memory areas Vv Logging hold request Generating a hold trigger from a program at certain timings Hold trigger Level trigger Monitoring the stored value of a certain buffer memory area and generating a hold trigger if the value satisfies the preset condition as shown below Generating a hold trigger if the stored value becomes higher or lower than the setting value Logging is stopped when the set gt points of data are collected after the hold trigger is generated Logging points after trigger Address 4 Address 5 lt Address 9998 Address 9999 Stored value of a buffer memory area to be monitored BER RPP RRR eee A trigger is generated A trigger is generated Trigger setting value Time uonoun4 BuIA pig 109 2 Operation of logging a Starting logging data collection Logging data collection starts when Enable 0 is set to CHO Logging enable disable setting Un G1000 to Un G1003 and Operating condition setting request Y9 is turned on and off Data are collected on the preset logging cycle CHL Logging enable disable setting Disable 1 Enable 0 Un G1000 to Un G1003 ON Operating condition setting request Y9 Operating condition setting completed flag X9 Start logging b Logging data Logging data are stored in the following buffer
127. ble setting 0 Enable tee Scaling upper limit value 16000 Scaling lower limit value 4000 The digital output values and scaling values digital operation values are as follows Digital output value Scaling upper limit value 16000 720000 4 7 Scaling lower limit value 4000 RU 0 A ia Analog input voltage V Scaling value Analog input voltage V digital operation value 10 a 5 ae 10 cae When the input range is set to 10 to 10V in the L6OADVL8 the same scaling value digital operation value is stored for the analog input voltage V uonoun4 Buljeos OL g 91 When the following values are set for a channel with the input range of 1 to 5V Extended mode in the L60AD4 e Scaling enable disable setting 0 Enable e Scaling upper limit value 16000 e Scaling lower limit value 4000 a Scaling function Sets for scaling on A D con seven Scaling enable disable setting O Enable Scaling upper limit value 16000 Fanon Scaling lower limit value 4000 The digital output values and scaling values digital operation values are as follows Digital output value Scaling upper limit value PAG IG Gee ee renee earner 16000 Analog input voltage V h EEEE S AE E E EE Scaling lower limit value 0 4000 0 Analog input voltage V nat pears ans 3 a 5 kia 55 an When the input range is set to 1 to 5V Extended mode in the L
128. c eee 122 8 15 Flow Amount Integration Function 0 0 00 eee 123 6210 BMOMEOG FUNCION 2684 o4 tow Khe fe oa ee Oe ia eb ta aes a ees 133 8 17 Module Error Collection Function 2 0 0c eens 136 919 Eroria FUNCUOM lt 2 lt s a 5 4 Rosin aid she EnaA Esai bie She amp e waste Be we Aad ade S808 137 8 19 Saving and Restoring Offset Gain Values 0 0 0 0 ccc eee 138 CHAPTER 9 DISPLAY UNIT 145 9 1 Display UMis 2 obits cea Dares oa eras Siete heh ee raideeeheudiecaiteu eas oes 145 22 Men Tanso seese ei OE eek Aen ote sees Rew ae we oleae ee Beem een 145 9 3 List of Setting Value Change Screens 0 ccc eee ees 149 9 4 Checking and Clearing Errors 0 2c ee eee eee ete 155 CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING 157 10 1 Proced re f r ProgramMinG 4 4 n ia lt 0 uu Deak eens eeu be cbRar nA ae oes 157 10 2 When Using the Module in a Standard System Configuration 005 158 10 3 When A D Converter Module is Connected to Head Module 00005 166 CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 175 11 1 Checking on the Module Detailed Information 0 0 00 c eee ees 176 11 2 Checking by Latest Error Code Un G19 0 20 ees 177 11 3 Checking on the Module Error Collection Function 0 0 0 0 cee eee eee 178 14 Emor Code ES serrin deiae sche ted cee e sees aE E CENAE eee se 179 Tio Alarm Code List s 25 2 2 ue ae Sees 81h ee Ree Se ee HOES oad BS BO
129. ccurred cannot be identified An invalid value is set to the offset gain setting The channel where the error has occurred fits in O The G P OGSTOR instruction was executed in the offset gain setting mode e The G P OGSTOR instruction has been consecutively executed e For the offset gain setting a setting value has been consecutively written to the flash memory more than 25 times e The G P OGSTOR instruction has been executed on a module different from the one on which the G P OGLOAD instruction was executed e The G P OGSTOR instruction has been executed ahead of the G P OGLOAD instruction The offset gain setting was configured exceeding the maximum number of times Action Set a valid value to the input range for Switch 1 or 2 of the intelligent function module switch setting Power off and on the module If the error occurs again a failure might have occurred on the module Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative Set 0 to Switch 5 on the intelligent function module switch setting Check the digital output value If there is a problem of the digital output value please consult your local Mitsubishi representative Start over the offset gain setting of all channels where the user range setting is used If the error occurs again a failure might have occurred on the module Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative Start over the offset gain setting of the channel where the er
130. change the value in CHO Logging hold request Un G1008 to Un G1011 to Off 0 gt Controlled by the A D converter module gt Controlled by the program Un G1008 to Un G1011 OFF 7x ON 1 C OFF 0 1 j CHL Logging hold flag Un G1016 to Un G1019 1 OF F 0 ON 1 N Logging status Logging e Logging does not stop when Off 0 is set to CHO Logging hold request Un G1008 to Un G1011 before On 1 is stored in CHO Logging hold flag Un G1016 to Un G1019 aie iaila gies gt Controlled by the A D converter module _ Controlled by the program emanen OFF KONTO OOF Un G1008 to Un G1011 CFE ee a O DOS Logging is I N 1 ia t held CHO Logging hold flag SSS ee not held OFF 0 Un G1016 to Un G1019 7 4 r 4 I I I I 4 Wi a a ing after Logging status Logging i e ee Logging a Each buffer memory when logging is restarted When logging resumes the value in each buffer memory area below is as follows Buffer memory Value status CHO Head pointer Un G1090 to Un G1093 CHU Latest pointer Un G1098 to Un G1101 CHO Number of logging data Un G1106 to Un G1109 Values are initialized Initial value 0 CHO Trigger pointer Un G1114 to Un G1117 CHO Trigger detection time Un G1154 to Un G1169 e The values before logging restarts are not initialized e After logging is restarted the value is stored from the start address Un G5000 Un G15000 Un G25000 Un G35
131. ck the values stored in CHO A D conversion status Un G1700 to Un G1707 A D conversion is disabled C 3 Check item 2 Is A D conversion disable 0 stored Check the values stored in CH1 Analog input monitor Un G1710 to CH8 Analog input monitor unit Un G1725 The buffer memory areas are monitored with the monitor function of GX Works2 Bujooysejqnoll 9 44 Proper analog values are not externally input Check item 3 Are both values stored in the analog input monitor the same as the analog values that are actually Proper analog values are externally input Check item 4 Use Device Buffer Memory Batch Monitor or Intelligent Function Module Monitor Point If digital output value cannot be read even after taking the above actions the A D converter module may be failed Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative 187 a Check item 1 The read program is incorrect or the CPU module is in STOP status Check the following items Check item Action Is the program to read a digital output value Check CHO Digital output value Un G11 to Un G18 If the digital output value is stored correct according to the analog input correct the read program If the values in CHO Digital output value Un G11 to Un G18 are transferred to the Is the auto refresh setting correct device of the CPU module using auto refresh check that the auto refresh setting
132. completion 1 A D conversion completed flag XE is turned to ON when the conversion of all the channels where the A D conversion is enabled are completed Turning on and off Operating condition setting request Y9 turns the flag back to its default During A D conversion or unused 0 and the flag is turned to A D conversion completion 1 when the first A D conversion is completed 200 APPENDICES 5 CHO Digital output value Un G11 to Un G18 QO The A D converted digital output value is stored as a signed 16 bit binary b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO R Data section Sign bit 1 Negative 2 Positive a Updating cycle When the averaging processing is performed the value is updated in each specified averaging process cycle When the averaging processing is not performed the value is updated in each sampling cycle 6 Latest error code Un G19 QAB Error codes or alarm codes detected in the A D converter module are stored For details on error code and alarm code refer to the following e Error code list lt gt Page 179 Section 11 4 e Alarm code list Page 183 Section 11 5 a Clearing an error Turn on and off Error clear request YF or Operating condition setting request Y9 When Operating condition setting request Y9 is turned on and off A D conversion is reset and are resumed from the beginning sessaippy Aiowayy yng Jo sjieleg zZ xipueddy 201 7 S
133. condition setting complete completion flag is OFF turn Operating condition setting request Y9 to OFF Point In the following cases the mode is not switched and only the operating condition is changed e When turning on and off Operating condition setting request Y9 after a value other than the above is written e When turning on and off Operating condition setting request Y9 after a setting value that sets the mode same as that before mode switching is written sessaippy Aiowayy yng Jo sjieleg Z xipuaeddy 213 25 CHO Difference conversion trigger Un G172 to Un G175 ZUyy Use this buffer memory as a trigger to start stop the difference conversion For details on the difference conversion function refer to the following e Difference Conversion Function lt gt Page 103 Section 8 13 Difference conversion trigger Setting value No request 0 Trigger request 1 e In the channel where a setting value other than the above is set an error occurs The error code 370 is stored in Latest error code Un G19 and Error flag XF turns on However the difference conversion continues a Starting Stopping the difference conversion e When the setting value is turned No request 0 gt Trigger request 1 the difference conversion starts e When the setting value is turned Trigger request 0 gt No request 1 the difference conversion stops b Default value All channels are set to No request 0 26 CHO Di
134. conversion may not be properly performed e gain value lt 20mA offset value gt OMA e gain value offset value gt 14 6mA 2 When analog input is performed exceeding the range of digital output value the digital output value is fixed to the maximum or minimum Digital output value Input range setting 4 to 20mA 192 8191 0 to 20mMA 4 to 20mA Extended mode 2192 9191 User range setting 8192 8191 3 This is the maximum resolution in user range setting Point Use the value within the practical analog input range and practical digital output range If a value is out of the range the resolution and accuracy may not fall within the range of performance specifications Do not use the value in the dotted line region in the graph of current input characteristic Do not input a value of 30mA or more This may damage the elements 239 UOISJIOAUDD G V JO DISIIB JOCIEUD UOISJBAUOD O I Xipueddy Appendix 4 AID Conversion Accuracy The A D conversion accuracy is the accuracy for the maximum value of digital output value Even when changing the offset gain setting and input range to change the input characteristics the accuracy does not change and is kept within the range of described performance specifications The following graph shows the fluctuation range of accuracy when the range of 10 to 10V is selected for the L60AD4 Voltage fluctuation range Analog input voltage V The fluctuation ran
135. ction Power supply module Head module A D converter module module END cover a hs D bs D hs p bs p hs D bs l Ms 43 uoNeINBWUOD WalSAS JEJBAC S 5 2 Applicable System 1 Number of connectable modules For the number of connectable modules refer to the following MELSEC L CPU Module User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection C MELSEC L CC Link IE Field Network Head Module User s Manual 2 Compatible software version For the compatible software versions refer to the following a L60AD4 Software Version GX Works2 Version 1 20W or later GX Developer Version 8 88S or later GX Configurator AD Version 2 11M or later b LEOADVL8 L60ADIL8 Software Version GX Works2 Version 1 513K or later GX Developer Version 8 88S or later GX Configurator AD Not applicable 5 3 Restrictions When A D Converter Module is Connected to Head Module The following describes the restriction when the A D converter module is connected to a head module e Dedicated instruction cannot be used 44 CHAPTER 6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING CHAPTER 6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING This chapter describes the installation and wiring of the A D converter module 6 1 Installation Environment and Installation Position For precautions for installation environment and installation position refer to the following MELSEC L CPU Module User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspecti
136. ctly touch any conductive parts and electronic components of the module Doing so can cause malfunction or failure of the module Wiring Precautions WARNING After installation and wiring attach the included terminal cover to the module before turning it on for operation Failure to do so may result in electric shock Wiring Precautions CAUTION Individually ground the FG terminal of the programmable controller with a ground resistance of 100 ohms or less Failure to do so may result in electric shock or malfunction Tighten the terminal block screws within the specified torque range Undertightening can cause short circuit fire or malfunction Overtightening can damage the screw and or module resulting in drop short circuit or malfunction Prevent foreign matter such as dust or wire chips from entering the module Such foreign matter can cause a fire failure or malfunction A protective film is attached to the top of the module to prevent foreign matter such as wire chips from entering the module during wiring Do not remove the film during wiring Remove it for heat dissipation before system operation Mitsubishi programmable controllers must be installed in control panels Connect the main power supply to the power supply module in the control panel through a relay terminal block Wiring and replacement of a power supply module must be performed by qualified maintenance personnel with knowledge of pr
137. de 162 G P OGSTOR instruction is continuously executed e G P OGSTOR instruction is executed to the different model from the one to which G P OGLOAD instruction is 163 executed e G P OGSTOR instruction has been executed before the execution of G P OGLOAD instruction 252 APPENDICES 5 Program example The following shows the programs to write the offset gain setting value to A D converter module installed in I O number X Y10 to X Y1F by turning OFF M11 Sets a control data Restores a offset gain setting value 13 Dedicated instruction GP OGSTOR YOLS9O d 9 vg xipusddy SUOH ONISU pe edIpeq G X ipu ddy 253 Appendix 6 Checking Serial Number and Function Version The serial number and the function version of the A D converter module can be checked with the following methods e Checking on the rating plate e Checking on the front part of the module e Checking on the system monitor of a programming tool 1 Checking on the rating plate The rating plate is on the side of the A D converter module a MITSUBISHI MODEL Serial number Function version SERIAL 160410000000000 CA Relevant regulation standards MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION HADE IN JAPAN See Model instruction manual 2 Checking on the front part of the module The function version and serial number on the rating plate are also shown on the front part bottom part of the module Serial number Function versi
138. detection Day of t heuea System area 35 Address decimal 1158 1159 1160 1161 1162 1163 1164 1165 1166 1167 1168 1169 1170 to 1299 1300 1301 1302 1303 1304 to 1307 1308 1309 1310 1311 1312 to 1315 1316 1317 1318 1319 1320 to 1323 1324 1325 1326 1327 1328 to 1331 1332 36 Address Default Read Write 2 hexadecimal L60AD4 L60ADVL8 L60ADIL8 Last two digits of System area the year the year Day of Second y System area the week Firsttwo Last two System area digits of digits of the year the year D f Second ay System area the week Firsttwo Last two System area digits of the year D f Second ay System area the week First two digits of 486H CH2 Trigger detection time 487H 488H 489H 48AH CH3 Trigger detection time 48BH 48CH 48DH 48EH digits of the year CH4 Trigger detection time 48FH 490H 491H 492H to 513H CH1 Flow amount integration 14H S enable disable setting ystem area CH2 Flow amount integration Di Syst R W enable disable setting ystem area CH3 Flow amount integration 516H Suc E enable disable setting ystem area 517H CH4 Flow amount integration System area enable disable setting 518H to 51BH System area 51CH System area 4 R W 51DH System area R W 51EH System area R W 51FH System area 4 R W
139. digital operation value Un G54 to Un G57 The channel where the error has occurred fits in O CHO Flow amount time unit setting Un G1316 to Un G1319 is set to a value outside the range of 0 to 2 The channel where the error has occurred fits in O CHO Unit scaling setting Un G1324 to Un G1327 is set toa value outside the range of 0 to 4 The channel where the error has occurred fits in O CHO Flow amount integration temporary stop request Un G1356 to Un G1359 is set to a value other than 0 and 1 The channel where the error has occurred fits in O CHO Integrated flow amount clear request Un G1372 to Un G1375 is set to a value other than 0 and 1 The channel where the error has occurred fits in O Action To use the logging function set the following buffer memory areas as below e Set Disable 0 in Input signal error detection extension setting Un G27 e Set Disable 1 in Input signal error detection setting Un G47 Set Enable 0 or Disable 1 in CHO Flow amount integration enable disable setting Un G1300 to Un G1303 To use the flow amount integration function set the conversion speed to 1ms Set a value within the range of 1 to 5000 in CHO Integration cycle setting Un G1308 to Un G1311 Set CHO Integration cycle setting Un G1308 to Un G1311 so that the integration cycle is equal to or longer than the update cycle of CHO Scaling value digital operation value Un G54 to Un G57 Fo
140. e compatible L60AD4 and software version of GX Works2 Upper 5 digits of product Added contents information compatible with the Compatible version of GX Works2 Reference L60AD4 Input range extension function Page 74 Section 8 4 Input signal error detection extension P g Page 82 Section 8 8 function Shift function Page 94 Section 8 11 Digital clipping function Page 99 Section 8 12 Difference conversion function 43041 or later 1 62Q or later Page 103 Section 8 13 Logging function Page 108 Section 8 14 Flow amount integration function Page 123 Section 8 15 SHIFT screen Page 153 Section 9 3 8 Display unit DIGITALCLIP screen Page 154 Section 9 3 9 INPUT SIG ENH screen Page 154 Section 9 3 10 Appendix 7 2 Change of functions The following table lists functions changed in the L6OAD4 and GX Works2 and product information of the compatible L60AD4 and software version of GX Works2 Upper 5 digits of product Changed contents information compatible with the Compatible version of GX Works2 Reference L60AD4 CHO Scaling value digital operation Page 256 Appendix 7 2 1 value Un G54 to Un G57 age ppendix 7 2 1 i ini lue hol Maximum value minimum value hold Page 257 Appendix 7 2 2 function 13041 or later 1 62Q or later Input signal error detection function Page 257 Appendix 7 2 3 Warning output function Process alarm Page 257 Appendix 7 2 4 Scaling function Page 258 Appendix 7 2 5 1
141. e number of parameter settings set for the intelligent function module can be checked with the following operation W Project window gt Intelligent Function Module gt Right click gt Intelligent Function Module Parameter List Intelligent Function Module Parameter List Intelligent Function Module Parameter Setting Status mY Address Module Name Initialization ount E Suto Refresht Count 0010 LI ice4 i Mo Setting Mosssusnsoscscscnnunnsuususssunnunnnnsnsusunsnsnnnnennnnn 00320 L DDA 4 Wl Setting Exist 4 No Setting 0040 L DAD4 Setting Existt12 No Setting Intelligent Function Module Parameter Setting Count Total Initial Max 2046 Auto Refresh a Max 1024 _ close 1 2 3 4 No Description The total number of parameters in the initial settings selected on the dialog box 2 The maximum number of parameter settings in the initial settings 3 The total number of parameters in the auto refresh settings selected on the dialog box 4 The maximum number of parameter settings in the auto refresh settings 24 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 3 Function List The following is the function list of the A D converter module Applicable model __ Applicable model __ Item Description L60ADVL Reference L60AD4 oy 8 L60ADIL8 Sets whether t ble or disable A D conversion for each channel A D conversion enable disable 7 t a Page 69 Section Disabling the A D conversion for unused channels reduces
142. e set to A D conversion enable 0 as the default value 2 CHO Time Average Count Average Moving Average Un G1 to Un G8 QO Configure the time count moving average setting for each channel to which the averaging processing is specified e The following shows the setting range Module Processing method Conversion speed setting Setting range Time average 80us 1ms 2 to 5000 ms 20us 80us 1ms 4 to 62500 times 20us 80us 1ms 2 to 1000 times Time average 4 to 5000 ms L60ADVL8 A 4 L6OADIL8 Count average 4 to 62500 times 4 When specifying a setting between 32768 and 62500 times in the program configure the setting in hexadecimal When specifying a setting of 62500 times set F424H e When the value out of the setting range above is written an error occurs in the channel to which the value is written the error code is stored in Latest error code Un G19 and Error flag XF turns on The A D conversion is processed in the setting configured before the error occurrence e On a channel where Averaging process setting Un G24 Un G25 has been set to Sampling processing 0 sessoippy Aiowayy yng Jo sjieleg Z xipueddy any setting for this area is ignored a Enabling the setting Turn on and off Operating condition setting request Y9 to enable the setting b Default value All channels are set to Disable 0 Point Because 0 is set as a default value change the value according to the process
143. e table refer to the following Range reference table lt _ gt Page 143 Section 8 19 3 3 Is the offset gain setting correct Bujooysejqnoll 9 44 Point An input signal error may be detected in the following cases even though the analog input signal has a correct value e When the value for input range setting Input signal error detection extension setting Un G27 Un G28 Input signal error detection setting Un G47 or CHO Input signal error detection setting value Un G142 to Un G149 is incorrect e When the offset gain setting is not properly configured with the user range being used A digital output value is not updated if an input signal error is detected When checking whether a digital output value can be properly read or not at the system start up check the operation with the input signal error detection function and input signal error detection extension function being disabled to prevent the misunderstanding of the cause of a problem Enable the input signal error detection function and input signal error detection extension function after checking that a digital output value was properly read 189 3 When an A D conversion completed flag does not turn on in the normal mode Sy Check item Action Isn t there any input signal error Check Input signal error detection flag Un G49 4 When a digital output value does not fall within the range of accuracy Check item Action Is any measure against
144. e week e Wednesday 3 4 Those are values when an error occurs at 10 35 40 on Tuesday March 29th 2011 2011H 329H 1035H 40H 2H 233 sessaippy Aiowayy yng Jo sjieleg Z xipueddy 61 CHO Logging data Un G5000 to Un G44999 Ee This is an area for storing the logged data Up to 10000 data can be stored per channel After the number of data points stored in CHO Logging data Un G5000 to Un G44999 for each channel reaches 10000 the logging is continued overwriting the data from the head For details on the logging function refer to the following e Logging function gt Page 108 Section 8 14 Point When Operating condition setting request Y9 is turned on and off the logging data in all the channels are cleared to zero Even if CHO Logging hold request Un G1008 to Un G1011 is changed from On 1 to Off 0 and the logging restarts the logged data is not cleared to zero 234 APPENDICES Appendix 3 1 0 Conversion Characteristic of A D Conversion I O conversion characteristic of A D conversion means the slope of the line connected between the offset value and gain value when converting the analog signal voltage or current from outside of programmable controller to digital output value 1 Offset value This is the analog input value voltage or current when the digital output value becomes 0 2 Gain value This is the analog input value voltage or current when the digital output v
145. each channel are common For details refer to Page 189 Section 11 6 2 2 c If the AG terminal is connected to the GND of the external device some errors may be observed on the I O conversion characteristic When some errors are observed on the I O conversion characteristic adjust the I O conversion characteristic with the offset gain setting Always ground the shielded wire for each channel and FG terminal In addition ground the FG terminal of the power supply module CHAPTER 7 VARIOUS SETTINGS CHAPTER 7 VARIOUS SETTINGS This chapter describes the setting procedures of the A D converter module Point After writing the contents of new module parameter settings and auto refresh settings into the CPU module reset the CPU module switch STOP gt RUN gt STOP RUN or switch on the power supply to validate the setting contents After writing the contents of switch settings into the CPU module reset the CPU module or switch on the power supply to validate the setting contents 7 1 Addition of Modules Add the model name of A D converter modules to use on the project 1 Addition procedure Open the New Module dialog box X Project window gt Intelligent Function Module gt Right click gt New Module New Module Module Selection Module Type Analog Module Module Marne LEDAD4 Mount Position Base Ma Mounted Slot Mo 0 J Acknowledge IO Assignment S j
146. ecified to S on execution of the G P OGLOAD instruction Do not change the data which is read out by the G P OGLOAD instruction If the data is changed the normal operation may not be ensured 249 2 Control data Device 1 S 2 3 4 5 S 6 S 7 S 8 S 9 S 10 S 11 S 12 S 13 S 14 S 15 S 16 S 17 S 18 S 19 S 20 S 21 S 22 S 23 S 24 S 25 S 26 S 27 S 28 S 29 S 30 S 31 250 a L60AD4 Setting data Setting range The status on instruction completion is stored Completion status 0 normal completion Other than 0 error completion error code The value which is set for Pass data classification setting S 2 by G P OGLOAD instruction is stored 0 voltage Pass data classification setting 1 current OOOOH to OOOFH b15 b8 b7 b6 bd b4 b3 b2 b1 bO a as he elle cc aa Sa System area CH1 Industrial shipment settings offset value L CH1 Industrial shipment settings offset value H CH1 Industrial shipment settings gain value L CH1 Industrial shipment settings gain value H CH2 Industrial shipment settings offset value L CH2 Industrial shipment settings offset value H CH2 Industrial shipment settings gain value L CH2 Industrial shipment settings gain value H CH3 Industrial shipment settings offset value L CH3 Industrial shipment settings offset value H CH3 Industrial shipment settings gain value L CH3 Indust
147. ed Logging data When the logging function is used digital output values or scaling values digital operation values are collected For details on the logging function refer to the following e Logging Function lt gt Page 108 Section 8 14 Integrated flow amount When the flow amount integration function is used scaling values digital operation values are integrated For details on the flow amount integration function refer to the following e Flow amount integration function lt gt Page 123 Section 8 15 Point When averaging processing time average count average is performed on digital output value scaling values digital operation values and maximum and minimum values the values are stored at every averaging process cycle In the use of the input signal error detection function or input signal error detection extension function A D conversion is stopped if an input signal error occurs In this case the digital output values scaling values digital operation values and maximum and minimum values are not updated The values obtained before the input signal error is detected are held When the analog input signal returns to a normal value A D conversion resumes For details refer to the following e Input signal error detection function lt Page 77 Section 8 7 e Input signal error detection extension function gt Page 82 Section 8 8 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 8 2 A D Conversion Enable D
148. ed instruction Q G OFFGAN in D1 T Dedicated instruction 2 X3A N Processing in normal mode D END Point The program enclosed by the doted line is the common programs among the following three programs e Switching the mode by the dedicated instruction G P OFFGAN _ gt Page 65 Section 7 5 2 2 b e Switching the mode by setting Mode switching setting Un G158 Un G159 and by Operating condition setting request Y9 L gt Page 66 Section 7 5 2 2 c e Switching the mode by the switch setting gt Page 66 Section 7 5 2 2 d When the mode has been switched from offset gain setting mode to normal mode by the dedicated instruction G P OFFGAN Module READY X0 turns on Note that if a program includes the initial settings to be executed at ON of Module READY X0 this instruction performs the initial setting process 65 66 c Switching the mode by Mode switching setting Un G158 Un G159 and Operating condition setting request Y9 Switches to the offset gain setting mode M5 U3 Sets 4144H to Mode MOV H4144 G158 switching setting 1 U3 G158 U3 Sets 0964H to Mode MOV H964 G159 switching setting 2 U3 G159 Turns on Operating condition SET Y39 setting request Y39 e 39 Turns off Operating condition setting request Y39 Switches to the normal mode U3 Sets 0964H to Mode Y MOV H964 G158 J switching setting 1 U3 G158 U3 MOV H4144 G159 S
149. ed value No temporary stop request 0 Temporary stopping 1 e While the flow amount integration function temporarily stops by CHO Flow amount integration temporary stop request Un G1356 to Un G1359 being turned No request 0 Temporary stop request 1 CHO Flow amount integration temporary stop flag Un G1364 to Un G1367 is turned to Temporary stop request 1 e When the flow amount integration function restarts by CHO Flow amount integration temporary stop request Un G1356 to Un G1359 being turned Temporary stop request 1 gt No request 0 CHO Flow amount integration temporary stop flag Un G1364 to Un G1367 is turned to No temporary stop request 1 54 CHO Integrated flow amount clear request Un G1372 to Un G1375 ZR When the flow amount integration function is enabled the value of CHO Integrated flow amount Un G1332 to Un G1339 can be cleared to zero For details on the flow amount integration function refer to the following e Flow amount integration function lt Page 123 Section 8 15 Integrated flow amount clear request Setting value No request 0 Clear request 1 e Inthe channel where a setting value other than the above is set an error occurs The error code 2160 is stored in Latest error code Un G19 Error flag XF turns on and the setting is ignored e When CHO Integrated flow amount clear request Un G1372 to Un G1375 is turned to No request 0 gt Clear request 1 while the flow amount int
150. ee use 183 TL6 TROUDICSMOOUNG res te c a40 5 care x Qrctie iste Sie eS eae ete eS Ciera eS Aare AS 4 re ee Arm se eos 184 116 1 hroubleshooting Using LEDS lt s 2 vniae hoe eiato04 eGo kee eee eo oe tents es oleae 184 11 6 2 Troubleshooting for the A D Conversion 0 000 cee eee eae 186 11 7 Checking the Status of the A D Converter Module by the System Monitor 191 APPENDICES 192 Appendix 1 Details of I O Signals 2 4 v 28 tec ee nd he 8 Le er eee oo EPA Ch ei eee 192 Appendix 1 1 Input signal 0 0 0 0 0 cc ee eee eee eens 192 Append 1 2 Ou tputsignal nesre cuume teen e Pesce demersal eee E had ter 197 Appendix 2 Details of Buffer Memory Addresses 00 000 cece eee ees 199 Appendix 3 I O Conversion Characteristic of A D Conversion 000000 eee 235 Appendix 4 A D Conversion ACCUracy 1 saaa aa aaaea 240 Appendix 5 Dedicated Instructions 0 0 0 ccc eee eee 241 Appendix 5 1 InStruGtionliSts lt 2035 01 4 an du eea 6 Souci Canaan anno Re eo O 241 Appendixo 2 GOR ORP GAN gains A een ah a E ar siete ules Ate diem aha Ay ACN SA eit S Ja deca 242 Appendix s 3 S P OGLOAD ss a ses tamed bien tales iid EM ok be Able tenes a etiaee bates 244 Appendix 54 lt GCP OGSIOR a accacn tee bier teal Cheat eae eae SA Ar Sek 249 Appendix 6 Checking Serial Number and Function Version naaa 0000 cee eee eee 254 Ap
151. egration function is operating the value of CHO Integrated flow amount Un G1332 to Un G1339 in the corresponding channel is cleared to zero a Default value All channels are set to No request 0 55 CHO Integrated flow amount clear flag Un G1380 to Un G1383 ZUR Integrated flow amount clear request status can be checked with this flag Integrated flow amount clear flag Setting value No clear request 0 Cleared 1 e When CHO Integrated flow amount clear request Un G1372 to Un G1375 is turned No request 0 Clear request 1 and the value of CHO Integrated flow amount Un G1332 to Un G1339 is cleared CHO Integrated flow amount clear flag Un G1380 to Un G1383 is turned to Cleared 1 e When CHO Integrated flow amount clear request Un G1372 to Un G1375 is turned to Clear request 1 gt No request 0 CHO Integrated flow amount clear flag Un G1380 to Un G1383 is turned to No clear request 0 231 sessaippy Aiowayy yng Jo sjieleg Z xipueddy 56 CHO A D conversion status Un G1700 to Un G1707 0MB The status of A D conversion is stored Use this area for troubleshooting For details refer to the following e When digital output value cannot be read lt Page 187 Section 11 6 2 2 A D conversion status Stored value Description A D conversion has been disabled A D conversion has not been performed on the corresponding channel A D conversion start pt A D conversion has been enabled and the fir
152. em to set and input the setting value 06 CHAPTER 7 VARIOUS SETTINGS 3 For setting CH2 to CH4 follow the operation of step2 Item Setting value Reference 0 Enable default value Page 69 tt A D conversion enable disable setting beshie Section 8 2 0 Sampling Processing default value 1 Time Average Averaging process setting 2 Count Average 3 Moving Average Time Average 20us 2 to 1500ms default value 0 For the L60AD4 80us 1ms 2 to 5000ms default value 0 Page 69 Basic setting Tne Aage Section 8 3 Time Average Count Average Moving For the L60ADVL8 4 to 5000ms default value 0 Average or L60ADIL8 Count Average 4 to 62500 times default value 0 Moving Average 2 to 1000 times default value 0 0 20 Me Hs Page 75 Conversion speed setting 1 80us default value Section 8 5 2 ims Warning output settin 0 Enable gt 1 Disable default value Warning output Process alarm upper upper limit value 32768 to 32767 default value 0 Page 85 function Process alarm upper lower limit value 32768 to 32767 default value 0 Section 8 9 Process alarm lower upper limit value 32768 to 32767 default value 0 a Process alarm lower lower limit value 32768 to 32767 default value 0 0 Enable Input signal error Input signal error detection setting i Disable detauit valis Page 77 detection Section 8 7 Input signal error detection setting value O to 25 0 default
153. en the digital clipping function scaling function and shift function are used together refer to the following e Setting example of when the digital clipping function scaling function and shift function are used together Page 101 Section 8 12 4 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 8 12 Digital Clipping Function The range of the scaling value digital operation value for voltage or current over the input range is fixed between the maximum digital output value and the minimum digital output value 1 Concept of digital clipping setting The following table lists the output range of the scaling value digital operation value when the digital clipping function is enabled for each range Output range of the scaling value digital operation value Input range Digital clipping function enabled Digital clipping function disabled 4 to 20mA 0 to 20mA 1 to 5V 0 to 20000 480 to 20479 0 to 5V 0 to 10V 10 to 10V 20000 to 20000 20480 to 20479 User range setting 4 to 20mA Extended mode 5000 to 22500 5480 to 22979 2 Setting procedure 1 Set A D conversion enable disable setting to 0 Enable KO Project window gt Intelligent Function Module gt gt module name gt Parameter Basic setting Sets method of A D c ALB conversion enable disable setting po Enema ii see Averaging process setting i Time Average Count 1 Disable 2 Set Digital clipping function enable disable setting
154. equest Hf A RST Y3F Turns off Error clear request END 4 When using the L6OADVL8 or L6OADIL8 and enabling A D conversion for five channels or more increase the number of digits to be specified For example change K1MO to K2M0 163 uoneinbiyuoDy Wae1SAS psepue s e Ul jnpon 2y BuISA UBUAA zol 6 Program example when not using the parameter of intelligent function module Initial settings X30 F SET i100 M100 Y39 X39 iter U3 MOV H8 GO Enables CH1 to CH3 A D conversion U3 MOV K50 G2 Sets CH2 Time Count Moving average U3 l l MOV K10 G3 Sets CH3 Time Count Moving average 3 i U3 i MOV H320 G24 Sets CH1 to CH3 Averaging processing U3 MOV HO G26 Sets conversion speed U3 MOV HOD G48 Sets CH2 Warning output ope 2 U3 Sets CH2 Process alarm lower lower MOV KO G90 limit value US MOV K3000 G91 Sets CH2 Process alarm lower upper limit value l U3 MOV K18000 G92 Sets CH2 Process alarm upper lower limit value 1 U3 MOV k20000 G93 Sets CH2 Process alarm upper upper Ledeen limit value U3 Activates CH1 Input signal error MOV HOE G47 detection U3 Sets CH1 Input signal error detection MOV K100 G142 value U3 MOV HOB G53 Sets CH3 Scaling setting U3 a MOV KO G66 Sets CH3 Scaling lower limit value U3 o MOV K32000 G67 Sets CH3 Scaling upper limit value 3 a ee a ae ee ee _ 4 i MOV HOB G29 Enables CH3 Digital clipping function U3 a MOV K10000
155. er to the following I O conversion characteristic of A D conversion lt Page 235 Appendix 3 2 Maximum resolution in the user range setting 3 Except when receiving noise influence 4 This is a momentary current value which does not cause damage to internal resistors of the module The maximum input current value for constant application is 24mA 5 If the number of offset gain settings exceeds 10000 times an error error code 170 occurs 23 SUOIeOIIOA dS SOUBWOLAd ZE 3 2 1 Number of parameter settings Set the initial setting of A D converter module and the parameter setting of auto refresh setting so that the number of parameters including these of other intelligent function modules does not exceed the number of parameters that can be set in the CPU module or the head module For the maximum number of parameters that can be set in the CPU module or the head module maximum number of parameter settings refer to the following MELSEC L CPU Module User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection MELSEC L CC Link IE Field Network Head Module User s Manual 1 Number of A D converter module parameters For A D converter modules the following number of parameters can be set per module Target module Initial setting Auto refresh setting L60AD4 2 75 maximum number of settings L60ADVL8 L60ADIL8 37 maximum number of settings 2 Checking method The maximum number of parameter settings and th
156. ers specified for amp and exceed the device point range User s Manual Hardware Design PEO IESEL Maintenance and Inspection Error code 4004 The connection number specified for is other than 1 to 16 Error code 4101 Error code 4101 5 Program example When M2000 is turned on or when the connected device disconnects connection No 1 connection No 1 is disconnected by the following program Device used Device number Application Simple program example s 501262 Open completion signal and descriptions of the devices used 2 antha alanaan D200 SP SOCCLOSE instruction control data M200 SP SOCCLOSE instruction completion device Program re asing for scan of Comecon Na e yihe a targat 0 J Comecton No 1 dose m21 Jj Setfing SP SOCCLOSE executing fag J Noenal compilation J Gro compati i Rasatting SPSOCCLO maio J Secusng fag J e Instructions can be executed under the following conditions Execution condition Any Anytime mea On the rising edge On the falling edge Link direct Setting File device data register Intelligent function Index module register Constant Others 4 P I J U D X W SD SW DY N BL TR FD U BL S V Applicable device 2 SB FX PY 73 ee For details on each device refer to the following MELSEC L CPU Module User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals FX and FY can be used for bit data
157. ets 4144H to Mode switching setting 2 U3 G159 SET Y39 Turns on Operating condition Resets the operating condition setting request setting request Y39 Jy a Turns off Operating condition oe bi setting request Y39 Processing in normal mode END Point When the mode has been switched from offset gain setting mode to normal mode by the setting for Mode switching setting Un G158 Un G159 Module READY X0 turns on Note that if a program includes the initial settings to be executed at ON of Module READY X0 this instruction performs the initial setting process d Switching the mode by the switch setting The programs other than the common program is not necessary Configure the switch setting and reset the CPU module or turn off and on the power to switch the mode CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS CHAPTER 8 FuNcTIONS This chapter describes the details of the functions available in the A D converter module and the setting procedures for those functions For details on I O signals and buffer memory refer to the following e Details of I O signals lt gt Page 192 Appendix 1 e Details of buffer memory addresses Page 199 Appendix 2 Processing Order of Each Function 8 1 Analog input values and the digital values of 1 to 5 are processed in the order shown below If multiple functions are enabled the output of the first processed function is used as the input of the next function Input signal
158. etting mode flag XA is off Check that Offset gain setting mode flag XA turns on Is ERR LED on NO Switch to normal mode Page 65 Section 7 5 2 2 b e Setting for Mode switching setting Un G158 Un G159 and turning on and off Operating condition setting request Y9 L gt Page 66 Section 7 5 2 2 c e Switch setting gt Page 66 Section 7 5 2 2 d 63 Bulnes uleg esyoO F 64 Point Offset and gain values are recorded in the flash memory in the A D converter module by turning on and off User range write request YA Once recorded the values are not deleted even after turning the power off When the values are written 26 times in succession an error occurs to prevent an improper write to flash memory The error code 170 is stored in Latest error code Un G19 Error flag XF turns on and the ERR LED turns on If the power is turned off or the CPU module is reset while offset and gain values are being written to the flash memory while Offset gain setting mode flag XA is off a write to the flash memory may fail and the offset and gain values may be deleted Therefore do not turn off the power or do not reset the CPU module while data is being written in the flash memory Configure the offset gain setting in the range satisfying the following condition When the setting value out of the range is configured the resolution and accuracy of the module may not fall within the ra
159. etting range Un G20 Un G21 Q The input range and output range that have been set using the switch setting can be checked with this area b145 to b12b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0 Un G20 Setting range CH1 to CH4 CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1 b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to bO Un G21 Setting range CH5 to CH8 CH8 CH7 CH6 CH5 A E 4 For the L60AD4 data in Un G21 are fixed to 0 Input range Setting value 4 to 20mA OH 0 to 20mA 1H 1 to 5V 2H 0 to 5V 3H 10 to 10V 4H 0 to 10V 5H 4 to 20mA Extended mode AH 1 to 5V Extended mode BH User range setting FH Point Input range cannot be changed in Setting range Un G20 Un G21 To change the input range change the Switch Setting For the Switch Setting refer to the following e Switch setting gt Page 54 Section 7 2 When OH default is set for the intelligent function module switch setting the LGOADVL8 operates with 5H 0 to 10V and this buffer memory area stores 5H 202 APPENDICES 8 Offset gain setting mode Offset specification Un G22 Offset gain setting mode Gain specification Un G23 QB Specify the channel to perform the offset gain setting adjustment e Offset gain setting mode Offset specification Un G22 channel to adjust the offset e Offset gain setting mode Gain specification Un G23 channel to adjust the gain b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO Offset gain setting mode Offset specification Un G22 o o0 o0 o0 0 0 0 0 cH
160. extension function 74 Switch setting 1 6 eee eee eee eee 04 Input signal error detection extension function 82 Input signal error detection extension setting Un G27 T UDG28 k Sects sok aa tate eget ar e Sheth eae ae Mad peace awed 205 Input signal error detection flag Un G49 208 Time AVEraAG 6s 3 6 Soa Se Ree eens sees 70 Input signal error detection function 7 Input signal error detection setting Un G47 207 U Input signal error detection signal XC 195 Integrated flow amount naaa aaa aaea 68 Upper limit detection n n noana aaa 82 Intelligent function module switch setting 264 User range write request YA n o u 197 Voltage input characteristic 236 W Warning output flag Process alarm Un G50 209 Warning output function process alarm 85 Warning output setting Un G48 207 Warning output signal X8 192 INSTRUCTION INDEX G G P OFFGAN 00 cc cece cceeeecces 242 GP OGLOAD ergs oo sidecesatinclt coe ge bared Aece 244 GP OCS TOR prore i r tice wes 249 2 1 REVISIONS The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover January 2010 SH NA 080899ENG A First edition Partial correction SAFETY PRECAUTIONS COMPLIANCE WITH THE EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES RELEVANT MANUALS TERMS CHAPTER 3 Section 3 1 3 2 1 3 3 3 5 CHAPTER 4 Section 5 1
161. fference conversion reference value Un G180 to Un G183 ZB This is the area for storing the scaling value digital operation value at the start of the difference conversion as the difference conversion reference value b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 bd b4 b3 b2 bi bO R Data section Sign bit 1 Negative 0 Positive a Storage range The storage range is 32768 to 32767 Point The difference conversion reference value is updated when CHO Difference conversion trigger Un G172 to Un G175 is turned No request 0 gt Trigger request 1 Even if CHO Difference conversion status flag Un G190 to Un G193 is turned Converting difference 1 gt Not converted 0 CHO Difference conversion reference value Un G180 to Un G183 is not cleared 214 APPENDICES 27 CHO Difference conversion status flag Un G190 to Un G193 ZUR Difference conversion status can be checked with this flag Difference conversion status CHL Difference conversion status flag Un G190 to Un G193 Not converted 0 Converting difference 1 e When CHO Difference conversion trigger Un G172 to Un G175 is turned No request 0 Requested 1 CHO Difference conversion status flag Un G190 to Un G193 is turned to Converting difference 1 e When CHO Difference conversion trigger Un G172 to Un G175 is turned Requested 1 No request 0 CHU Difference conversion status flag Un G190 to Un G193 is turned Converting difference 1
162. ffset Gain Setting Ed sacha Bee er setting and click the button Start SY Address Module Type 0010 LAO 4D4 MELSOFT Series GX Works2 2 Click the button A Do you want to switch over From normal setting mode to offset gain setting mode Caution AJD conversion will be cancelled when switching over to offset gain setting mode In case of error occurrence at the target module the error will be cleared when switching over to offset gain setting mode Yes No 60 CHAPTER 7 VARIOUS SETTINGS 3 Select the channel to use the offset gain setting and Offset Gain Setting click the button Detail Display Error Clear 4 Input the offset value voltage or current in the target channel terminal and click the s button MELSOFT Series GX Works 5 Check that Offset Status is changed to Changed 6 Click the Ser setting button Offset Gain Setting Buijes uley jesyo GZ 7 Input the gain value voltage or current in the target channel terminal and click the __ s button MELSOFT Series GX Works 61 Offset Gain Setting OOION60ADA Ea Detail Display Error Gear MELSOFT Series GX Works2 62 8 Check that Gain Status is changed to Changed 9 Click the cox button 10 Click the my button 7 9 2 Setting from a program 1 Setting procedure The following describes the procedures when setting the offset gain from a program
163. fset gain setting mode and 1 Changed to the offset gain setting mode is set the operation is invalid 3 Errors The instruction has no errors 242 APPENDICES 4 Program example The following shows the program of the A D converter module which is installed in I O number X Y10 to X Y 1F with the following conditions Turning on M10 switches the operation mode to the offset gain setting mode Turning off M10 restores the operation mode to the normal mode Switches to the offset gain setting mode M10 1 MOVP K1 D1 Stores the setting data of the dedicated instruction G OFFGAN in D1 G OFFGAN U1 D1 Dedicated instruction G OFFGAN X1A Processing in offset gain setting mode Switches to the normal mode MIE MOVP KO D1 Stores the setting data of the dedicated instruction G OFFGAN in D1 G OFFGAN U1 D1 Dedicated instruction G OFFGAN X1A Processing in normal mode END 243 NV9440 d 9 z S xipueddy SUOH ONISU pe ed1IpEeq Gg X ipu ddy Appendix 5 3 G P OGLOAD Command G OGLOAD JL Command GP OGLOAD ft Internal device device a Constant a N ol _ 1 Setting data Device Description Setting range Data type 0 to FEH BIN 16 bits Un Start I O number of module Within the range of Device name specified device S Start number of device where the control data is stored Device which turns ON for one scan at the processing completion of the dedicated ins
164. function can be used in a channel in which the user range is used For details on the scaling function refer to the following e Scaling function lt Page 88 Section 8 10 a When the non compatible version of the L60AD4 is used For the L60AD4 of non compatible version when the scaling function is set to be enabled in a channel in which the user range is used an error occurs error code 990 After the error occurrence the error code is stored in Latest error code Un G19 and Error flag XF is turned to ON The scaling function performs in the setting before the error For details on how to resolve the error refer to the following e Error code list lt Page 179 Section 11 4 APPENDICES Appendix 8 Differences with Q Series The following describes the differences between L series and Q series and the precautions for configuring the L series system using the Q series program The description in this chapter is in the case of Q64AD 1 Specification comparison a Comparison of the specifications between the L60AD4 and Q64AD The following table shows a comparison of the specifications between the L6OAD4 and Q64AD Difference L60AD4 Q64AD Resolution change function 2 types normal resolution 1 4000 and high resolution 1 12000 1 type 1 2 lution change functi t install ype 1 20000 resolution change function is not installed or 1 16000 20us 2 to 1500ms 80us 1ms 2 to 5000ms 2 to 5000m
165. g lt gt Page 264 Appendix 9 2 11 5 Alarm Code List The following shows an alarm code list CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING decimal module When the scaling value digital operation value returns to the one within the setting range the A process alarm is occurring corresponding bit of Warning output flag Process L60AD4 The channel where the process alarm has occurred fits in O alarm Un G50 and Warning output signal X8 10Aq0 L60ADVL8 A value fits in A indicates that the alarm status is as follows turn off L60ADIL8 0 Upper limit of a process alarm The alarm code can be cleared by turning off on 1 Lower limit of a process alarm and off Error clear request YF after the scaling value digital operation value returns to the one within the setting range An input signal error is occurring L60AD4 The channel where the input signal error has occurred fits in O 11000 L60ADVL8 This alarm code is stored when an input signal error is detected L60ADIL8 according to the setting of the input signal error detection function An input signal error is occurring The corresponding bit of Input signal error detection The channel where the input signal error has occurred fits in O flag Un G49 and Input signal error detection signal A value fits in A indicates that the detection status is as XC turn off by turning off on and off Error clear follows request YF after the analog input value returns to HAR eee 1 Upper lim
166. g by intelligent device station 1 Create a project for GX Works2 Select LCPU for PLC Series and select LU72GF15 T2 for Type X Project lt gt New Project Type Language 2 Display the PLC Parameter setting screen and configure the setting as follows WD Project windowc gt Parameter c gt PLC parameter gt Communication Head Setting CC Link IE Field Communication Head Parameter Setting Communication Head Setting PLO Name jf Operation Setting I O Assignment nine H 170 CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING 3 Add the A D converter module L60AD4 to the GX Works2 project kT Project windowc gt Intelligent Function Module c gt Right clickc gt New Module New Module Module Selection Module Type 4nalog Module Module Name LenaD4 Mount Position Base Mo Mounted Slot Mo 4cknowledge I O Assignment IY Specify start address 0000 H 1 Module Occupy 16 points Title Setting Title aee 4 Display the Switch Setting screen for the A D converter module L60AD4 and configure the setting as follows T Project window Intelligent Function Module c gt L60AD4 gt Switch Setting The following are available for the Input Range Setting for product information 130410000000000 A or later 4 to 20mA extension mode 1 to W extension mode This dialog setting is linked to the Switch Setting of the PLC parameter Default
167. g cycle unit setting Un G1040 to Un G1043 Set the unit of the time interval at which data are collected For details on the logging function refer to the following e Logging function lt gt Page 108 Section 8 14 a Setting range e The available setting range of CHO Logging cycle setting value Un G1032 to Un G1035 depends on the setting for CHO Logging cycle unit setting Un G1040 to Un G1043 ee er Per Setting value of CHO Logging cycle unit setting Available setting range of CHO Logging cycle setting SEEMED Un G1040 to Un G1043 value Un G1032 to Un G1035 ms 1 1 to 32767 e When either CHO Logging cycle setting value Un G1032 to Un G1035 or CHO Logging cycle unit setting Un G1040 to Un G1043 is set to a value outside the above range an error occurs The error code 2010 is stored in Latest error code Un G19 and Error flag XF turns on Logging cannot be performed e When a set logging cycle is shorter than the refresh cycle of the target data for logging an error occurs The error code 2020 is stored in Latest error code Un G19 and Error flag XF turns on Logging cannot be performed e When CHO Logging enable disable setting Un G1000 to Un G1003 is set to Disable 1 the setting for CHOI Logging cycle setting value Un G1032 to Un G1035 and CHO Logging cycle unit setting Un G1040 to Un G1043 are ignored b Actual logging cycle The actual logging cycle is an integral multiple of the conversion cyc
168. ge varies depending on the ambient temperature and input range as shown below However influence by noises is excluded Fluctuation range Module Analog input range Ambient temperature 25 5 C Ambient temperature 0 55 C L60AD4 For all the analog input ranges 0 1 20digit 0 2 40digit 0 to 10V Within 40 2 32digit Within 1 160digit 432digit 0 to 5V Within 0 2 16digit Within 1 80digit L60ADVL8 1 to 5V 10 to 10V Within 0 2 32digit Within 1 160digit in 0 2 igit 1 to 5V Extended mode Within 0 2 16digit Within 1 80digit L60ADIL8 For all the analog input ranges Within 0 2 16digit Within 1 80digit 240 APPENDICES Appendix 5 Dedicated Instructions This chapter describes the dedicated instructions that can be used in A D converter module Appendix 5 1 instruction list The following shows the dedicated instructions that can be used in the A D converter module Instruction Description e The operation mode is changed from the normal mode to the offset gain setting mode G P OFFGAN ie e The operation mode is changed from the offset gain setting mode to the normal mode G P OGLOAD The offset gain set value in the user range setting is read out to the CPU module The offset gain set value in the user range setting stored in the CPU module is restored to the A D converter G P OGSTOR P module 241 SI UONONsuU G xIlpueddy SUOH ONISU pe edIpEeq
169. gnal error detection signal XC turns off When Input signal error detection signal XC turns off the following operations are applied e ALM LED turns off e Latest error code Un G19 is cleared SSeS gt Controlled by the A D converter module gt Controlled by the program Input signal error detection Input signal error flag Un G49 0 detection 4 0 Input signal error detection signal XC jeubis ndu 1 xipueddy sjeuBls O I 40 silejeq xipueddy Error clear request YF Point When the analog input value falls within the range set A D conversion resumes regardless of turning on and off Error clear request YF However the ON status of Input signal error detection signal XC and the flashing status of the ALM LED are not cleared When the first A D conversion after the resumption is completed A D conversion completed flag Un G10 turns to A D conversion completed 1 Averaging processing starts over after the A D conversion resumed 195 7 Maximum value minimum value reset completed flag XD QHA Maximum value minimum value reset completed flag XD turns on after resetting the maximum or minimum values stored in CH1 Maximum value Un G30 to CH8 Minimum value Un G45 by turning on Maximum value minimum value reset request YD cee aaa gt Controlled by the A D converter module gt Controlled by the program CH1 Maximum value Un G30 to CH8 Minimum value Un G45 gt
170. grated flow amount clear Systema EA flag H4 Int ted fl t cl flag 1384 t 37 Address decimal 1726 to 38 1700 1701 1702 1703 1704 1705 1706 1707 1708 1709 1710 1711 1712 1713 1714 1715 1716 1717 1718 1719 1720 1721 1722 1723 1724 1725 1799 Address hexadecimal L60AD4 L60ADVL8 L60ADIL8 6ACH System area 6ADH CH1 Analog input monitor CH2 Analog input monitor CH3 Anal t t CH4 Analog input monitor CH5 Analog input monitor CH6 Analog input t CH7 Analog input monitor CH8 Analog i t t unit 4 2 ie The default value is a value set after power on or after resetting the CPU module This shows whether read or write from programs is possible R Readable W Writable AD4 indicates the L60AD4 ADL8 indicates the LEGOADVL8 and L60ADIL8 Read Write 2 Item enabled by turning on and off Operating condition setting request Y9 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 2 Error history Un G1800 to Un G4999 This area is common to L60AD4 L60ADVL8 and L60ADIL8 Item enabled by Address Address m turning on and off decimal hexadecimal RUBRICS Operating condition setting request Y9 1800 pem Latest address of error history e 1801 t 1810 Ea SS code 1811 713H o two digits Last two digits E of the year of the year C Me E a E ee ee ee Error time week 1815 to we _ 1820 to to 725H No 2 No 1 p a ees 1830 t
171. hat CHO Logging hold flag Un G1016 to Un G1019 is On 1 uonoun4 Bulb6o7 Y g 115 3 Checking data when a hold trigger has occurred The storage location of the data when a hold trigger has occurred can be checked with CHO Trigger pointer Un G1114 to Un G1117 The offset value 0 to 9999 counted from the start address Un G5000 Un G15000 Un G25000 Un G35000 of CHO Logging data Un G5000 to Un G44999 is stored in CHO Trigger pointer Un G1114 to Un G1117 The stored value of the trigger pointer when the logging operation stops under the following conditions e CH1 Logging points after trigger Un G1048 6505 points e The data where a hold trigger has occurred 3500th data A DON Address 4 the latest A Address 5 the oldest Adaress 349 a OTTTSETENS TEE Address 3500 Address 3501 eS Sees eee ee eee ee ee i eee eee eee eee eee eee OEE G a a A a a a a S S i a eee eee eee eee eee ee eee eee eee eee eee eee Address 9998 Address 9999 a Checking trigger detection time The trigger detection time can be checked with CHO Trigger detection time Un G1154 to Un G1169 Even when the logging cycle is set as less than 1s the minimum time unit recorded in the Trigger detection time Un G1154 to Un G1157 is second Use the trigger detection time as an indication to refer to the logging data Sg When CH1 Trigger detection time Un G1154 to Un G1157 is monitored b15 to b8 b
172. he error has occurred fits in O The set logging cycle is shorter than the update cycle of the logged value digital output value or scaling value digital operation value The channel where the error has occurred fits in O CHO Logging data setting Un G1024 to Un G1027 is set toa value other than 0 and 1 The channel where the error has occurred fits in O CHO Logging points after trigger Un G1048 to Un G1051 is set to a value outside the range of 1 to 10000 The channel where the error has occurred fits in O CHO Level trigger condition setting Un G1056 to Un G1059 is set to a value outside the range of 0 to 3 The channel where the error has occurred fits in O CHO Trigger data Un G1064 to Un G1067 is set to a value outside the range of 0 to 4999 The channel where the error has occurred fits in O CHO Logging hold request Un G1008 to Un G1011 is set toa value other than 0 and 1 The channel where the error has occurred fits in O CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Action e To perform disconnection detection using the input signal error detection extension function set the input range of the corresponding channel to 4 to 20mA Extended mode or 1 to 5V Extended mode e Not to perform disconnection detection using the input signal error detection extension function set Input signal error detection extension setting Un G27 Un G28 of the corresponding channel to the value other than Disconnection detecti
173. he value does not have the resolution and accuracy described in the performance specifications gt Page 21 Section 3 2 Use the value as a guide to the status of analog input at a system startup or other events 232 APPENDICES 58 CHO Analog input monitor unit Un G1711 Un G1713 Un G1715 Un G1717 Un G1719 Un G1721 Un G1723 Un G1725 QB The unit of the value in CHO Analog input monitor Un G1710 Un G1712 Un G1714 Un G1716 Un G1718 Un G1720 Un G1722 Un G1724 is stored Use this area for troubleshooting For details refer to the following e When digital output value cannot be read _ gt Page 187 Section 11 6 2 2 Unit Stored value x 10 2mA 0 x 102V 1 59 Latest error code address Un G1800 QH The buffer memory address of Error history No 1 Un G1810 to Un G1969 that has been storing the latest error code is stored 60 Error history No 0 Un G1810 to Un G1969 QH Sixteen errors that have occurred in the module are recorded at a maximum For details of the error log function refer to the following Error Log Function lt _ gt Page 133 Section 8 16 b15 to b8 b7 to bO Un G1810 Un G1811 Last two digits of the year Un G1812 Day Un G1813 Minute Un G1814 Day of the week Un G1815 to System area Un G1819 Item Storage contents Storage example First two digits of the year Last two digits of the year Month Day Stored in BCD code Hour Minute Second Day of th
174. hen an input signal error or a disconnection is detected the error is notified by Input signal error detection flag Un G49 Input signal error detection signal XC and the flashing ALM LED In addition alarm code 11 AD gets stored in Latest error code Un G19 The value of the alarm code to be stored varies depending on the condition upper limit lower limit or disconnection detection under which an error of the analog input value is detected The following shows the alarm code to be stored 1A 0 m Fixed The last digit indicates the channel where an input signal error has occurred The tenth digit indicates the detection condition by one of the following values 1 Lower limit detection 2 Upper limit detection 3 Disconnection detection For details on alarm codes refer to the following e Alarm code list lt gt Page 183 Section 11 5 3 Operation of the input signal error detection extension function The operation is the same as that of the input signal error detection function uonoun4 uorsua x3 uono9 2q 10114 jeus ndul g g For details refer to the following e Input signal error detection function lt gt Page 77 Section 8 7 4 Detection cycle This function is executed per sampling cycle 83 5 Clearing the input signal error detection As in the input signal error detection function turn on and off Error clear request YF after the analog input value returns within the setti
175. hipment settings ore Industrial shipment RW gain value L settings offset value D5H C Industrial shipment settings one ngusial shipment RW gain value H settings gain value D6H CH4 Industrial shipment settings OHY Industrial shipment RW offset value L settings offset value D7H CH4 Industrial shipment settings oon ngustrial shipment RW offset value H settings gain value D8H GHA Industrial shipment settings GHO Industrial shipment R W gain value L settings offset value D9H GEA Industrial shipment settings one ene ie shipment R W gain value H settings gain value Item enabled by turning on and off Operating condition setting request Y9 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Item enabled by 4 BS turning on and off Default Read Write ae L60ADVL8 L60ADIL8 Operating condition setting request Y9 18 DAH CH1 User range settings offset CH1 User range settings value L offset value 219 DBH CH1 User range settings offset aie User range settings value H gain value 220 DCH CH1 User range settings gain value CH2 User range settings L offset value 221 DDH CH1 User range settings gain value one User range settings H gain value 299 DEH CH2 User range settings offset CH3 User range settings value L offset value 223 DFH CH2 User range settings offset eee User range settings value H gain value 224 EOH CH2 User range settings gain value CH4 User range settings L offset value 225 E1H CH2 User range settings gain value GPA Use
176. ils on conversion speed setting refer to the following e Conversion Speed Switch Function gt Page 75 Section 8 5 For the LGOADVL8 and L60ADIL8 e Number of channels where A D conversion is enabled CH1 to CH7 seven channels in total e Conversion speed 1ms fixed Conversion cycle 1 ms channel x 7 channels 7 ms UOlOUN jqesiq jqeu4 UOISISAUOD C V Zg 69 2 Averaging processing Averaging processing is performed on the digital output values for each channel The values obtained in averaging processing are stored in the buffer memory area There are three processes in averaging processing as follows e Time average e Count average e Moving average a Time average A D conversion is performed for a set time and averaging processing is performed on the total value excluding the maximum and minimum values The values obtained in averaging processing are stored in the buffer memory area The processing count within the setting time varies depending on the number of channels where A D conversion is enabled Number of processing _ Setting time times Conversion speed x Number of channels where A D conversion is enabled For the L60AD4 the processing count for the following settings is calculated below Item Setting Number of channels where A D conversion is enabled 4 channels CH1 to CH4 Conversion speed 20us Set period of time 15ms 15 187 5 times Numbers after the decimal point
177. imit value Error detection x Time Analog input value Error Padci detection i nput signal error An error is detected nen the analog input value sequal to or detection upper _ _ _ e _ _ _ Upper limit greater than the input signal error detection upper limit value An limit value detection error is not detected when the analog input value is equal to or smaller than the input signal error detection lower limit value Input signal error detection lower limit value No error detection Time Disconnection Disconnection detection is performed For details refer to the following detection Disconnection detection _ gt Page 83 Section 8 8 1 a 82 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS a Disconnection detection By combining this detection method with the input range extension function simple disconnection detection can be performed When either of the following conditions is satisfied the function judges that a disconnection has occurred and Input signal error 1 is stored in the bit of Input signal error detection flag Un G49 corresponding to the channel number Input range Disconnection detection condition 4 to 20mA Extended mode Analog input value lt 2mA 1 to 5V Extended mode Analog input value lt 0 5V Analog input value 2mAord0 5V Error detection D The setting for CHO Input signal error detection setting value Un G142 to Un G149 is ignored 2 Notification of input signal error W
178. imit value and Scaling lower limit value Scaling function pees Scaling enable disable setting pees Scaling upper limit value cee Scaling lower limit value Sets for scaling on A D conversii O Enable 12000 z000 4 Seta value to Shifting amount to conversion value Shift function 5 Available to Product gt Information 130410000000000 4 or later Shitting amount fa conkersion Kaie Set shift function when A D c eee ee errr rere rere eee eee eee eee errr rrr rrr rere 97 uonoun4 HIUS 1 1 g 1 Digital output value 20000 Dee eee z 7 1 Digital output value 7 Scaling N Pai Upper limit value 20000 12000 a Lower limit value 02000 7 l e009 eee ee ee 2000 paaatas2s2sitee2csisace peer a 3 Scaling value ra se 2 Value after scaling digital operation uc value ra a Shift addition Pd rae Adds 2000 to the value OO gh after scaling ins N 2 Value after Lot scaling L i 3 Scaling value digital operation value Analog input voltage V Scaling value Input voltage V Digital output value saue eang digital a OJ AJOJN Point When the shift function is used with the digital clipping function and scaling function shift addition is executed on the value after digital clipping and scale conversion Therefore the range of the scaling value digital operation value is determined as 32768 to 32767 For a setting example of wh
179. in values of the source A D converter module to the CPU module s internal device and use G P OGSTOR to write to the destination A D converter module You can prevent the saved offset gain value data from getting deleted by doing one of the following before replacing the modules e Use latch settings for the internal device of the destination module e Save the data onto an SD memory card To write data use the SP FWRITE instruction To read data use the SP FREAD instruction e Store the saved data For use of dedicated instructions refer to the following e Dedicated Instructions lt gt Page 241 Appendix 5 b Saving and restoring by reading from and writing to the buffer memory Use the following buffer memory areas and User range write request YA Read the offset gain values from the source A D converter module and use the buffer memory again to write to the destination A D converter module Module Buffer memory e Pass data classification setting Un G200 L60AD4 e CH1 Industrial shipment settings offset value L Un G202 to CH4 User range settings gain value H Un G233 L60ADVL8 CH1 Industrial shipment settings offset value Un G202 to CH8 User L60ADIL8 range settings gain value Un G233 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS The procedure for using the buffer memory is described below 4 2 e To restore offset gain values onto a new replacement module Set Pass data classification setting Un G200 unnecessary for
180. inal and the external device GND Is the same external device GND used for all channels Point Action Check the faulty area by checking signal line visually or conductively Change the status of the CPU module to RUN Check if the offset gain setting is correct If the user range is selected use the factory default setting for the input range and check if the A D conversion is performed If the A D conversion is properly executed configure the offset gain setting again Check Setting range Un G20 If the input range setting is incorrect correct the switch setting Check A D conversion enable disable setting Un GO and set A D conversion enable 0 using a program or parameter setting Check if the digital output value is stored in the CHO Digital output value Un G11 to Un G14 after turning Operating condition setting request Y9 from OFF to ON then to OFF When the problem has been solved check the program again Make sure to connect the V and I terminals while inputting current as shown in the external wiring When selecting the time average processing set the values satisfy the following condition e Setting value 4 times x conversion speed x Number of channels where A D conversion is enabled If the condition above is not met digital output values remain 0 If the wiring is long a potential difference may occur between the AG terminal and the external device GND and A D conversion may not be pe
181. ing e Inthe case that CHO Level trigger condition setting Un G1056 to Un G1059 is set to Disable 0 when CHO Logging hold request Un G1008 to Un G1011 changes from OFF 0 to ON 1 the logging hold processing starts e Inthe case that CHO Level trigger condition setting Un G1056 to Un G1059 is set to other than Disable 0 when the trigger condition is satisfied after CHO Logging hold request Un G1008 to Un G1011 changes from OFF 0 to ON 1 the logging hold processing starts When the level trigger is enabled use Logging hold request Un G1008 to Un G1011 as an interlock to operate the level trigger If CHO Logging hold request Un G1008 to Un G1011 is turned to ON 1 gt OFF 1 the hold status stop is cleared and the logging restarts b Default value All channels are set to OFF 0 Point The hold status of logging can be checked by monitoring CHO Logging hold flag Un G1016 to Un G1019 32 CHO Logging hold flag Un G1016 to Un G1019 Za Hold stop status of logging can be checked with this flag For details on the logging function refer to the following e Logging Function lt gt Page 108 Section 8 14 Hold status of logging Stored value Off 0 On 1 e This flag turns to On 1 at the time of the transition from the status in which data are collected in CHO Logging data Un G5000 to Un G44999 to the stop status e When the logging restarts by turning CHO Logging hold request Un G1008 to U
182. ing Un G1040 to Available setting range of CHO Logging cycle setting value Un G1043 Un G1032 to Un G1035 us 0 80 to 32767 ms 1 1 to 32767 s 2 1 to 3600 The logging cycle must be an integral multiple of the conversion cycle If the set logging cycle is not an integral multiple of the conversion cycle the actual logging cycle becomes the integral multiple of the conversion cycle which is smaller than the set logging cycle The following table lists the conversion cycle of each A D conversion method Conversion method The conversion cycle Sampling processing Conversion speed x Number of channels where A D conversion is enabled Time set in Time Average k Count Average Moving Average Conversion _ Number of channels where Time average N inberof channels where speed A D conversion is enabled Conversion speed x ae A D conversion is enabled 1 The value after the decimal point is rounded off Number of times set in Time Average Count Average Moving Average x Conversion speed x Number of channels Count average ae g where A D conversion is enabled Moving average Conversion speed x Number of channels where A D conversion is enabled With the following settings the conversion cycle is 160us and the actual logging is performed every 6880us the integral multiple of 160us The values are stored in CH1 Logging cycle monitor value Un G1122 to Un G1124 as shown in the following table e A D conversion enabled channels CH1
183. ing cycle unit specification 1inms era fogging cycle ont 1 ms H Logging points after trigger Crus beeen Level trigger condition setting Trigger data GE 5 Set Logging points after trigger to the number of the data points collected for the time period from a hold trigger occurrence to logging stop Logging points after 10000 ene herre Level trigger condition setting 0 Disable 6 Seta condition to generate a hold trigger in Level trigger condition setting When Level trigger condition setting is set to 0 Disable skip the procedure 7 and 8 Level trigger condition 0 Disable Trigger data 0 Disable D Trigger data 1 Above Flow amount integration 2 Below function 3 Pass Through 7 Set the buffer memory address to be monitored using a level trigger to Trigger data Trigger data tee 8 Set Trigger setting value to a level where a level trigger operates 122 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 8 15 Flow Amount Integration Function This function converts analog values that are input to the A D converter module from a flow meter a value obtained by converting the instantaneous flow amount to a voltage value or current value into digital and integrates the digital values to calculate the flow amount in a certain period of time In this function integral processing is performed regarding the scaling value digital operation value as the instantaneous flow amount In the flow amount integration function the conversi
184. ing from inappropriate storage or handling carelessness or negligence by the user Failure caused by the user s hardware or software design 2 Failure caused by unapproved modifications etc to the product by the user 3 When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user s device Failure that could have been avoided if functions or structures judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user s device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards had been provided 4 Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts battery backlight fuse etc designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced 5 Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages and Failure caused by force majeure such as earthquakes lightning wind and water damage 6 Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi 7 Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user 2 Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production 1 Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven 7 years after production of the product is discontinued Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins etc 2 Product supply including repair parts is not available after production is discontinued 3 Overseas service Overseas repairs
185. ing method 199 3 Averaging process setting used to replace Q64AD Q68ADV Q68ADI Unco Ga Write the setting for averaging processing when using the sequence program for initial setting of the Q64AD Q68ADV or Q68ADI b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 bd b4 b3 b2 b1 bO Specifying the channels for averaging Specifying the time count processing 1 Time average 1 Averaging processing 0 Count average 0 Sampling processing b4 to b7 and b12 to b15 of the L60AD4 are fixed to 0 a Enabling the setting To enable the setting turn on and off Operating condition setting request Y9 after setting Averaging process setting Un G24 Un G25 to Sampling processing 0 Point When selecting the moving average it is necessary to write 0 to Un GQ9 and write the moving average to Averaging process setting Un G24 Un G25 b Default value All channels are set to sampling 0 as the default value 4 A D conversion completed flag Un G10 Q A D conversion status can be checked with this flag b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi bO ojo jo o o o o o fensjenzjenejensjenajensjenzjcn1 A S b4 to b15 of the L60AD4 and b8 to b15 of 0 A D converting or unused the L6QADVL8 and L60ADIL8 are fixed to 0 1 A D conversion completed a A D conversion completion When the first A D conversion is completed in the channel where the A D conversion is enabled the flag is turned to A D conversion
186. ing range of the input range setting differs depending on the model of the A D converter module Model name Setting range L60AD4 OH to 5H AH BH FH L60ADVL8 OH 2H to 5H BH FH L60ADIL8 OH 1H AH FH 264 APPENDICES Appendix 9 2 Operation of GX Configurator AD When setting the L6OAD4 parameter using GX Configurator AD the display method such as a setting screen differs from that of GX Works2 This section describes the screen display method of GX Configurator AD Point GX Configurator AD does not support the LEOADVL8 or L60ADIL8 To set the parameter of the LEOADVL8 or L6OADIL8 use GX Works2 Setting of contents added to the L60AD4 cannot be configured when the upper 5 digits of product information are 13041 or later Set by programming Other setting contents are the same as those of GX Worksz2 lt Page 53 CHAPTER 7 When using GX Configurator AD configure the settings on the following screens Screen name Application Initial setting This setting configures the settings such as A D conversion enable disable setting Auto refresh setting This setting transfers data in the buffer memory to specified devices This function enables the user to monitor test the buffer memory and I O signals and configure the Monitor test es operating condition setting and offset gain setting This function generates FB automatically from the intelligent function module parameter initial setting auto FB conversion k ref
187. ion completed flag Q W1001 CH1 Digital output value z W1002 CH2 Digital output value aj W1008 Input signal error detection flag S W1010 Latest error code W1018 Warning output flag Process alarm 2 W1028 CH3 Scaling value digital operation value S MO CH1 A D conversion completed flag si M1 CH2 A D conversion completed flag M2 CH3 A D conversion completed flag T M20 to M27 Warning output flag Process alarm a3 M50 to M53 Input signal error detection flag S Z 5 Y30 to Y3F Error code display BCD 4 digits QY10 Y30 to Y3F SB49 Data link status own station SWBO 0 Data link status each station station number 1 NO Nesting station number 1 M100 Flag for meeting the communication condition station number 1 167 5 Setting on master station 1 Create a project on GX Works2 Select QCPU Q mode for PLC Series and select Q10UDH for Type X Project gt New 2 Display the network parameter setting screen and configure the setting as follows kT Project windowc gt Parameter c gt Network Parameter c gt Ethernet CC IE MELSECNET 7 Set network configuration setting in CC IE Field configuration window Mole tote 2 RAT ISCHEF eser sito foe 0 168 CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING 3 Display the Network Configuration Setting screen and configure the setting as follows X Project windowc gt Parameter lt gt Network Parameter 2 gt Ethernet CC IE MELSECNET e gt button Network Parameter
188. ions of Operating condition setting request Y9 is correct If Operating condition setting request Y9 is on A D conversion does not start Therefore check that Operating condition setting completed flag X9 is off after turning on Operating condition setting request Y9 and turn off Operating condition setting request Y9 188 CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING c Check item 3 An analog value is not properly input from outside Check the following items Check item Action Is there any problem with wiring such as off or Check the faulty area by checking signal line visually or conductively disconnection of analog signal lines uy y ing signal line visually y If the wiring is long a potential difference may occur between the AG terminal and the external device GND and A D conversion may not be performed properly Connect the AG terminal and the external device GND to eliminate the potential difference Is there any potential difference between the AG terminal and the external device GND If the same external device GND is used for all channels noise occurs between channels and some errors may occur in A D converted values Connect the AG terminal and the external device GND to eliminate the errors Is the same external device GND used for all channels d Check item 4 An analog value is properly input from outside Check the following items in order No Check item Action Check Setting range Un G20 Un G2
189. is correct Is the CPU module in the STOP status Change the status of the CPU module to RUN Point The following are the points to check the read program e Program example for the A D converter module where the start I O number is set to X Y30 Point 1 Are X Y device numbers the ones assigned to the module X Y 30 to 3F in this example Point 2 Point 3 Is the intelligent function module device described To read a digital output value using the FROM instruction properly U3 G11 FROM H3 K11 D11 K1 Set a buffer memory address in a decimal Set a buffer memory address in a decimal The first two digits of the start I O number The first two digits of the start I O when it is expressed in three figures number when it is expressed in three Set 3 in this example figures Set 3 in this example b Check item 2 A D conversion is disabled Check the following items Check item Action Is A D conversion disable 1 set to A D conversion enable disable setting Un GO of the channel to input a value Check A D conversion enable disable setting Un GO and set A D conversion enable 0 using a program or parameter setting Check that the digital output value is stored in the CHO Digital output value Un G11 to Is Operating condition setting request Y9 Un G18 after turning on and off Operating condition setting request Y9 performed If a correct value is stored check the program whether the descript
190. is performed exceeding the range of digital output value the digital output value is fixed to the maximum or minimum Digital output value Input range setting 1 to 5V 192 8191 0 to 5V 10 to 10V 16384 16383 1 to 5V Extended mode 2192 9191 User range setting 8192 8191 3 This is the maximum resolution in user range setting Point Use the value within the practical analog input range and practical digital output range If a value is out of the range the resolution and accuracy may not fall within the range of performance specifications Do not use the value in the dotted line region in the graph of voltage input characteristic Do not input a value of 15V or more This may damage the elements 238 Digital output value APPENDICES 5 I O conversion characteristic of the L60ADIL8 Practical analog input range Practical analog input range eM 9191 JT a oS 9000 8191 t E ee 8000 8000 0 192 0 D T gt 5 jos i o w 2000 2192 2 By ee a Saas 8000 30 20 0 4 20 30 8192 E 30 20 10 O 4 10 20 22 30 A E LEE Lr Analog input current mA No Input range setting Offset value Digital output value Resolution 0 to 8000 3 4 to 20mA Extended mode e am 2000t09000 to 9000 2000nA 4 Set the offset value and gain value in the user range setting within the range satisfying the following conditions If the following conditions are not satisfied A D
191. isable Function Common Sets whether to enable or disable A D conversion for each channel By disabling A D conversion for the channels you are not using the conversion cycle can be reduced 1 Setting procedure Set A D conversion enable disable setting to 0 Enable TT Project window gt Intelligent Function Module gt module name gt Parameter Item CH1 E Basic setting Gets method of A D c ASB conversion enable disable setting 0 Enable 7 Averaging process setting ME Time Average Count 1 Disable 8 3 A D Conversion Method Common Sets whether to perform sampling processing or averaging processing for each channel 1 Sampling processing Analog input values are converted into digital at every sampling cycle and stored in the buffer memory area as digital output values Point The conversion cycle is calculated by Conversion speed x Number of channels where A D conversion is enabled Conversion can be enabled or disabled per channel By disabling A D conversion for the channels you are not using the conversion cycle can be reduced The following shows setting examples of the conversion cycle For the L60AD4 e Number of channels where A D conversion is enabled CH1 to CH3 three channels in total e Conversion speed 80us middle speed Conversion cycle 80 us channel x 3 channels 240 us For deta
192. it detection the one within the setting range 2 Lower limit detection 3 Disconnection detection This alarm code is stored when an input signal error is detected according to the setting of the input signal error detection extension function L60ADIL8 4 This alarm code can be cleared by setting a value within the setting range and performing either of the following operations e Turning on and off Error clear request YF e Turning on and off Operating condition setting request Y9 When Operating condition setting request Y9 is turned on and off A D conversion is reset and are resumed from the beginning Point For Switch 1 to 5 refer to the following e Intelligent function module switch setting _ gt Page 264 Appendix 9 2 S1 BPOD WIE GL 183 11 6 Troubleshooting 11 6 1 Troubleshooting using LEDs 1 When the RUN LED flashes or turns off a When flashing Set normal mode to the drive mode setting in the switch setting After that power off and on the module or reset the CPU module Offset gain setting mode is set to the drive mode setting in the switch setting The G P OFFGAN instruction has been executed and When using the A D converter module in normal mode Is the operation mode setting in the the mode has been switched to offset gain setting check if the program for the G P OFFGAN instruction offset gain setting mode mode has been mistakenly executed When using the A D con
193. ital clipping Function enable disable setting Sets method of A D conversion control 172 O Enable O Enable O Enable 1 Disable 0 Sampling Processing 2 Count Average 50 Times 3 Moving 4verage O Sampling Processing 5 Times 0 20us Sets for warnings on A D conversion 1 Disable O Enable 20000 1 Disable 1 Disable 18000 3000 0 Sets for input signals on A D conversion O Enable 1 Disable 1 Disable 1 Disable Set input signal error detection enhancing when A D conversion is executed Input signal error detection enhancing function will be detected by the Input signal error detection setting value 10 0 O Disable O Disable O Disable O Disable Sets for scaling on A D conversion 1 Disable 1 Disable O Enable CO 22000 Ca 1 Disable Set shift function when A D conversion is executed Set digital clipping function when 4 D conversion is executed 1 Disable 1 Disable O Enable 1 Disable CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING 6 Display the Auto Refresh setting screen for the A D converter module L60AD4 and configure the setting as follows X Project window Intelligent Function Module lt gt L60AD4 c gt Auto Refresh e OO00 L60AD4 Auto_Refresh Display Filter Display All a transfer to ee pape EN u ie aaiye 0 eee Been A E Fransfer fo PLE AID conversion completed Flag w1000 es Digital output value w1001 w002 see Maximum value see Minimum value Scaling value Digital operati
194. l A D conversion processing mode default value Drive Mode Setting Set Offset gain Setting to configure the offset gain eis 9 e Offset gain setting mode setting with the user range being selected a Intelligent function module switch setting Switch 1 to 5 The items described above also can be set in Switch 1 to 5 of the intelligent function module switch setting of PLC parameter The following are the switches to set each item e Switch 1 and 2 Input range setting e Switch 4 Drive mode setting For the setting procedure refer to the following e Intelligent function module switch setting lt gt Page 264 Appendix 9 1 2 Though the example of procedure is for GX Developer same settings and values can be used for GX Works2 as well Buimes YAMS ZZ 99 7 3 Parameter Setting Set the parameters of each channel By setting the parameters the setting by programming is unnecessary 1 Setting procedure Open the Parameter dialog box 1 Start Parameter KO Project window gt Intelligent Function Module gt module name gt Parameter s 0010 L 60AD4 Parameter Display Filter Display All z Item Basic setting ate method of b D conversion control AD conversion i Jone D Enable O Enable 0 Enable Pull down list type as E i Averaging process setting O Enable D Sampling Processing 0 Sampling Processing O Sampling Processing Time Average Count 5 5 Average Moving Average
195. l Data Logging Function 26 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 4 1O Signal List The following shows the list of the A D converter module I O signals For the details of I O signals refer to the followings e Details of I O signals lt gt Page 192 Appendix 1 Input signal Output signal x x Z x X4 Use prohibited Use prohibited x x xi x x9 Operating condition setting request XD Maximum value minimum value reset request Point The I O number X Y described above shows the case that the start I O number of the A D converter module is set to 0 Do not use the Use prohibited signals shown above because the system uses them If users use turn on the signals the functions of the A D converter module cannot be guaranteed s 7 euBIS O I v The I O signals are common in the A D converter modules 2 3 5 List of Buffer Memory Addresses The following shows the list of the A D converter module buffer memory For details of buffer memory addresses refer to the following e Details of buffer memory addresses lt Page 199 Appendix 2 Point Do not write data to the system areas and read only areas in the buffer memory Writing data to these areas may lead the module to malfunction 1 Un GO to Un G1799 Address Address decimal hexadecimal L60AD4 L60ADVL8 L60ADIL8 0 A D conversion enable disable setting OOOOH 1 CH1 Time Average Count Average Moving Average Default
196. l X8 is also turned to ON b Clearing Warning output flag Process alarm Un G50 When the digital output value returns within the setting range the Warning output flag Process alarm Un G50 is automatically cleared Turning on and off Operating condition setting request Y9 also clears Input signal error detection flag Un G49 but A D conversion is reset and resumed from the beginning 18 Scaling enable disable setting Un G53 QH Set whether the scaling is enabled or disabled for each channel For details on the scaling function refer to the following e Scaling Function lt gt Page 88 Section 8 10 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 E A Jowlowrioeloasioulowlonzton S a E b4 to b15 of the L60AD4 and b8 to b15 of 0 Enable the L6QADVL8 and L60ADIL8 are fixed to 0 1 Disable a Enabling the setting sessaippy Aiowayy yng Jo sjieleg zZ xipueddy Turn on and off Operating condition setting request Y9 to enable the setting b Default value All channels are set to disable 1 as the default value 209 19 CHO Scaling value digital operation value Un G54 to Un G61 Q The scaling value digital operation value which is obtained by the following functions is stored as signed 16 bit binary Module Functions L60AD4 Digital clipping function scaling function shift function or difference conversion function L60ADVL8 L60ADIL8 Scaling function b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8
197. l operation values are stored Module Function L60AD4 Digital clipping function scaling function shift function or difference conversion function L6O0ADVL8 L60ADIL8 Scaling function CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 8 7 Input Signal Error Detection Function Common This function outputs an alarm when the analog input value exceeds a preset range By using the input signal error detection extension function the upper limit detection lower limit detection or disconnection detection can be set For details on the input signal error detection extension function refer to the following Input signal error detection extension function gt Page 82 Section 8 8 Detected Not detected Included Analog input value Input signal error detection upper limit value CH1 Analog input value gt Normal input value a Input signal error detection lower limit value Error P s ON Time CH1 Input signal error detection flag Un G49 b0 OFF 0 ON N Input signal error detection signal XC OFF 3 o Q D CH1 A D conversion q m completed flag Un G10 b0 lj 3 O o D Error clear request YF OFF i O 5 epa n TI 1 Notification of input signal error z If the analog input value is above the input signal error detection upper limit value or below the input signal error O detection lower limit value the error is notified by Input signal error detection flag Un G49 Input sig
198. le of digital output value or scaling value digital operation value When the conversion cycle is set to 80us and the A D conversion is performed for CH1 to CH3 with the sampling processing The actual logging cycle is an integral multiple of 240us 80us x 3 with the value set in CHO Logging cycle setting value Un G1032 to Un G1035 and CHO Logging cycle unit setting Un G1040 to Un G1043 as the upper limit value c Enabling the setting Turn on and off Operating condition setting request Y9 to enable the setting d Default value e For CHO Logging cycle setting value Un G1032 to Un G1035 all channels are set to 4 e For CHO Logging cycle unit setting Un G1040 to Un G1043 all channels are set to ms 1 220 APPENDICES 35 CHO Logging points after trigger Un G1048 to Un G1051 EUZ When the logging function is used set the data points recorded from hold trigger occurs until logging holds For details on the logging function refer to the following e Logging function Page 108 Section 8 14 a Setting range e Setting range is 1 to 10000 e Inthe channel where a value out of the above range is set an error occurs Then the error code 2040 is stored in Latest error code Un G19 Error flag XF turns on and logging cannot be performed e When CHO Logging enable disable setting Un G1000 to Un G1003 is set to Disable 1 the setting for CHO Logging points after trigger Un G1048 to Un G1051 is ignored
199. lear flag Un G1380 to Un G1383 turns No request 0 gt Controlled by the A D converter module Performed by the program Integration cycle I L L l l No request 0 No request 0 l Clear request 1 l I I I I I 7 L l CHL Integrated flow amount clear flag No clear request 0 L Cleared 1 Y No clear request 0 Un G1380 to Un G1383 Point CHO Integrated flow amount Un G1332 to Un G1339 is also cleared to zero in the following case e Set CHO Flow amount integration enable disable setting Un G1300 to Un G1303 to Enable 0 and turn on and off Operating condition setting request Y9 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 7 Change of the integrated flow amount The following timing chart shows the timings that the integrated flow amount changes CHU Flow amount integration pi g Pisa Enabled 0 enable disable setting Un G1300 to Un G1303 ON Operating condition setting OFF OFF request Y9 ON ON Operating condition setting W completed flag X9 CHO Flow amount integration temporary stop request No request 0 No request 0 N temporary stop flag Un G1356 to Un G1359 No temporary stop request 0 IX Temporarily stopped 1 X No temporary stop request 0 Un G1364 to Un G1367 CHO Integrated flow amount clear request No request 0 Clear request 1 fh No request 0 Un G1372 to Un G1375 CHU Integrated flow amount No clear reques
200. led 1 Detection method As well as the input signal error detection function an error can be detected with input signal error detection upper limit value and input signal error detection lower limit value For details on the setting procedure of input signal error detection upper limit value and input signal error detection lower limit value refer to the following e Input signal error detection function gt Page 77 Section 8 7 The detection method can be selected from the following list Detection method Detection condition Analog input value Error detection Input signal error An error is detected when the analog input value is equal to or detection upper ee I gs se e Lower upper limit greater than the input signal error detection upper limit value or is limit value detection equal to or smaller than the input signal error detection lower limit value Input signal error detection lower limit value Error detection D Time Analog input value No error detection Input signal error An error is detected when the analog input value is equal to or detection upper yet es 2 ee ae Lower limit smaller than the input signal error detection lower limit value An limit value detection error is not detected when the analog input value is equal to or greater than the input signal error detection upper limit value Input signal error detection lower St eh ee Se te Je l
201. lowing e Offset Gain Setting gt Page 60 Section 7 5 4 Maximum value minimum value reset request YDH Turn on and off Maximum value minimum value reset request YD to reset CH1 Maximum value Un G30 to CH8 Minimum value Un G45 For the timing of turning on and off the signal refer to the following e Maximum value minimum value reset completed flag XD lt Page 196 Appendix 1 1 7 197 5 Error clear request Y PEAB To clear Error flag XF Input signal error detection signal XC and Latest error code Un G19 turn on and off Error clear request YF For the timing of turning on and off the signal refer to the following e Input signal error detection signal XC gt Page 195 Appendix 1 1 6 Error flag XF lt gt Page 196 Appendix 1 1 9 198 APPENDICES Appendix 2 Details of Buffer Memory Addresses The following describes the details of buffer memory addresses of the A D converter module 1 A D conversion enable disable setting Unco ie Set if the A D conversion is enabled or disabled for each channel b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 o To Lo To Lo oo 0 renr ay b4 to b15 of the L60AD4 and b8 to b15 of 0 A D conversion enable the L6OADVL8 and L60ADIL8 are fixed to 0 1 A D conversion disable a Enabling the setting Turn on and off Operating condition setting request Y9 to enable the setting b Default value All channels ar
202. ls before using this product 1 Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range If any faults or defects hereinafter Failure found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company However if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the customer s discretion Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re commissioning maintenance or testing on site that involves replacement of the failed module Gratis Warranty Term The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi the maximum distribution period shall be six 6 months and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen 18 months The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs Gratis Warranty Range 1 The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state usage methods and usage environment etc which follow the conditions and precautions etc given in the instruction manual user s manual and caution labels on the product 2 Even within the gratis warranty term repairs shall be charged for in the following cases 1 Failure occurr
203. ls or Os are set simultaneously in both Offset gain setting mode Offset specification Un G22 and Offset gain setting mode Gain specification Un G23 The settings in CH1 Process alarm lower lower limit value Un G86 to CH8 Process alarm upper upper limit value Un G117 are invalid The channel with the invalid setting fits in O A value fits in A indicates that the alarm status is as follows 2 Process alarm lower lower limit value gt Process alarm lower upper limit value 3 Process alarm lower upper limit value gt Process alarm upper lower limit value 4 Process alarm upper lower limit value gt Process alarm upper upper limit value The value set in CHO Input signal error detection setting value Un G142 to Un G149 is outside the range of 0 to 250 The channel where the error has occurred fits in O The value set in Input signal error detection extension setting Un G27 Un G28 is outside the range of 0 to 4 The channel where the error has occurred fits in O Action e When the conversion speed is 20us set the averaging time to a value in the range of 2 to 1500ms e When the conversion speed is 80us or 1ms set the averaging time to a value in the range of 2 to 5000ms e Set the averaging time to a value equal to or more than 4 x Number of used channels x Conversion speed ms e Set the averaging time to a value within the range of 4 to 5000ms e Set the averaging time to a value equal to or more than
204. lue H ee System 245 1 Configure the setting of Pass data classification setting S 2 only When the data is written to the area to be set by system offset gain setting value is not correctly read out b L60ADVL8 L60ADIL8 o dame OOOO T o o dA The status on instruction completion is stored DE S 1 Completion status 0 normal completion System Other than 0 error completion error code EN A os fama S o oo 246 APPENDICES 3 Functions e This instruction reads the industrial shipment setting and the offset gain setting value of the A D converter module in the user range to the CPU module e There are two interlock signals of the G P OGLOAD instruction a completion device and a completion status indication device 1 a Completion device The device turns ON at the END processing for the scan where the G P OGLOAD instruction is completed and turns OFF at the next END processing b Completion status indication device This device turns on and off depending on the status of the G P OGLOAD instruction completion e Normal completion the device is kept to be OFF e Error completion the device turns ON at the END processing for the scan where the G P OGLOAD instruction is completed and turns OFF at the next END processing END END END END processing processing processing processing Program rn on rrr Execution completion of the 7 ON G P OGLOAD instruction G P OGLOAD OFF instruction
205. lue Un G217 Address decimal Description Reference value CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8 hexadecimal Industrial shipment settings offset 202 204 206 208 210 212 214 216 pia T E onan AR Approx 8000H Industrial shipment setti i 203 205 207 209 21 213 2145 217 e i ee er a Approx AFBDH e Reference table for CH1 User range settings offset value Un G218 to CH4 User range settings gain value Un G233 Offset gain value Reference value hexadecimal OmA Approx 8000H 4mA Approx 898CH 20mA Approx AFBDH 4 This is the value that is stored in user range offset value at the time of shipping 2 This is the value that is stored in user range gain value at the time of shipping CHAPTER 9 DISPLAY UNIT CHAPTER 9 DISPLAY UNIT This chapter describes the functions of the display unit that can be used with the A D converter module For instruction on operating the display unit or for details on the functions and menu configuration refer to the following MELSEC L CPU Module User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals 9 1 Display Unit The display unit is an LCD to be attached to the CPU module By attaching it to the CPU module the status of the system can be checked and the system settings can be changed without the software package In addition if a problem occurs the cause of the problem can be identified by displaying the error information For details on how to check and clear an error fro
206. lue at the start is output to the difference conversion reference value The value acquired by subtracting the difference conversion reference value from the scaling value digital operation value is stored in CHO Scaling value digital operation value Un G54 to Un G57 After the value is stored CHO Difference conversion status flag Un G190 to Un G193 changes to Converting difference 1 b Stopping difference conversion 1 Change CHO Difference conversion trigger Un G172 to Un G175 from Trigger request 1 to No request 0 The fall of Trigger request 1 No request 0 is detected as a trigger When the trigger is detected the difference conversion stops and CHO Difference conversion status flag Un G190 to Un G193 changes to Not converted 0 After that the scaling value digital operation value is stored as it is in CHO Scaling value digital operation value Un G54 to Un G57 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 3 Points for the use of the difference conversion function a Operation of when an input signal error occurs While an input signal error is occurring even if Difference conversion trigger Un G172 to Un G175 changes No request 0 Trigger request 1 the difference conversion does not start After the analog input value returns within the setting range change Difference conversion trigger Un G172 to Un G175 from No request 0 to Trigger request 1 again If an input signal error occurs in the status of Trigger req
207. lution is also applicable with the use of the module scaling function 1 Input signals and assignment of buffer memory Refer to the following table to change the program Note the precautions for averaging process specification of channel isolated A D converter modules Q64AD GH Q68AD G Q66AD DG The following shows the applicable module list a When a program is applied to the L60AD4 Averaging process Module ba aes specification Description of application Sampling processing Applicable without making any change Q64AD Averaging process Note the following Count average e Apply the sequence program with the conversion speed setting Setting Un G9 of 80us Sampling processing Applicable without making any change Q68ADV Q68ADI Averaging process Note the following Count average e Apply the sequence program with the conversion speed setting Setting Un G9 of 80us Partial changes in the sequence program are required Set the data in the buffer memory address Un G9Q in the applying Sampling processing sequence program to the buffer memory address Un G24 of the 7 Webaging procoss applied sequence program Q62AD DGH Count average ee Q64AD GH ioving average If the first order delay filter Peg in the puter memory address i Un G9 set the other averaging processing to the buffer memory First order delay filter Setting Un G9 address ees Note the following e Set 0 to the buffer memory address Un GQ of the
208. m applied from a channel isolated A D converter module Q68AD G or Q66AD DG does not have the scaling function program When applying the sequence program having the scaling function from a channel isolated A D converter module Q68AD G or Q66AD DG set the scaling upper and lower limit value corresponding to the setting in the sequence program applied from The following shows the scaling function setting when applying the sequence program from a Q series A D converter module Resolution 1 4000 1 12000 1 16000 1 32000 Resolution of applied module Digital output value Digital output value Digital output value Digital output value 4000 to 12000 to 16000 to 0 to 4000 5 0 to 12000 ae 0 to 16000 Rae 0 to 32000 32000 to 32000 cally upper 4000 4000 42000 42000 16000 16000 32000 32000 limit value Sea ng toe 4000 12000 16000 32000 limit value Q64AD Q64AD Q64AD Q68ADV Q68ADV Q68ADV Q64AD GH 64AD GH Target module Q68ADI Q68ADI Q68ADI Q62AD DGH 16 bit Q68AD G Q68AD G Q68AD G 16 bit Q66AD DG Q66AD DG Q66AD DG Applying the sequence program of the Q64AD GH or Q62AD DGH with 1 64000 resolution by using the scaling function is not available Change the digital output value ranges in the program e The resolution of the Q64ADH and L60AD4 is the same Using the scaling function is not necessary 262 APPENDICES Appendix O When Using GX Developer or GX Configurator AD Appendix 9 describes the operating procedure
209. m the display unit refer to the following e Checking and Clearing Errors L gt Page 155 Section 9 4 9 2 Menu Transition 1 Organization The diagram below shows how the MOD MON TEST and MOD SETTINGS menus are organized a L60AD4 CPU MON TEST CPU SETTINGS MOD MON TEST SPECIFY I O No T BUF MEM MON TES L MODULE LIST MOD SETTINGS SPECIFY I O No INIT CHANGE CH A D CONVERSION CZ AVE PROCESSING MODULE LIST CH3 TIME COUNT MOV USER MESSAGE CH4 PROCESS ALARM PRALARM UPR UPR OPTIONS PRALARM UPR LWR PRALARM LWR UPR PRALARM LWR LWR INPUT SIG ERR INPUT SIG VALUE SCALING SCALE UP LIMIT SCALE LOW LIMIT SHIFT DIGITALCLIP INPUT SIG ENH COMMON CONVERSION SPD 145 yun Aeldsiq 16 b LEOADVL8 L60ADIL8 CPU MON TEST CPU SETTINGS MOD MON TEST SPEGIFY I O No T BUF MEM MON TES L MODULE LIST MOD SETTINGS SPECIFY I O No INIT CHANGE CH A D CONVERSION CH2 AVE PROCESSING MODULE LIST CHS TIME COUNT MOV USER MESSAGE CH4 PROCESS ALARM CH5 PRALARM UPR UPR OPTIONS CH6 PRALARM UPR LWR CH7 PRALARM LWR UPR CH8 PRALARM LWR LWR INPUT SIG ERR INPUT SIG VALUE SCALING SCALE UP LIMIT SCALE LOW LIMIT INPUT SIG ENH 2 Screen transitions up to the initial setting change screen The diagram below shows how the screens transition to the initial setting change screen 146
210. memory areas Address 0 Data to be collected oes Address 1 Address 2 Address 3 Address 4 overwritten with the subsequent data in order E After the storage number has reached the maximum 10000 points the stored data is Address 5 from the Address 0 area T a Address 9998 gt Address 9999 Channel Storage area for logging data CH1 CH1 Logging data Un G5000 to Un G14999 CH2 CH2 Logging data Un G15000 to Un G24999 CH3 CH3 Logging data Un G25000 to Un G34999 CH4 CH4 Logging data Un G35000 to Un G44999 If logging has been performed even once all data in CHO Logging data Un G5000 to Un G44999 are cleared to 0 when Operating condition setting request Y9 is turned off and on 3 Logging data setting Select one of the following data types with CHO Logging data setting Un G1024 to Un G1027 e Digital output value 0 e Scaling value digital operation value 1 110 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 4 Logging cycle a Logging cycle setting Set the logging cycle with CHO Logging cycle setting value Un G1032 to Un G1035 and CHO Logging cycle unit setting Un G1040 to Un G1043 CHU Logging cycle setting value Un G1032 to Un G1035 Set a time interval at which data are collected CHO Logging cycle unit setting Un G1040 to Un G1043 Set the unit of the time interval at which data are collected Setting value of CHO Logging cycle unit sett
211. mit value 2 4mA e Input range lower limit value Offset value 4 0mA e Gain value 20 0mA Input signal error 4 0 2 4 i SS x 1000 detection setting value 500 40 100 10 0 Therefore set the input signal error detection setting value to 100 10 0 In this case the input signal error detection value behaves as follows With the 100 10 setting an error is detected when the value is not only 2 4mA but also 21 6mA Input signal error detection a ti upper limit value ________ L22222 ea Ne eee 2 21 6mA A 1 6mA 10 0 of 16mA Pea So SSS ee al 16mA Gain value Offset value Input range lt lower limit value 4mA Offset value 1 6mA 10 0 of 16mA Input signal error detection lower limit value detection 80 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 7 Setting procedure To enable the input signal error detection function the input signal error detection extension function should be disabled When the input signal error detection extension function is enabled the setting of input signal error detection function is ignored 1 Set A D conversion enable disable setting to 0 Enable kT Project window gt Intelligent Function Module gt gt module name gt Parameter Item E CHI E Basic setting Sets method of A D c _ AP conversion enable disable setting oes ad cee Averaging proces
212. n G1011 from On 1 to Off 0 CHO Logging hold flag Un G1016 to Un G1019 is turned to Off 0 218 APPENDICES 33 CHO Logging data setting Un G1024 to Un G1027 ZW When using the logging function set the digital output value or the scaling value digital operation value as the target value for collecting For details on the logging function refer to the following e Logging function gt Page 108 Section 8 14 Target of logging Setting value Digital output value 0 Scaling value digital operation value 1 e Inthe channel where a value other than the above setting values is set an error occurs Then the error code 2030 is stored in Latest error code Un G19 Error flag XF turns on and the logging cannot be performed e When CHO Logging enable disable setting Un G1000 to Un G1003 is set to Disable 1 the setting for CHO Logging data setting Un G1024 to Un G1027 is ignored a Enabling the setting Turn on and off Operating condition setting request Y9 to enable the setting b Default value All channels are set to Scaling value digital operation value 1 s ss lppy Aiowayy yng Jo sjieleg zZ xipueddy 219 34 CHL Logging cycle setting value Un G1032 to Un G1035 CHO Logging cycle unit setting Un G1040 to Un G1043 EZB Set the cycle of storing the logging data CHO Logging cycle setting value Un G1032 to Un G1035 Set a time interval at which data are collected CHO Loggin
213. n G1048 to Un G1051 Set one of the following values in CHO Level trigger condition setting Un G1056 to Un G1059 e Disable 0 e Above 1 e Below 2 e Pass through 3 Set a value within the range of 0 to 4999 in CHO Trigger data Un G1064 to Un G1067 Set OFF 0 or ON 1 in CHO Logging hold request Un G1008 to Un G1011 181 Error code decimal 20800 L60AD4 210011 L60AD4 2110 L60AD4 212001 L60AD4 213001 L60AD4 214011 L60AD4 21501 L60AD4 2160 182 L60AD4 Target Description and cause of error module CHO Logging enable disable setting Un G1000 to Un G1003 is set to Enable 0 and besides the input signal error detection function or the input signal error detection extension function is enabled The channel where the error has occurred fits in O CHO Flow amount integration enable disable setting Un G1300 to Un G1303 is set to a value other than 0 and 1 The channel where the error has occurred fits in O Conversion speed is set to 20us or 80us and besides CHO Flow amount integration enable disable setting Un G1300 to Un G1303 is set to Enable 0 The channel where the error has occurred fits in O CHO Integration cycle setting Un G1308 to Un G1311 is set toa value outside the range of 1 to 5000 The channel where the error has occurred fits in O The set value in CHO Integration cycle setting Un G1308 to Un G1311 is shorter than the update cycle of CHO Scaling value
214. n G1319 Set this cycle according to the range of the flow meter connected to the A D converter module The following table lists the values of T for CHO Flow amount time unit setting Un G1316 to Un G1319 Range of flow meter Setting value of CHO Flow amount time unit setting Un G1316 to Un G1319 T ms i a A E n 1000 Ex When the range of the flow meter is cm s set s 0 This is unit scaling of the integrated flow amount Set this valule in CHO Unit scaling setting Un G1324 to Un G1327 This is used when the value of instantaneous flow amount x DT T is 0 to 1 The following table lists the values of unit scaling for CHO Unit scaling setting Un G1324 to Un G1327 Setting value of CHO Unit scaling setting Un G1324 to Un G1327 Unit scaling ee ee t scali 10 Unit scaling E Ex When the value of DT T is 0 0083 DT 500 ms T 60000 ms Set x 1000 3 or x 10000 4 Previous amount This is a value stored in CHO Integrated flow amount Un G1332 to Un G1339 before integral processing Point lf the instantaneous flow amount is less than 0 integral processing is not performed The value acquired by rounding off the part after the decimal point is stored in CHO Integrated flow amount Un G1332 to Un G1339 Inside the A D converter module calculation is performed including the value after the decimal point in integral processing The value within the range of 0 to 2147483647 is stored in CHO Integrated flow amount U
215. n G1332 to Un G1339 If the value exceeds the upper limit 2147483647 the excessive part is stored in CHO Integrated flow amount Un G1332 to Un G1339 When the previous amount is 2147483000 and the present amount Instantaneous flow amount x Unit scaling x DT T is 5000 2147483000 5000 2147483647 4353 is stored in CHO Integrated flow amount Un G1332 to Un G1339 124 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 2 Concept of integration cycle Set the integration cycle according to the analog output cycle of the flow meter connected to the A D converter module In addition set this cycle as an integral multiple of the updating cycle of CHO Scaling value digital operation value Un G54 to Un G57 The updating cycle of CHO Scaling value digital operation value Un G54 to Un G57 equals to the conversion cycle of the specified A D conversion method The following table lists the conversion cycle of each A D conversion method A D conversion i Conversion cycle method Sampling 4 a i Conversion speed x Number of channels where A D conversion is enabled ms processing 2 Count average Time set in Time Average Count Average Moving Average Conversion Number of channels where ae crs Number of channels where A D conversion is enabled speed A D conversion is enabled Time average Number of times set in Time Average Count Average Moving Average x Conversion speed x Number of channels where A D processing conversion is enabled ms Moving
216. n G24 Description of application Applicable without making any change Note the following e The conversion speed is 1ms Applicable without making any change If the first order delay filter is set in the buffer memory address Un GQ set the other averaging processing to the buffer memory address Un G24 Note the following e The conversion speed is 1ms e Set 0 to the buffer memory address Un GQ of the module Applicable without making any change If the first order delay filter is set in the buffer memory address Un GQ set the other averaging processing to the buffer memory address Un G24 Note the following e The conversion speed is 1ms e Set 0 to the buffer memory address Un GQ of the module For details on the averaging process specification of the L series A D converter module refer to the following Detail of buffer memory gt Page 199 Appendix 2 For details on averaging process specification of Q series A D converter modules refer to the user s manual for each module 261 SOLOS O UM S8DUSJOLIG Q X pu ddy weiBoig 29Uu nb s sales BHulAjddy 40 suonneosaig g xipueddy 2 Resolution Even if the resolutions differ between the L60AD4 L60ADVL8 or LGOADIL8 and a Q series A D converter module the scaling function enables the program to be applied from the Q series A D converter module to any of them Note that it is the prior condition of the sequence progra
217. n Operating condition setting request Y9 A 4 The data is not saved when the setting value is written to Mode switching setting Un G158 Un G159 When restoring the offset gain setting value in user range set the data saved in this area to the same area in the A D converter module where the data is restored For the setting procedure of offset gain values or saving and restoring offset gain values refer to the following e Offset gain setting lt gt Page 60 Section 7 5 e Saving and restoring offset gain values lt gt Page 138 Section 8 19 APPENDICES 30 CHO Logging enable disable setting Un G1000 to Un G1003 ZUR Set whether the logging is enabled or disabled For details on the logging function refer to the following e Logging function Page 108 Section 8 14 Logging enable disable setting Setting value Enable 0 Disable 1 e When a value other than the above setting range is set an error occurs and the error code 2000 is stored in Latest error code Un G19 The logging function is not started e When Conversion speed setting Un G26 is set to 20us 0 and CHO Logging enable disable setting Un G1000 to Un G1003 is set to Enable 0 an error occurs and the error code 2000 is stored in Latest error code Un G19 The logging function is not started e When Input signal error detection setting Un G47 is set to Enable 0 and CHO Logging enable disable setting Un G1000 to Un G1003 is set to E
218. n between the values changes from Stored value of a buffer memory area to be monitored gt Trigger setting value to Stored value of a buffer memory area to be monitored lt Trigger setting value Pass through 3 e Set a value where a hold trigger is generated to CHO Trigger setting value Un G1082 to Un G1085 Item Setting range CHO Trigger setting value Un G1082 to Un G1085 32768 to 32767 Point The following figure shows the relation between setting items to be configured for the initial setting of a level trigger CHU Level trigger condition setting Un G1056 to Un G1059 Set the condition gt Above 1 lt Below 2 gt 0r lt Pass through 3 The condition is CHO Trigger setting value established Un G1082 to Un G1085 r 777755 gt CHU Trigger data Un G1064 to Un G1067 A trigger is generated Set the address of a buffer memory Set a reference value for area to be monitored generating a trigger CHO Scaling value 32768 to 32767 digital operation value Un G54 to Un G57 CHU Digital output value Un G11 to Un G14 Level data Un G1072 to Un G1081 For example to generate a hold trigger when a value in CH1 Digital output value becomes greater than 10000 configure settings as follows e CH1 Level trigger condition setting Un G1056 Above 1 e CH1 Trigger data Un G1064 11 e CH1 Trigger setting value Un G1082 10000 CHAPT
219. nable 0 an error occurs and the error code 2080 is stored in Latest error code Un G19 The logging function is not started e When Input signal error detection extension setting Un G27 is set to other than Disable 0 and CHO Logging enable disable setting Un G1000 to Un G1003 is set to Enable 0 an error occurs and the error code 2080 is stored in Latest error code Un G19 The logging function is not started a Enabling the setting Turn on and off Operating condition setting request Y9 to enable the setting Enabling the setting starts the logging b Default value All channels are set to Disable 1 s ss lppy Aiowayy yng Jo sjieleg Z xipueddy 217 31 CHO Logging hold request Un G1008 to Un G1011 Ey Use Logging hold request Un G1008 to Un G1011 as a trigger to hold stop the logging at any timing during the logging For details on the logging function refer to the following e Logging function lt gt Page 108 Section 8 14 Logging hold request Setting value Off 0 On 1 e Inthe channel where a value other than the above setting values is set an error occurs Then the error code 2070 is stored in Latest error code Un G19 and Error flag XF turns on However the logging continues e When CHO Logging enable disable setting Un G1000 to Un G1003 is set to Disable 1 the setting for CHO Logging hold request Un G1008 to Un G1011 is ignored a Operation of the logging hold process
220. nal error detection signal XC and the flashing ALM LED In addition alarm code 1100 gets stored in Latest error code Un G19 The alarm code that is stored is shown below 1100 Fixed l Input signal error channel number For details on alarm codes refer to the following e Alarm code list lt gt Page 183 Section 11 5 TT 78 2 3 4 5 Operation of the input signal error detection function The digital output value on the channel on which the error was detected is held at the value just before the error was detected During A D conversion or unused 0 is stored in the bit of A D conversion completed flag Un G10 corresponding to the channel and A D conversion completed flag XE turns off Once the analog input value returns within the setting range A D conversion resumes regardless of the reset of Input signal error detection flag Un G49 and Input signal error detection signal XC After the first update of the digital output value A D conversion completion 1 is stored in the bit of A D conversion completed flag Un G10 corresponding to the channel The ALM LED remains flashing Detection cycle This function is executed per sampling cycle Clearing the input signal error detection After the analog input value returns within the setting range turn on and off Error clear request YF When the input signal error is cleared the A D converter module results in the following state
221. nd V buttons to select ON Confirm with the button 156 CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING This chapter describes the procedure for programming and the basic program of the A D converter module 10 1 Procedure for Programming Create a program to execute A D conversion according to the following procedure Start creating a program Do the setting by using a program Initial setting N Use the configuration function 2 YES A D conversion enable disable program Averaging processing setting program Conversion speed setting program 4 Scaling function program Switch setting parameter setting and auto refresh Shift function program 1 2 setting Error reset program Digital clipping function program 2 Difference conversion function program 2 Logging function program 2 Flow amount integration function program 2 Input signal error detection function program Warning output function process alarm program 1 A program that is created according to the function to be used 2 Creating this program is only necessary for the L60AD4 Program to read a digital output value scaling value digital operation value warning output flag process alarm and input signal error detection flag Buiwwues6oig JO BINDS90 q OL 3 A program that is added according to the control target Create a program if needed eee ee Be ee
222. ng range When the disconnection detection is set after the analog input value exceeds 2 0mA or 0 5V turn on and off Error clear request YF For details refer to the following e Input signal error detection function lt gt Page 77 Section 8 7 6 Specifying the input signal error detection upper and lower limit values As well as the input signal error detection function set them based on the input signal error detection setting value For details refer to the following e Input signal error detection function lt gt Page 77 Section 8 7 7 Setting procedure 1 Set A D conversion enable disable setting to 0 Enable KO Project window gt Intelligent Function Module gt module name gt Parameter CHL Tkern L ets method of A D c 5 Basic setting A D conversion P enable disable setting Dienen bal cee Averaging process setting HI Time Average Count 1 Disable 2 Set the detection method in Input signal error detection extension setting Input signal error E on oper an crea n 1 Upper and Lower Detection Scaling function O Disable H Scaling enable disable setting PENSEE E Scaling upper limit value Lower Detection a alina E d Upper Detection el eae lle Lae 4 Disconnection Detection 3 Seta value for Input signal error detection setting value Input signal error detection Sets for input signals on A D conver
223. nge shown in the following performance specifications e I O conversion characteristic of A D conversion __ gt Page 235 Appendix 3 Offset gain setting can be configured for multiple channels at the same time however the setting must be configured for offset and gain channels separately When configuring the setting for offset and gain channels at the same time an error occurs The error code 500 is stored in Latest error code Un G19 Error flag XF turns on and the ERR LED turns on When turning ON User range write request YA the integrity between the offset values and gain values is checked When error occurs even in one channel offset gain value is not written to the module Check the value in Latest error code Un G19 and perform the following procedures to reconfigure the offset gain setting from the beginning e Error code list lt _ gt Page 179 Section 11 4 2 Program example a Device 1 O number of the A D converter module is X Y30 to 3F MO M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 DO D1 The following shows the devices used in the program example Device Functions Channel selection Offset setting Gain setting Channel change command Write command to module of offset gain setting value Mode switching Channel specified storage device Storage device for the setting value of the dedicated instruction G P OFFGAN CHAPTER 7 VARIOUS SETTINGS b Switching the mode by the dedicated instruction G P OFFGAN
224. nies or Public service purposes and or any other cases in which establishment of a special quality assurance system is required by the Purchaser or End User e Aircraft or Aerospace Medical applications Train equipment transport equipment such as Elevator and Escalator Incineration and Fuel devices Vehicles Manned transportation Equipment for Recreation and Amusement and Safety devices handling of Nuclear or Hazardous Materials or Chemicals Mining and Drilling and or other applications where there is a significant risk of injury to the public or property Notwithstanding the above restrictions Mitsubishi may in its sole discretion authorize use of the PRODUCT in one or more of the Prohibited Applications provided that the usage of the PRODUCT is limited only for the specific applications agreed to by Mitsubishi and provided further that no special quality assurance or fail safe redundant or other safety features which exceed the general specifications of the PRODUCTs are required For details please contact the Mitsubishi representative in your region INTRODUCTION Thank you for purchasing the Mitsubishi MELSEC L series programmable controllers This manual describes the functions and programming of an analog digital converter module hereafter abbreviated as A D converter module Before using this product please read this manual and the relevant manuals carefully and develop familiarity with the functions and performance of the
225. noise taken Take measures against noise such as using a shielded cable for connection 190 CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 7 Checking the Status of the A D Converter Module by the System Monitor To check the LED status or the setting status of the intelligent function module switch setting select the H W information of the A D converter module on the system monitor of GX Worksz2 1 Hardware LED information LED status is displayed No LED name Status 1 RUN LED 0000H Indicates the LED off 0001H Indicates the LED on 2 ERR LED Alternating indication between 0000H and 0001H Indicates the LED flashing GX Works2 displays the communication status with the A D converter module so that the 3 ALM LED displaying intervals of 0000H and 0001H are not always even 2 Hardware switch information The setting status of the intelligent function module switch setting is displayed For details on the setting status refer to the following e Intelligent function module switch setting lt gt Page 264 Appendix 9 1 2 Item Intelligent function module switch RANGE Switch Ee MODE MODE Switch4 SS H W Information EJ Monitor Status Module Product Model Name L 0AD4 n 111110000000000 4 Display Format fe HEX DEC ARR REnce Hiv St Information JoyUo Wa skS ay Aq jNpoN J9 J AUOD A V 24 JO SNIS y HulyoayD 2 44 191 APPENDICES Appendix 1 Details of I O Signals
226. ns then increment or decrement the value at the cursor using the A and W buttons respectively Confirm with the button Table of input items e L60AD4 Input range Input item Conversion speed Input upper limit Input lower limit TIME 80us 1ms 5000 2 COUNT 20us 80us 1ms 62500 4 MOV 20us 80us 1ms 1000 2 e L60ADVL8 L60ADIL8 Input range Input item Input upper limit Input lower limit TIME 5000 4 COUNT 62500 4 MOV 1000 2 Point A value between 0 and 62500 can be input for any type of averaging processing on the display unit However if the value is outside the setting range of the selected averaging processing an error occurs on the A D converter module 150 CHAPTER 9 DISPLAY UNIT 5 Warning output setting Select DISABLE or ENABLE in the PROCESS ALARM screen TRONE REAR Seen 7 Usethe A and W buttons to select DISABLE or ENABLE and then confirm with the button If you selected ENABLE follow the rest of the procedure 4 PARLARNE PROPR SEBEN 2 Move the cursor using the lt and p gt buttons then increment or decrement the value at the cursor using the A and W buttons respectively Confirm with the button 4 ARSON OPRIE porgan 3 Move the cursor using the 4 and gt buttons then increment or decrement the value at the cursor using the A and W buttons respectively Confirm with the button 4 ERANARM BAUR UPR geran 4 Move the cursor using the 4 and p buttons then inc
227. nt device station Station No 1 This program reads digital output values enabled for A D conversion at CH1 to CH3 in the A D converter module CH1 executes sampling processing CH2 executes averaging processing every 50 times and CH3 executes A D conversion every 10 moving averages If an error occurs in the module an error code is displayed in BCD notation 166 CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING 3 Description of initial settings Description Item p A D conversion enable disable setting Enable Disable Averaging process setting Sampling processing Sampling processing Time A tA Movi Average Conversion speed setting 20us Process alarm upper upper limit value ee Ce 0 Process alarm upper lower limit value a a Ce 0 Process alarm lower upper limit value o a Ce 0 Input signal error detection setting value 10 0 5 0 Input signal error detection extension Pe Disable Disable Disable Disable setting oo p po p Scaling lower limit value o o o 0 Digital clipping function enable disable l 3 Disable Disable Enable Disable setting 4 When using the L6OADVL8 or L60ADIL8 configure the same setting for CH5 to CH8 2 When using the L6OADVL8 or L6O0ADIL8 set values within the digital output range of the input range used 3 The L60ADVL8 or L60ADIL8 does not supprt this item Scaling enable disable setting Scaling upper limit value 4 Devices used by a user S oO g Device Description z W1000 A D convers
228. o do not use any use prohibited signals as an output signal from the programmable controller CPU to the intelligent function module Doing so may cause malfunction of the programmable controller system Design Precautions NCAUTION Do not install the control lines or communication cables together with the main circuit lines or power cables Keep a distance of 100mm or more between them Failure to do so may result in malfunction due to noise Installation Precautions WARNING Shut off the external power supply all phases used in the system before mounting or removing a module Failure to do so may result in electric shock or cause the module to fail or malfunction Installation Precautions CAUTION Use the programmable controller in an environment that meets the general specifications in the Safety Guidelines provided with the CPU module or head module Failure to do so may result in electric shock fire malfunction or damage to or deterioration of the product Jo interconnect modules engage the respective connectors and securely lock the module joint levers until they click Incorrect interconnection may cause malfunction failure or drop of the module Tighten the screws within the specified torque range Undertightening can cause drop of the screw short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can damage the screw and or module resulting in drop short circuit or malfunction Do not dire
229. o Un G175 _No request 0 dig Scaling value Scaling a aue ET oT on ez ore on as ne CHU Difference conversion reference value o X o X10000 10000 X 10000 Y 10000 X10000 X 10000 Y10000 Y10000 Un G180 to Un G183 CHL Scaling value let operation value ea Xow o NEO NEO N A Xa50 O YT Un G54 to Un G57 CHU Difference conversion status flag Not converted 0 Converting difference 1 Un G190 to Un G193 Maximum value minimum value Maximum value minimum value f before starting difference conversion after starting difference conversion CHU Maximum value Ep a E H a 1 Uni690 UniG32 10001 X10001X10001X 10001X 10001 X10001 X 2100X 3250 X 2280X 2250 Un G34 Un G36 l CHL Minimum value l uncer Unies aa Xow Xo Xo Xo arona Un G35 Un G37 Ue es ee ee ee ee ee re ere Se ere a Maximum value minimum N OFF value reset request YD Maximum value minimum value OFF reset completed flag XD CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS d Operation of when the averaging processing is set If the difference conversion starts while the averaging processing is set the following operations are performed at the completion of the first averaging processing e The scaling value digital operation value is determined as the difference conversion reference value e CHO Difference conversion status flag Un G190 to Un G193 changes to Converting difference 1 Point The difference conversion function can be started at any timing
230. ode 3600 error code 2100 Setting error of CHO Flow amount integration enable disable setting Un G1300 to Un G1303 error code 2100 Setting error of CHO Integration cycle setting Un G1308 to Un G1311 error code 2110 error code 2120 Setting error of CHO Flow amount time unit setting Un G1316 to Un G1319 error code 2130 Setting error of CHO Unit scaling setting Un G1324 to Un G1327 error code 2140 For details on the error contents refer to the following Error code list _ Page 179 Section 11 4 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 8 16 Error Log Function Common Stores a history of errors and alarms that occurred in the A D converter module to the buffer memory Un G1810 to Un G1969 A total of 16 errors and alarms can be stored 1 Process of the error log function The error code and the time of error occurrence are stored in the buffer memory address starting from error history No 1 start address Un G1810 and sequentially thereafter Error occurrence time is stored as follows Ex For error history No 1 b15 to b8 b7 to bO Un G1810 Un G181 Un G1812 Un G1813 Un G1814 Un G1815 to System area Un G1819 Item Storage contents Storage example First two digits of the year Last 2011H two digits of the year j Month Day Stored in BCD code 329H Hour Minute 1035H 40H Second Day ofthe week Tuesday 2 2H 4 Those are values when an error occurs at 10 35 40 on Tuesday March 29
231. oints can be logged for each channel This function converts analog values that are input to the A D converter module from a flow meter a value obtained by converting Flow amount integration function the instantaneous flow amount to a voltage value or current value into digital and integrates the digital values to calculate the flow amount in a certain period of time This function stores errors and alarms that occurred in the A D Error log function converter module in the buffer memory Sixteen errors and alarms in total can be stored This function collects errors and alarms that occurred in the A D Module error collection function converter module and stores to the CPU module Clearing the error from the system monitor at error occurrence is Error clear function passible Saving and restoring offset gain eee 7 g The offset gain value of the user range can be saved or restored o fo Offset gain setting This function compensates for errors in digital output values o fo Reference Page 99 Section 8 12 Page 103 Section 8 13 Page 108 Section 8 14 Page 123 Section 8 15 Page 133 Section 8 16 Page 136 Section 8 17 Page 137 Section 8 18 Page 138 Section 8 19 Page 60 Section 7 5 4 To use the logging function with the LEOADVL8 or L60ADIL8 use the data logging function of the CPU module For the data logging function of the CPU module refer to the following T QnUDVCPU LCPU User s Manua
232. on 254 APPENDICES 3 Checking on the system monitor The function version and serial number can be checked on the Product Information List window Diagnostics gt System Monitor c gt Product Information List button Sort 1 by Installation Order ea u tcp 130420000000000 A 130511131380006 A gt ou manio L oup ant 0000 ssoencoomnoto A ssostsiocsmnos A o o inteli LOADS 16Point 0010 160410000000000 A 160410000000000 A o kome ge a Displaying product number The serial number product number on the rating plate is displayed in Production Number Thus the serial number product number can be checked without checking the module Point The serial number displayed on the product information list of a programming tool may differ from that on the rating plate and on the front part of the module The serial number on the rating plate and front part of the module indicates the management information of the product The serial number displayed on the product information list of a programming tool indicates the function information of the product The function information of the product is updated when a new function is added UOISI9 UOIOUN 4 pue JBQUINN euas Huryosyuy 9 xiIpueddy 255 Appendix 7 Addition and Change of Functions Appendix 7 1 Addition of functions The following table lists functions added to the L6OAD4 and GX Works2 and product information of th
233. on n oaaao aaan 83 Offset value an nananana aana 235 E Offset gain setting n n naana 60 Offset gain setting mode flag XA 194 Error clear function 00 0 eee eee 137 Offset gain setting mode Gain specification Un G23 Error clear request YF 0008 WOO arene ETA aE E ine a echt ts ig 203 Erortlag XF a sid nce tie arb e a E a e 196 Offset gain setting mode Offset specification Un G22 Error history No 1 to No 16 Un G1810 to Un G1969 fk ee ee 203 Sh eee ed emer E E odode Sabah wea et aes 233 Operating condition setting completed flag X9 193 Error log TUNCUION f 4 sais eu iach Soda ee ea iia al 133 Operating condition setting request Y9 197 External wiring ct ace a dod ik Gt aba eraeeiad acs 51 P F Parameter setting n n aaa 56 Flow amount integration function 123 Pass data classification setting Un G200 215 G R Gain value eset ae esis Ge aaa 235 Range reference tables 00 143 H S Hardware LED information 191 Saving and restoring offset gain values 138 Hardware switch information 191 Scaling enable disable setting Un G53 209 Scaling function 2 0 0 0 0 eee eee 88 l Scaling values digital operation values 68 pa Setting range Un G20 Un G21 202 VO assignment 0 cece cece neces 263 Shift function eee eee eee 94 Input range
234. on 4 Set a value within the range of 32000 to 32000 in CH1 Scaling lower limit value Un G62 to CH8 Scaling upper limit value Un G77 Set the values in CH1 Scaling lower limit value Un G62 to CH8 Scaling upper limit value Un G77 so that they meet the following condition Scaling upper limit value gt Scaling lower limit value Disable the scaling function of the channel where a user range setting is used Set Enable 0 or Disable 1 in CHO Logging enable disable setting Un G1000 to Un G1003 To use the logging function set the conversion speed to 80us or 1ms Set a value within the setting range in one or both of CHO Logging cycle setting value Un G1032 to Un G1035 or and CHO Logging cycle unit setting Un G1040 to Un G1043 For the setting method of the logging cycle refer to the following e Logging function Page 108 Section 8 14 Set CHO Logging cycle setting value Un G1032 to Un G1035 and CHO Logging cycle unit setting Un G1040 to Un G1043 so that the logging cycle is equal to or longer than the update cycle of the logged value For the setting method of the logging cycle refer to the following Logging function gt Page 108 Section 8 14 S1 SPOD JOA Y4 Set Digital output value 0 or Scaling value digital operation value 1 in CHO Logging data setting Un G1024 to Un G1027 Set a value within the range of 1 to 10000 in CHO Logging points after trigger U
235. on MELSEC L CC Link IE Field Network Head Module User s Manual UONISOg uogeesuj pue JUSWUOJIAUZ uogejesuj p9 45 6 2 Terminal Block 1 Precautions Tighten the terminal block screws within the following specified torque range Screw type Tightening torque range Terminal screw M3 screw 0 42 to 0 58N m Terminal block mounting screw M3 5 screw 0 66 to 0 89N m The table below shows applicable solderless terminals connected to the terminal block When wiring use applicable wires and an appropriate tightening torque Use UL approved solderless terminals and for processing use a tool recommended by their manufacturer Also sleeved solderless terminals cannot be used Solderless terminal Wire Model Tightening torque Type R1 25 3 0 42 to 0 58N m AWG 22 to AWG 18 Stranded 2 Signal names of the terminal block The following shows signal names of the terminal block Temperature rating Copper 75 C or more a L60AD4 Terminal block Signal name L60AD4 RUN ERR CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 gt 0 e _ _ _ _ _ _ lt 46 CHAPTER 6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING b L60ADVL8 6 2 Terminal Block Si s FsysySs se Fs ys yFs ys FS sys se 5 5 ee li AR kee e itl o E olo a E SE 2 a p O lt N LO Ko 0 N oe xs LO Ko 0 ae aE TE a L L L L L L L L L L L aE O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
236. on setting request Y9 CHAPTER 4 PROCEDURES BEFORE STARTING THE OPERATION CHAPTER 4 PROCEDURES BEFORE STARTING THE OPERATION This chapter describes the procedures before starting the operation Connecting a module Connect the A D converter module in any desired configuration Wiring Perform wiring of external devices to the A D For the connection of the module refer to the converter module following Page 43 Section 5 1 For the wiring refer to the following lt gt Page 51 Section 6 4 For the offset gain setting refer to the following L Page 60 Section 7 5 Is user range necessary Offset gain setting To use user range set the offset gain values Programming and debugging Creates and checks a program 41 Memo 42 CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION This chapter describes the overall configuration number of connectable modules and compatible software version of the A D converter module 5 1 Overall System Configuration The following shows a system configuration example for using the A D converter module 1 When connected to a CPU module Display unit optional I O module or intelligent function CPU module A D converter module module END cover oS g AT L ATT SN ATT en m sr arna rna raS AONAN AAS KAO Fass ae a8 ra ra ae eae ra a a 2 When connected to a head module I O module or intelligent fun
237. on value Warning output flag Process alarm Input signal error detection Flag w1008 Latest error code w1010 Latest address of error history Difference conversion reference value Available to Product Information 130410000000000 4 or later Difference conversion status flag Available to Product Information 130410000000000 4 or later Logging hold Flag W108 Transfers buffer memory data to the specified device 7 Write the set parameter to the head module and reset the head module or turn off and then on the programmable controller power supply TW Online lt gt Write to PLC or Power OFF gt ON jNpoW pe H 0 P9 JOSUUOND SI MNMponN JOWSAUND C V USUMA E04 173 7 Program example The following shows a program example The program can be written to the CPU module of the master station SB49 SWOBO 0 MC NO M100 NO M100 Reads digital output values 4 X20 x1000 X100E Y11009 42000 ite ay 1m MOV W1000 K1M0 Reads A D conversion completed flag L d MO l mov wi001 D11 Reads CH1 Digital output value M1 My wi002 D12 Reads CH2 Digital output value M2 Reads CH3 Scaling value MOV W1028 D13 digital operation value Process alarm occurrence status and processing at warning occurrence M400 LLL W1018 K2M20 Reads the warning output flag bland Process alarm Hr i eee CH2 process alarm upper limit value Hr eee ea CH2 process alarm lower limit
238. on speed can be set in 1ms Flow meter Control valve Liquid Measures instantaneous flow amount of liquid and outputs the analog value Integrates instantaneous flow amount Analog input value Time Integrated flow amount ad Integration cycle uoljOUN uonesbeju JUNOWY MO 4 G8 123 1 Concept of integral processing With this function integral processing is performed using the following formula Integrated flow amount Instantaneous flow amount x x Unit scaling Previous amount Item Description Integrated flow This is a result of the integral processing The integrated flow amount is stored in CHO Integrated flow amount Un G1332 to Un G1339 amount in the range of 0 to 2147483647 Instantaneous flow This is an instantaneous flow amount value output in analog from the flow meter In this function the value stored in CHO Scaling value amount digital operation value Un G54 to Un G57 as the instantaneous flow amount This is an integration cycle ms set in CHO Integration cycle setting Un G1308 to Un G1311 Set this cycle according to the output DT cycle of the flow meter connected to the A D converter module Ex When the flow meter outputs instantaneous flow amount in analog at intervals of 500ms set 500 This is a conversion value to convert the time unit of instantaneous flow amount to ms Set this value in CHO Flow amount time unit setting Un G1316 to U
239. onnect the shielded wire for each channel to the shield terminal and ground the FG terminal In addition ground the FG terminal of the power supply module 51 52 2 L60ADVL8 3 Shield 4 4 For the wire use the shielded twisted pair cable 2 This indicates the input resistances of the L6QADVL8 3 In either of the following cases connect the AG terminal and the GND of the external device e When the potential difference is found between the AG terminal and the GND of the external device e When the GNDs of the external device which are connected to each channel are common For details refer to gt Page 189 Section 11 6 2 2 c If the AG terminal is connected to the GND of the external device some errors may be observed on the I O conversion characteristic When some errors are observed on the I O conversion characteristic adjust the I O conversion characteristic with the offset gain setting 4 Always ground the shielded wire for each channel and FG terminal In addition ground the FG terminal of the power supply module L60ADIL8 4 2 3 4 For the wire use the shielded twisted pair cable This indicates the input resistances of the L6OADIL8 In either of the following cases connect the AG terminal and the GND of the external device e When the potential difference is found between the AG terminal and the GND of the external device e When the GNDs of the external device which are connected to
240. ons of GX Works2 which are common to Simple projects and Structured projects Operating methods of GX Developer such as programming printing monitoring and debugging CONTENTS SAFE PRE O07 21 1 NS sre eee cee Eee Be A Pam en E egg A eee aN ene ore 1 CONDIMONS OF USE FORME ROD City restore sce a cee a eae E es eeeeel aren 4 SARE DISTRO IN ee eaters E S Pern ete epee tee are a cee tare A oe Perea eee gee et 5 COMPLIANCE WITH EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES 0 0 000 cee eee 6 REVEVANDMANVA LES rearrested sear A ee meee tooo ey na miners i Areca Aa i WMANWAINPAG ECORGAINIZ A ICIN ek se E re ameter cra A AOE A gota Were cence ea ee sear A crete ee 11 EUG 6s Fs Sas ene ae es env ra Ua E ly ee ory er ren ka gE eg ra eee tee ae A ee 15 AC ISIN Goal Saree E E ot atom E E E wy svar E anas Acs eaten ae eae Neneh Oe siete eer ne A 15 CHAPTER 1 A D CONVERTER MODULE 16 Usd SPROOUCATION ena tad ota Sete che baad Bosna detache a at ees eet ne i ae ee ee ee bee oe 16 ke FOUC eee Rene Ce eR ee Oe Oe CN ee ee ee eee oe eer eee 17 CHAPTER 2 PART NAMES 18 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 20 3 1 General SHeCINCAllIONS reeg e eete heehee eg Eider E O EES oeeseted ben 20 3 2 Performance Specifications 0 0 0 ee ee eens 21 3 2 1 Number of parameter Settings cs 24d 28 on dleaale Gal wed bee ed on dn ee we wie ate tw dee 24 O20 FUNCIONES y 2c ua eE a a eek pee a eee hae end 25 OA WOSM LS a rrea E O ae Sena ee Oe ee A ee EN OE S
241. onversion 1 cycle cycle The data when a trigger is generated is oe not stored in a buffer memory area A fy a ee ss a ee Trigger setting value A trigger is generated Time a Checking on logging stop Check that CHO Logging hold flag Un G1016 to Un G1019 is On 1 121 uonoun4 BuIA p19 8 14 4 Initial setting for the logging function The following are the initial setting procedure to use the logging function 1 Setting procedure 1 Set A D conversion enable disable setting to 0 Enable X Project window gt Intelligent Function Module gt module name gt Parameter O o otm H k Sets method of A D Basic setting O AD conversion O Enable EEE enable disable seting i a Averaging process setting 1 Disable Time Average Count 2 Set Logging enable disable setting to 0 Enable fogging enable disable 0 Enable Doo o Logging cycle setting value 3 Setthe target data in Logging data setting 0 Enable 1 Scaling Value Digital Operation Value H Logging enable disable setting fogging data setting bese Logging cycle setting value ee Logging cycle unit specification Select a unit of Logging cycle setting value in Logging cycle unit specification and set the O Digital Qurput Value 4 cycle of storing logging data to Logging cycle setting value dogging cycle setting 1000 MS mma herre Logg
242. onversion completed flag Digital output value Maximum value Minimum value Scaling value Digital operation value Warning output flag Process alarm Input signal error detection Flag Latest error code Latest address of error history Transfers buffer memory data to the specified device Point Available devices are X Y M L B T C ST D W R and ZR When a bit device X Y M L or B is used set the number that is divisible by 16 points example X10 Y120 M16 Data in the buffer memory are stored in 16 points of devices from the set device No Example When X10 is set the data are stored in X10 to X1F YSayoy NY 7 Z 59 1 95 Offset Gain Setting When using the user range configure the offset gain setting with the following operations When using factory default settings the offset gain is not required The offset gain setting can be configured from the following two types of operations e Setting from Offset Gain Setting of GX Works2 gt Page 60 Section 7 5 1 Setting from a program lt Page 63 Section 7 5 2 Configure the offset gain setting in accordance with the actual use situation 7 5 1 Setting from GX Works2 Offset Gain Setting 1 Setting procedure Open the Offset Gain Setting dialog box KO Tool gt Intelligent Function Module Tool gt Analog Module c gt Offset gain Setting 1 Select the module to configure the offset gain Module Selection O
243. or code 2140 is stored in Latest error code Un G19 Error flag XF turns on and the flow amount integration function is not enabled a Default value All channels are set to x 1 0 229 sessaippy Aiowayy yng Jo sjieleg Z xipueddy 50 CHO Integrated flow amount Un G1332 to Un G1339 Ze This is the area for storing the result of the integral processing performed by the flow amount integration function The integrated flow amount is stored with 32 bit signed binary For details on the flow amount integration function refer to the following e Flow Amount Integration Function K Page 123 Section 8 15 CH1 Integrated flow amount H Un G1333 CH1 Integrated flow amount L Un G1332 b15 bO b15 bO SS FSS SO y Data section Data section Sign bit 0 Positive fixed to 0 a Storage range The value is stored within the range of 0 to 2147483647 51 CHO Integration cycle monitor value Un G1348 to Un G1351 QZB This is the area for storing the integration cycle which is calculated from the update cycle of CHO Scaling value digital operation value Un G54 to Un G57 For details on the flow amount integration function refer to the following e Flow amount integration function lt gt Page 123 Section 8 15 a Storage range When CHO Flow amount integration enable disable setting Un G1300 to Un G1303 is Enable 0 the value is stored within the range of 1 to 5000 When it is Disable 1
244. ory items that are enabled refer to the following e List of Buffer Memory Addresses lt gt Page 28 Section 3 5 2 User range write request YA QH a Offset gain setting mode Turn on and off User range write request YA to register the adjusted offset gain setting values in the A D converter module The data is written to the flash memory at the timing when this signal is turned off and on For the timing of turning on and off the signal refer to the following e Offset gain setting mode flag XA gt Page 194 Appendix 1 1 4 For the offset gain setting refer to the following e Offset Gain Setting lt gt Page 60 Section 7 5 b Normal mode Turn on and off User range write request YA to restore the user range setting For the timing of turning on and off the signal refer to the following e Offset gain setting mode flag XA gt Page 194 Appendix 1 1 4 For user range setting restoration refer to the following e Saving and Restoring Offset Gain Values lt gt Page 138 Section 8 19 3 Channel change request YB Gaia Turn on and off Channel change request YB in the offset gain mode to change a channel to perform the jeuBis indino Z xipusddy sjeuBls O I 40 silejeq xipueddy offset gain setting For the timing of turning on and off the signal refer to the following e Channel change completed flag XB Page 194 Appendix 1 1 5 For the offset gain setting refer to the fol
245. otection against electric shock For wiring methods refer to the MELSEC L CPU Module User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection Startup and Maintenance Precautions WARNING Do not touch any terminal while power is on Doing so will cause electric shock or malfunction Shut off the external power supply all phases used in the system before cleaning the module or retightening the terminal block screws Failure to do so may result in electric shock Startup and Maintenance Precautions CAUTION Do not disassemble or modify the module Doing so may cause failure malfunction injury or a fire Shut off the external power supply all phases used in the system before mounting or removing a module Failure to do so may cause the module to fail or malfunction Tighten the terminal block screws within the specified torque range Undertightening can cause drop of the component or wire short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can damage the screw and or module resulting in drop short circuit or malfunction After the first use of the product module display unit and terminal block do not connect disconnect the product more than 50 times in accordance with IEC 61131 2 Exceeding the limit may cause malfunction Before handling the module touch a conducting object such as a grounded metal to discharge the Static electricity from the human body Failure to do so may cause the module to fail or
246. ow Time count moving average setting screen Process alarm setting screen Process alarm upper upper limit value screen Process alarm upper lower limit value screen Process alarm lower upper limit value screen Process alarm lower lower limit value screen Input signal error setting screen Input signal setting value screen Scaling setting screen Scaling upper limit value screen Scaling lower limit value screen Input signal error detection extension setting screen CHAPTER 9 DISPLAY UNIT 9 3 List of Setting Value Change Screens The following is a list of setting value change screens 1 L60AD4 a Displayed in English Name Screen Input limits Setting item Screen display format Upperlimit Lower limit A D conversion enable disable setting A D CONVERSION Selection oo Average processing setting AVE PROCESSING Selection ooo a Ti A IC tA Movi ene ount Average Moving TIME COUNT MOV 62500 0 Process alarm upper upper limit value 32768 Process alarm upper lower limit value 32768 Process alarm lower upper limit value 32768 Process alarm lower lower limit value 32768 Input signal error detection function INPUTSIGERR si Selection fo Input signal error detection setting value 0 Shifting amount to conversion value 32768 Input signal detecti hanci tti input signal eror detection entenana setina au s1 Enn swa Conversion speed CONVERSION SPD 2 L60ADVL8 L60ADIL8
247. pendix 7 Addition and Change of Functions 0 0 0 ee eee 256 Abpendix 7 1 Addition of functions coveonci cet darecekd beter cu etd eee badete eee EEA 256 Appendix 7 2 Change of functions 3 24 22 0002 kee cde Sek bee Se dh ie oe eek eee e s 256 Appendix 8 Differences with Q SerieS 0 0 0 0 cc eee teens 259 Appendix 8 1 Precautions for Applying Q Series Sequence Program 000000 u ee 260 Appendix 9 When Using GX Developer or GX Configurator AD 0 0 00 cee eee 263 Appendix 9 1 Operation of GX Developer 0 0 00 eens 263 Appendix 9 2 Operation of GX Configurator AD 0 0 0 0 es 265 Appendix 10 External Dimensions 0 0 0000 cc ee eee eens 268 INDEX 269 INSTRUCTION INDEX 271 REVISION See aa a a eer e Sees een eae Ss asl te crises eee re one oe Sie are cans 212 WARKANUY 2224eu2 tenente igo naera a ieee ewe behets eace eae esis ea 2 3 TRADEMARKS ae eee we a Rane eee ee eee a ee oe 274 10 MANUAL PAGE ORGANIZATION In this manual pages are organized and the symbols are used as shown below The following illustration is for explanation purpose only and should not be referred to as an actual documentation is used for screen names and items The chapter of the current page is shown 1 shows operating procedures T shows mouse operations peo is used for items in the menu bar and the project window Assigning the IO address
248. pper limit value NSN Upper lower N limit value Do Warning cleared CH1 Digital output value Warning issued DA 5 Warning cleared Lower upper vA Warning cleared limit value CH2 Digital output value Lower lower limit value ON Time CH1 Process alarm upper limit value OFF Un G50 b0 ON CH1 Process alarm lower limit value i OFF Un G50 b1 ON CH2 Process alarm upper limit value N OFF Un G50 b2 Warning output signal X8 wey SS 201d uonouny nd no PuiueM 6 g 85 1 Operation performed when a warning is output 2 3 4 86 When the digital output value falls within a warning output range equal to or greater than the process alarm upper upper limit value or equal to or smaller than the process alarm lower lower limit value a warning is notified by the following operations e Alarm ON 1 is stored in Warning output flag Process alarm Un G50 e Warning output signal X8 turns on e The ALM LED turns on e The alarm code 10A 0 is stored in Latest error code Un G19 The alarm code that is stored is shown below 10A 0 Fixed Process alarm channel number 0 Process alarm upper limit 1 Process alarm lower limit The A D conversion in the channels where a warning is output continues Operations performed after a warning is output After the alarm is output once the digital output value is smaller than the process alarm upper lowe
249. r Z ENABLE and then confirm with the button 10 Input signal error detection extension setting Select a detection method in the INPUT SIG ENH screen 1 Use the A and buttons to select DISABLE or ENABLE from the following detection methods and then confirm with the button e DISABLE e UPR LWR e LWR e UPR e DISCONNECT INPUT SIG ENH screen Point When INPUT SIG ENH is set to other than DISABLE setting INPUT SIG ERR to ENABLE is not necessary The setting of INPUT SIG ERR will be ignored 11 Conversion speed setting In the CONVERSION SPD screen specify the conversion speed of the A D conversion processing CONVERSION SPD screen 1 Use the A and buttons to select the conversion speed and then confirm with the button 154 CHAPTER 9 DISPLAY UNIT 9 4 The errors that occurred in the A D converter module can be checked from the display unit In addition you can also Checking and Clearing Errors clear an error during its occurrence 1 Checking the error You can check the error that occurred in the A D converter module by specifying Latest error code Un G19 from buffer memory monitor test For details on the error codes or alarm codes refer to the following e Error Code List _ gt Page 179 Section 11 4 e Alarm Code List gt Page 183 Section 11 5 When an error occurs in the A D converter ee with a start I O number of 10
250. r limit value or greater than the process alarm lower upper limit value Normal 0 is stored in the bit position corresponding to the channel number for Warning output flag Process alarm Un G50 Once all channels are within the setting range Warning output signal X8 and the ALM LED turn off However the alarm code 10A 0 stored in Latest error code Un G19 is not cleared To clear the alarm code 1041 turn on and off Error clear request YF Warning detection cycle When time average is specified the function is executed per set time for averaging When count average is specified the function is executed per set count for averaging When another A D conversion method is specified the function is executed per sampling cycle Warning detection target When any of the following functions is used the warning output function monitors CHO Scaling value digital operation value Un G54 to Un G57 for warning output For CH1 Process alarm lower lower limit value Un G86 through CH8 Process alarm upper upper limit value Un G117 set values considering the setting contents of the following functions Module Function L60AD4 Digital clipping function scaling function shift function or difference conversion function L60ADVL8 L60ADIL8 Scaling function CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 5 Setting procedure 1 Set A D conversion enable disable setting to 0 Enable kT Project window gt Intelligent Function Module gt gt mod
251. r of intelligent function module Write the set parameter to the CPU module and reset the CPU module or then off and then on the programmable controller power supply TZ Online lt gt Write to PLC or Power OFF ON d Program example Read digital output values X40 X30 X3E Y39 U peeks 1 c 1 MOV G10 K1MO0 Reads A D conversion completed flag bee d MO c MOV D1 D11 Reads CH1 Digital output value M1 lM D2 D12 Reads CH2 Digital output value Ha Reads CH3 Scaling val ______________________fmov D28 D13 eads caling value Process alarm occurrence status and processing at warning occurrence 4 digital operation value SM400 ypnu a MOV D18 K2M20 Reads Warning output flag t 3 Process alarm M22 i Processing when a warning occurs Processing when a warning OGCUrS for CH2 process alarm upper limit value M23 i f i Processing when a warning occurs Processing when a warning oes for CH2 process alarm lower limit value 4 Input signal error detection status and processing at error detection SM400 a WA Tov D8 K1M50 J Reads Input signal error detection flag ee eee i Processing when an input signal error is detected Processing when GERN input signa error is detected X43 X3C Al SET Y3F Turns on Error clear request to reset the input signal error Error code display and reset processing X3F BCD D10 K4Y50 Outputs the error code in BCD X44 ASSET YF Turns on Error clear r
252. r range settings H gain value 226 E2H CH3 User range settings offset CH5 User range settings value L offset value 227 E3H CH3 User range settings offset Gha User range settings value H gain value 228 E4H CH3 User range settings gain value CH6 User range settings L offset value 229 E5H CH3 User range settings gain value GHG User range settings H gain value 230 E6H CH4 User range settings offset CH7 User range settings value L offset value 931 ETH CH4 User range settings offset CH7 User range settings value H gain value CH4 User range settings gain value CH8 User range settings po Address Address decimal hexadecimal L60AD4 R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W on ee eon L offset value E m 233 E9H r User range settings gain value a _ n Doe System area 00 00 mo or ois System area me om 01 01 E 33 Address decimal 1026 1027 1028 to 1031 1032 1033 1034 1035 1036 to 1039 1040 1041 1042 1043 1044 to 1047 1048 1049 1050 1051 1052 to 1055 1056 1057 1058 1059 1060 to 1063 1064 1065 1066 1067 1068 to 1071 1072 1073 1074 1075 1076 1077 1078 1079 1080 1081 1082 1083 34 hexadecimal Address 402H 403H 404H to 407H 4 0 408H 409H 40AH 40BH CH to 40FH
253. r the setting method of the integration cycle refer to the following Flow amount integration function 3 Page 123 Section 8 15 Set one of the following values in CHO Flow amount time unit setting Un G1316 to Un G1319 e s 0 e min 1 e h 2 Set one of the following values in CHO Unit scaling setting Un G1324 to Un G1327 e x 1 0 e x 10 1 e x 100 2 e x 1000 3 e x 10000 4 Set No request 0 or Temporary stop request 1 in CHO Flow amount integration temporary stop request Un G1356 to Un G1359 Set No request 0 or Clear request 1 in CHO Integrated flow amount clear request Un G1372 to Un G1375 4 This error code can be cleared by setting a value within the setting range and performing either of the following operations 2 3 e Turning on and off Error clear request YF e Turning on and off Operating condition setting request Y9 When Operating condition setting request Y9 is turned on and off A D conversion is reset and are resumed from the beginning An error code is not stored in Latest error code Un G19 but in the completion status of the G P OGSTOR instruction 1 For the L60AD4 with a serial number first five digits 13041 or later the scaling function can be used on the channel where a user range setting is used therefore an error does not occur Point For Switch 1 to 5 refer to the following e Intelligent function module switch settin
254. r upper limit detection 1 Upper limit detection 2 Lower limit detection 3 or Disconnection detection 4 the setting of Input signal error detection setting Un G47 is ignored 12 Digital clipping enable disable setting Un G29 ZB Set whether the digital clipping function is enabled or disabled for each channel For details on the digital clipping function refer to the following e Digital Clipping Function gt Page 99 Section 8 12 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b b6 bd b4 b3 b2 b1 olo lololo LoLo To To To Te To oudonsfowlom C o 0 Enabled Data for b4 to b1 f t ata for b4 to b15 are fixed to 0 1 Disabled a Enabling the setting Turn on and off Operating condition setting request Y9 to enable the setting b Default value All channels are set to Disable 1 13 CH1 Maximum value Un G30 to CH8 Minimum value Un G45 GRE The maximum and minimum digital output values are stored as signed 16 bit binary In the following cases CH1 Maximum value Un G30 to CH8 Minimum value Un G45 are updated to the current value e When Maximum value minimum value reset request YD is turned on and off e When turning on and off Operating condition setting request Y9 changes the setting Point For the channel to which the averaging processing is specified the maximum and minimum values are stored at averaging processing time intervals In CHO Maximum value Un G30 to CHO Minimum value
255. raging process setting A Time Average Count 1 Disable 2 For Conversion speed setting select the appropriate conversion speed oe Conversion speed setting 1 60us Warning output function 0 20u5 Warning output setting Praress alarm unner unner limit 2 1ms 19 UOI JOUN4 UDIIMS peeds UOISJBAUOD G g 8 6 Maximum and Minimum Values Hold Function Common 76 This function stores the maximum digital output value and minimum digital output value in the buffer memory for each channel lf averaging processing is specified the values are updated per averaging process cycle Otherwise they are updated per sampling cycle For a list of buffer memory addresses to which the values are stored refer to the following e List of Buffer Memory Addresses lt gt Page 28 Section 3 5 1 Resetting maximum and minimum values When one of the following operations is performed the maximum value and the minimum value are replaced with the current digital output value e Tuning on and off Maximum value minimum value reset request YD e Turning on and off Operating condition setting request Y9 When Operating condition setting request Y9 is turned on and off A D conversion is reset and are resumed from the beginning 2 Targets of the maximum and minimum values The maximum and minimum values of the digital output value are stored When any of the following functions is used the maximum and minimum scaling values digita
256. rated flow amount Un G1332 to WING1SS9 aid dis one Risen oie elke a Go Gece Ge BESS 230 CH1 to CH4 Integrated flow amount clear flag Un G1380 tO UMGTI I 222 de borne ea oe oh oe a 231 CH1 to CH4 Integrated flow amount clear request Un G1372 to Un G1375 008 231 CH1 to CH4 Integration cycle monitor value Un G1348 10 UING1351 bes Ads ese eee eee ata Bs 230 CH1 to CH4 Integration cycle setting Un G1308 to UINGAST reena eee adb oe bee eta ee Wed Be 228 CH1 to CH4 Latest pointer Un G1098 to Un G1101 Bhp a ets dan Sanita ah EAA A oh Sk Mi tn SM eRe A Sone amp 225 CH1 to CH4 Level trigger condition setting Un G1056 to UMG 1059 eaen ag p eee Rees Beate 221 CH1 to CH4 Logging cycle monitor value Un G1122 to UMGIT ISS Vix cosa ase aes ete ante ocd wicked wed ck Wee es aed 226 CH1 to CH4 Logging cycle setting value Un G1032 to UMG IOSD ioe 6 cna 5 2 Aton wa ted eae Sua em ua a ia 220 CH1 to CH4 Logging cycle unit setting Un G1040 to WiING1043 a c cn a Ais na E eRe at Rae ots Belk 220 CH1 to CH4 Logging data Un G5000 to Un G44999 sche te Oh Geter ae doesnt E E ene aed tase ea ne ane 234 CH1 to CH4 Logging data setting Un G1024 to WANG TO2 Fork as oda e Sek ete ae ens 219 CH1 to CH4 Logging enable disable setting Un G1000 te UNGT tne Boe ete Be he ee 217 CH1 to CH4 Logging hold flag Un G1016 to Un G1019 ae i Ren chee ere GD cic 5 BAS IETS 28 a Saye Ge Rte 218 CH1 to CH4 Logging hold request Un G1008 to ING
257. relationship between the logging cycle and the scan time of the CPU module adjust the logging cycle To check the logging data without paying attention to logging cycle stop the logging operation lt gt Page 115 Section 8 14 1 114 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 8 14 1 Stopping logging Logging operation stops hold when the preset trigger condition is satisfied and the set points of the data are collected A trigger that is generated when the condition is satisfied is called a hold trigger To generate a hold trigger the following two methods are available e Logging hold request lt Page 118 Section 8 14 2 e Level trigger lt Page 119 Section 8 14 3 When a hold trigger is detected during data collection the logging operation stops after the points of the data set in CHO Logging points after trigger Un G1048 to Un G1051 are collected CHUO Logging enable disable setting Un G1000 to Un G1003 Enable 0 ON Operating condition EE o setting request Y9 amp p Operating condition setting orf completed flag X9 Hold trigger Collecting the data corresponding to e the points set in CHO Logging points after trigger Un G1048 to Un G1051 Logging hold flag off 1 Logging points after trigger Set the number of data collected in the period from the detection of a hold trigger to logging operation stop to CHU Logging points after trigger Un G1048 to Un G1051 2 Confirming stop of logging Check t
258. rement or decrement the value at the cursor using the A and W buttons respectively Confirm with the button 4 PRALARM LWR LWR screen 5 Move the cursor using the 4 and p buttons then increment or decrement the value at the cursor using the A and W buttons respectively Confirm with the button Table of input items Input range Input item Input upper limit Input lower limit PRALARM UPR UPR PRALARM UPR LWR PRALARM LWR UPR PRALARM LWR LWR su 19S ueyy enje Bulnes Jo 3S7 L6 32767 32768 151 152 6 Input signal error detection setting Select DISABLE or ENABLE in the INPUT SIG ERR screen INE ALS ees sereen 7 Usethe A and W buttons to select DISABLE or ENABLE and then confirm with the button If you selected ENABLE proceed to step 2 4 AST VAE ETES 2 Move the cursor using the 4 and p gt buttons then increment or decrement the value at the cursor using the A and W buttons respectively Confirm with the button Table of input items Input range Input item Input upper limit Input lower limit INPUT SIG VALUE 250 0 CHAPTER 9 DISPLAY UNIT 7 Scaling setting Select DISABLE or ENABLE in the SCALING screen se SEEEN 71 Usethe A and W buttons to select DISABLE or ENABLE and then confirm with the button If you selected ENABLE follow the rest of the procedure Ue nn eevee 2 Move the cursor using the lt and p gt buttons then increment or dec
259. rement the value at the cursor using the A and W buttons respectively Confirm with the button Senn SOV GMIT Screen 3 Move the cursor using the 4 and gt buttons then increment or decrement the value at the cursor using the A and W buttons respectively Confirm with the button Table of input items Input range Input item Input upper limit Input lower limit SCALE UP LIMIT SCALE LOW LIMIT 32000 32000 su 19S BHueUyd nje A Hues Jo 3S7 6 8 Shifting amount to conversion value Set the shifting amount to conversion value in the SHIFT screen SET EEEN 7 Move the cursor using the lt and buttons then increment or decrement the value at the cursor using the A and W buttons respectively Confirm with the button Input item lists Input range Input item Input upper limit Input lower limit SHIFT 32767 32768 Point The Shifting amount to conversion value is reflected to the scaling value regardless of turning on and off Operating condition setting request Y9 However when the Shifting amount to conversion value is set in a display unit it is not reflected just after setting As well as other functions of display unit turn the CPU module STOP gt RUN gt STOP gt RUN to reflect the setting value 153 9 Digital clipping enable disable setting Wy Select DISABLE or ENABLE in the DIGITALCLIP screen DIGMEECE Screen 71 Usethe amp and W buttons to select DISABLE o
260. request END 1 When using the L60ADVL8 or L60ADIL8 change H8 to HF8 2 When using the L60ADVL8 or L6OADIL8 this setting is not required 3 When using the L6OADVL8 or L6OADIL8 set values within the digital output range of the input range used 4 When using the L6OADVL8 or L6OADIL8 and enabling A D conversion for five channels or more increase the number of digits to be specified For example change K1MO to K2M0 uoneinbiyuoDy Wae1SAS psepue s e Ul jnpon 2y BuISA UBUAA zol 165 10 3 When A D Converter Module is Connected to Head Module This section describes the system configuration of A D converter module and a program example of operation condition 1 System configuration The following describes the system configuration examples when the A D converter module is mounted to a head module Power supply module Q62P CPU module Q10QUDHCPU Master local module QJ71GF11 T2 Input module QX10 Output module QY10 X YOO X Y20 X Y30 to to to X IY1F XIY2F XN3F N Pa Z S Elsah Masster station Station No 0 Ethernet cable 1000BASE T Network No 1 2 Programming conditions Power supply module L61P Head module LU72GF15 T2 A D converter module L60AD4 Input module LX40C6 Output module LY10R2 END cover L6EC X Y1000 X Y1010 X Y1020 to to to X Y100F X Y101F X Y102F i cocel Intellige
261. resh 265 qv soyeinByuod X9 Jo uonessdo Z 6 xipueddy Gvy so1einByu0Dd X9 JO adojaasq XH BuisN u yM 6 Xipueddy 266 GX Developer screen Edit mode MAIN 58 Step IESS Window Help Check progami Tools Intelligent function utility Confirm project memory size Merge data KI TE Sta rt Check parameter jt ai Transfer ROM Delete unused comments Clear all parameters IC memory card gt Set TEL data Start LCPU Logging Configuration Tool Intelligent Function utility Utility list Change display color Options Create start up setting file Initial setting r Module information Module type A D Conversion Module Start 1 0 No 0010 Module model name L60AD4 Details Move to sub window Make text file End setup Cancel CHL Initial setting CHL Initial setting screen CH1 Initial setting r Module information Module type A D Conversion Module Start 140 No 0010 Module model name L60AD4 CH1 A D conversion enable disable setting CH1 Averaging process specification Sampling processing CH1 Average time average number of times move average settings Average time 2 5000ms when the conversion speed is 20us 2 1500ms Average number of times 4 62500 Move average 2 1000 number of times CH1 Warning output setting Process alarm setting p Details Select input Enable Disable Make text file
262. ress of CHO Logging data Un G5000 to Un G44999 and the logging operation continues overwriting the existing data The number of logging data is fixed to 10000 6 Head pointer and latest pointer The storage location of the oldest data and the latest data in CHO Logging data Un G5000 to Un G44999 can be checked with the following buffer memory areas Buffer memory Description E E hy Sh E Sg I 1 Address 9998 5 z Address 9998 Address 9999 2m rnrnsnes Address 9999 Address 5 Oe P Address 5 CHO Head pointer The buffer memory address where the oldest data is stored can be checked in CHO Logging data Oo CHO Head pointer Un G1090 to Un G1093 Un G5000 to Un G44999 The offset value 0 to 9999 counted from the start address Un G5000 P Un G15000 Un G25000 Un G35000 of CHO Logging data Un G5000 to Un G44999 is stored D ol The buffer memory address of the latest data in CHO Logging data Un G5000 to Un G44999 can be 2 i checked with this buffer memory area The offset value 0 to 9999 counted from the start address Q CHO Latest ter Un G1098 to Un G1101 TI a h i sa Un G5000 Un G15000 Un G25000 Un G35000 of CHO Logging data Un G5000 to Un G44999 is stored o O When the number of collected data is less than 10000 points When the number of collected data has reached 10000 points BHRHREEEHREEEEEESBHEH ee ee te o r kA E I 1 i CHU Head pointer D gt Aadress o the oldest Address 0 1 i
263. rformed properly Connect the AG terminal and the external device GND to eliminate the potential difference If the same external device GND is used for all channels noise occurs between channels and some errors may occur in A D converted values Connect the AG terminal and the external device GND to eliminate the errors If digital output value cannot be read even after taking the above actions the A D converter module may be failed Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative 186 CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 2 When digital output value cannot be read AME Check the cause with the flowchart below Step 1 Check the digital output value I Check the following e Is the digital output value stored in a buffer memory area e Is the program to read a digital output value correct I I Step 2 Check the A D conversion status I I Check the A D conversion status inside the module such as whether A D conversion is properly performed in i the A D converter module I I I I Step 3 Check the analog input value Check the voltage value or current value detected in the A D converter module When a digital output value cannot be read Check the values stored in CHO Digital output value Un G11 to Un G18 The read program is incorrect or the CPU module is in STOP status ies Check item 1 Is the digital output value stored according to analog input Che
264. rial shipment settings gain value H CH4 Industrial shipment settings offset value L CH4 Industrial shipment settings offset value H CH4 Industrial shipment settings gain value L CH4 Industrial shipment settings gain value H CH1 User range settings offset value L CH1 User range settings offset value H CH1 User range settings gain value L CH1 User range settings gain value H CH2 User range settings offset value L CH2 User range settings offset value H CH2 User range settings gain value L CH2 User range settings gain value H CH3 User range settings offset value L CH3 User range settings offset value H CH3 User range settings gain value L CH3 User range settings gain value H Set by System System System System System System System System System System System System System System System System System System System System System System System System System System System System System System APPENDICES S 34 CH4 User range settings gain value L ee eee System S 35 CH4 User range settings gain value H PC S o O se System b L6OADVL8 L60ADIL8 o frem O T o The status on instruction completion is stored S 1 Completion status 0 normal completion System Other than 0 error completion error code Sa fm y o oo os smm S S oo O ora oramne e R ore orma nS 251 3 Functions e This instruction restores the industrial shipment set
265. rns enabled For details on the input signal error detection extension function refer to the following e Input signal error detection extension function gt Page 82 Section 8 8 l to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to bO Un G27 Input signal error detection extension setting CH1 to CH4 CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1 l l _ b45 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to bO Un G28 Input signal error detection extension setting CH5 to CH8 CH8 CH7 CH6 CH5 p S For the L60AD4 data in Un G28 are fixed to 0 Detection method Setting value Disable OH Lower upper limit detection 1H Lower limit detection 2H Upper limit detection 3H Disconnection detection 4H e When a value out of the setting range above is set to a channel an error occurs in the channel an error code 810 is stored in Latest error code Un G19 and Error flag XF turns on The operation is performed in the setting configured before the error occurrence s ss lppy Aiowayy yng Jo sjieleg zZ xipueddy a Enabling the setting Turn on and off Operating condition setting request Y9 to enable the setting 205 b Default value All channels are set to Disable 0 Point Disconnection detection 4 is valid only when the input range is set as 4 to 20mA extended mode or 1 to 5V extended mode When the channel with another range is set to Disconnection detection 4 an error occurs When Input signal error detection extension setting Un G27 Un G28 is set to Lowe
266. ror has occurred If the error occurs again a failure might have occurred on the module Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative Do not execute the G P OGSTOR instruction in the offset gain setting mode e Execute the G P OGSTOR instruction only once per module e Write the setting value into the flash memory only once for each offset gain setting e Execute the G P OGLOAD and G P OGSTOR instructions to the same module e After executing the G P OGLOAD instruction on the module from where data is restored execute the G P OGSTOR instruction on the module to where the data is restored No more offset gain setting is reflected on the operation successfully 179 S17 BPO JONZ Y 4 Error code decimal L60AD4 200 300 3101 360 370 400 500 64A g0 800 810 180 L60ADVL8 L6O0ADIL8 L60AD4 L60ADVL8 L60ADIL8 L60AD4 L60ADVL8 L60ADIL8 L60AD4 L60AD4 L60AD4 L60ADVL8 L6O0ADIL8 L60AD4 L60ADVL8 L6O0ADIL8 L60AD4 L60ADVL8 L6O0ADIL8 L60AD4 L60ADVL8 L60ADIL8 L60AD4 L60ADVL8 L6O0ADIL8 Target Description and cause of error module e Although the conversion speed has been set to 20us the averaging time value set in CHO Time Average Count Average Moving Average Un G1 to Un G4 is outside the range of 2 to 1500ms e Although the conversion speed has been set to 80us or 1ms the averaging time value set in CHO Time Average Count
267. s Average time Averaging process Averaging process settin sed to replace Q64AD Un GQ9 acaba varande noe P Averaging process setting used to replace Q64AD Un G9 specification Averaging process setting Un G24 OUUU GOUD E Y yY s t Fixed to 0004 th sce With temperature drift correction Intelligent function value other than 00x Without temperature drift correction module switch setting OH Normal Resolution Mode A 1H to FH OH Normal resolution mode aga 1H to F A value other than Ou High resolution mode value other than Ox High resolution mode OH Normal Resolution Mode 1H to FH A D conversion processing value other than Ou Offset gain setting mode When Operating condition setting request Y9 is turned from OFF to ON digital values are cleared Q64AD has no scaling value Digital output value When Operating condition setting request Y9 is turned from scaling value OFF to ON digital values and scaling values are held b Comparison of the specifications between the L60ADVL8 L60ADIL8 and Q68ADV Q68ADI The following table shows a comparison of the specifications between the LEOADVL8 L60ADIL8 and Q68ADV Q68ADI Difference L60ADVL8 L60ADIL8 Q68ADV Q68ADI L6OADVL8 1 8000 or 1 16000 resolution change function is not installed L6OADIL8 1 8000 resolution change function is not installed Resolution change function 2 types normal resolution 1 4000 and high
268. s cn7 cHe cnscHalcHslcH2lcH1 Offset gain setting mode Gain specification Un G23 o o0 o0 0 0 0 0 0 cHs cH7 cHe CHSs CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1 NF ee b4 to b15 of the L60AD4 and b8 to b15 of 1 Setting target channel the L60DADVL8 and L60ADIL8 are fixed to 0 0 Disable a Enabling the setting In the offset gain setting mode turn on and off Channel change request YB to enable the setting b Default All channels are set to Disable 0 Point The settings for multiple channels can be configured at the same time However set either of Offset gain setting mode Offset specification Un G22 or Offset gain setting mode Gain specification Un G23 to be disabled 0 When the settings for both of them are configured at the same time an error error code 500 occurs For details on offset gain setting refer to the following e Offset gain setting lt Page 60 Section 7 5 203 sessaippy Aiowayy yng Jo sjieleg Z xipueddy 204 9 Averaging process setting Un G24 Un G25 iii Configure the setting when selecting sampling or averaging processing for each channel Averaging processing includes time average count average and moving average b15 to b12b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to Un G24 Averaging process CH1 to CH4 ae a ee b15 to b12b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to hee o o o e Averaging process CH5 to CH8 For the L60AD4 data in o a are fixed to 0 Processing method Setting value Sampling processing OH
269. s setting it Time Average Count 1 Disable 2 Set Input signal error detection setting to 0 Enable Sets for input signals on A I Input signal error detection O Enable ha ooo input signal error detection a EA Input signal error detection setting ise value 1 Disable 3 Seta value for Input signal error detection setting value Input signal error detection Sets for input signals pesca Input signal error detection setting 0 Enable Input signal error detection setting value ate 4 Set Input signal error detection extension setting to 0 Disable cn Input signal error defection on extension setting O Disable y Scaling function 0 Disable H Scaling enable disable setting L Upper and Lower Detection StLower Detection Upper Detection 4 Disconnection Detection presen Scaling upper limit value Scaling lower limit value li a F Item Setting range Input signal error detection setting value 0 to 25 0 81 uOl OUN4 uonoa q 10114 jeubis yndu 2 8 8 8 Input Signal Error Detection Extension Function Common Using this function the detection method of the input signal error detection function can be extended Use this function to detect an input signal error only at the lower or upper limit or to execute the disconnection detection To enable this function the input signal error detection function does not need to be enab
270. setting of MELSOFT application Clear History Create CSY File Close 2 Errors to be collected The A D converter module reports the following contents to the CPU module e Error code list _ Page 179 Section 11 4 e Alarm code list lt Page 183 Section 11 5 178 11 4 Error Code List CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING The following table lists error codes When an error occurs the error code is stored in Latest error code Un G19 The error is reported to the CPU module also Error code decimal 100 111 112 1131 1201 12001 161 12 162 163 170 L60AD4 L60ADVL8 L60ADIL8 L60AD4 L60ADVL8 L6O0ADIL8 L60AD4 L60ADVL8 L60ADIL8 L60AD4 L60ADVL8 L60ADIL8 L60AD4 L60ADVL8 L60ADIL8 L60AD4 L60ADVL8 L6O0ADIL8 L60AD4 L60ADVL8 L60ADIL8 L60AD4 L60ADVL8 L60ADIL8 L60AD4 L60ADVL8 L60ADIL8 L60AD4 L60ADVL8 L60ADIL8 Target 2 Description and cause of error module The input range is set with a value outside the setting range for Switch 1 or 2 of the intelligent function module switch setting of PLC parameter The channel with the invalid setting fits in O A hardware failure has occurred on the module A value other than 0 is set to Switch 5 on the intelligent function module switch setting of PLC parameter The data in the flash memory has a problem An invalid value is set to the offset gain setting The channel where the error has o
271. splayed by double clicking Switch Setting of the specified module on the project window of GX Works2 An analog input range where a user can set any values To use this range the offset and gain values have to be set An error that occurs if the internal processing of the A D converter module fails The module monitors its own internal processing by using the watchdog timer PACKING LIST The following items are included in the package of this product Before use check that all the items are included A D converter module A D converter module Before Using the Product 15 CHAPTER 1 A D CONVERTER MODULE This chapter describes the applications and features of the A D converter module 1 1 Application This module converts the analog value input from external devices to the digital output value and inputs the converted data to the CPU module By converting the data which has been processed through the A D converter module to a digital data the input information can be sent to the CPU module Analog to digital conversion Analog signal continuous signal Digital signal discrete signal The A D converter module enables works as follows Connect the module to the power conditioning equipment to measure the heating temperature of the heater or others Connect the module to the control valve to measure the flow Control valve elk er 16 CHAPTER 1 A D CONVERTER
272. ss setting Time S verage Count 1 Disable For Averaging process setting select 0 Sampling Processing Areraging process seffing _ Time Averages Count O Sampling Processing ba 0 S5Sampling Processing Ayverage Moving Average 1 Time Average hese Conversion speed setting Count Average Warning ouknot function ai Mloving average b Averaging processing lex To select 1 Time Average for Averaging process setting 1 Set A D conversion enable disable setting to 0 Enable T Project window gt Intelligent Function Module gt module name gt Parameter j Basic setting Sets method of AD c _ AD conversion enable disable setting U Enable ts fee Averaging process setting Time S verage Count 1 Disable For Averaging process setting select 1 Time Average fesse Areragng process setting O Sampling a Time Average Count O Sampling Processing Averagel Moving Average 1 Time verage 2 Count amp verage ai Moving Average Conversion speed setting L Wiseman mokmuok francktinn 72 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 3 For Time Average CountAverage Moving Average enter the following averaging process setting Time Average eo Time Average Count Averagel Moving Average 1000 ms e L60AD4 Setting item Conversion speed Setting range 20 us 2 to 1500 ms 80 us 1 ms 2 to 5000 ms Time Average Count Average 20 us 80 us 1 ms 4 to 62500 times Moving Average 20 us 80
273. st A D conversion has yet to be complete 1 A D conversion completion 2 In the use of the input signal error detection function an input signal error has been Input signal error detected 3 detected When the input signal error detection function is not used this value is not stored 57 CHO Analog input monitor Un G1710 Un G1712 Un G1714 Un G1716 Un G1718 Un G1720 Un G1722 Un G1724 GB The amount of analog input a current or a voltage is stored for each channel A D conversion disable The first A D conversion has been complete A D conversion is in execution This value is updated at periods of about ims Use this area for troubleshooting For details refer to the following e When digital output value cannot be read lt Page 187 Section 11 6 2 2 The value stored in CHO Analog input monitor Un G1710 Un G1712 Un G1714 Un G1716 Un G1718 Un G1720 Un G1722 Un G1724 depends on the value stored in CHO A D conversion status Un G1700 to Un G1707 as described below a 1 A D conversion start 2 A D conversion completion 3 Input signal error detected The following values are stored Module Storage contents The product of Input voltage V and 100 is stored L60ADVL 60 8 When 10V is input 1000 is stored The product of Input amperage mA and 100 is stored L60ADIL 60ADIL8 When 20mA is input 2000 is stored Point Do not use the value in this area for actual controls because t
274. t 0 IX Cleared 1 qe i 4 No clear request 0 clear flag Un G1380 to Un G1383 2147483647 Pee SS See HSS SSS se ee ee ee es eset ree CHL Integrated flow amount Un G1332 to Un G1339 CHO Flow amount integration Extra amount which exceeded the upper limit a 8 Operation when an input signal error occurs The integral processing cannot be performed while an input signal error is occurring When the analog input value returns within the setting range and the A D conversion is restarted the integral processing is performed uoloun uonesbeju JUNOWY MO 4 G48 131 132 9 Operation when Operating condition setting request Y9 is turned on and off The following processing is performed by changing the settings in the corresponding buffer memory areas and turning on and off Operating condition setting request Y9 When the integration cycle or parameter of the intergral processing has been changed the processing clears CHO Integrated flow amount Un G1332 to Un G1339 to zero and applies the new setting to the flow amount integration function For details on the integration cycle or parameter of the intergral processing refer to the following e Concept of integral processing gt Page 124 Section 8 15 1 e Concept of integration cycle lt gt Page 125 Section 8 15 2 A D conversion enable disable setting Un GO Buffer memory Processing after changing setting e The integration cycle changes
275. t error code Un G19 Error flag XF turns on and the flow amount integration function cannot be performed b Default value All channels are set to 4 ms 228 APPENDICES 48 CHO Flow amount time unit setting Un G1316 to Un G1319 Ze Set a conversion value to convert the time unit of instantaneous flow amount to ms Set CHO Flow amount time unit setting Un G1316 to Un G1319 to the range of the flow meter connected to the A D converter module For details on the flow amount integration function refer to the following e Flow amount integration function lt gt Page 123 Section 8 15 Flow amount time unit Setting value Is 0 min 1 h 2 e Inthe channel where a setting value other than the above is set an error occurs The error code 2130 is stored in Latest error code Un G19 Error flag XF turns on and the flow amount integration function is not enabled When the range of the flow meter is cm s set 0 a Default value All channels are set to s 0 49 CHO Unit scaling setting Un G1324 to Un G1327 QZ Set the unit scaling that is used for the flow amount integration function For details on the flow amount integration function refer to the following e Flow amount integration function lt Page 123 Section 8 15 Unit scaling Setting value x 1 0 x 10 1 x 100 2 x 1000 3 x 10000 4 e Inthe channel where a setting value other than the above is set an error occurs The err
276. t value in such a way that the change is larger than the resolution the resolution will not increase Your scaling settings must meet the following condition Scaling upper limit value gt Scaling lower limit value uonouny Buljeos 0 8 89 4 Example of scaling setting When the following values are set for a channel with the input range of 0 to 5V in the L60AD4 e Scaling enable disable setting 0 Enable e Scaling upper limit value 16000 e Scaling lower limit value 4000 Scaling function Sets for scaling on A D con Scaling enable disable setting 0 Enable see Scaling upper limit value 16000 ae Scaling lower limit value 4000 The digital output values and scaling values digital operation values are as follows Digital output value Scaling upper limit value 16000 7720000 7 Analog input voltage V Scaling lower limit value 4000 0 0 Analog input voltage V lesa E caine 3 um 4 ia 5 lsi When the input range is set to 0 to 5V in the LEGOADVL8 the same scaling value digital operation value is stored for the analog input voltage V 90 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS When the following values are set for a channel with the input range of 10 to 10V in the L60AD4 e Scaling enable disable setting 0 Enable e Scaling upper limit value 16000 e Scaling lower limit value 4000 Scaling function Sets for scaling on A D con Z Scaling enable disa
277. telligent Function Module gt gt module name gt Parameter Item __cHi El Basic setting Sets method of A D c _ A D conversion enable disable setting O Enable il cee Averaging process setting Time Average Count 1 Disable 2 Seta value to Shifting amount to conversion value Shift function Available to Product i F Takarcatian Set shift function when A D ci S041 00000000008 or later Shifting amount fo Ve conversion value ee ery The initial value of the shifting amount to conversion value is 0 Item Setting range Shifting amount to conversion value 32768 to 32767 Point If the digital output value exceeds the range of 32768 to 32767 as a result of shift addition the digital output value is fixed to the lower limit value 32768 or the upper limit value 32767 uooUNY HUS 1 g 95 3 Setting example When the following settings are used for a channel with input range of 10 to 10V Shifting amount to conversion value 20000 The following figure and table show CH1 Digital output value Un G11 and CH1 Scaling value digital operation value Un G54 2 Scaling value digital operation value after adjustment 1 CH1 Digital output value Un G11 A000 pesene PA septs z B276T paean ems CH1 Shifting amount
278. temporarily No request 0 gt Temporary stop request 1 2 When the rise of No request 0 Temporary stop request 1 is detected the flow amount integration function is temporarily stopped and CHO Flow amount integration temporary stop flag Un G1364 to Un G1367 of the corresponding channel turns Temporarily stopped 1 b Operation procedure to restart the flow amount integration to cancel temporary stop 1 While the flow amount integration function is temporarily stopped change the CHO Flow amount integration temporary stop request Un G1356 to Un G1359 of the stopped channel Temporary stop request 1 No request 0 2 When the fall of Temporary stop request 1 gt No request 0 is detected the flow amount integration function is restarted and CHO Flow amount integration temporary stop flag Un G1364 to Un G1367 of the corresponding channel turns No temporary stop request 0 Controlled by the A D converter module gt Performed by the program Integration cycle I I I I l cHU Flow amount integration i temporary stop request Un G1356 to Un G1359 CHO Integrated flow amount i Un G1332 to Un G1339 2 Ka A oa X 1380 No request 0 N Temporary stop request 1 No request 0 cHU Flow amount integration N temporary stop flag No temporary stop request 0 Temporarily stopped 1 No temporary stop request 0 Un G1364 to Un G1367 uoloun uonesbeju JUNOWY MO GL 8
279. ter Un G1099 is 8550 CH2 Logging data Un G15000 Latest pointer 8850 0 offset value from Un G15000 l i 4 The latest data Un G23550 23550 15000 8550 Un G23551 The oldest data Un G24999 Point CHO Latest pointer Un G1098 to Un G1101 increases one by one each time data is stored from the logging starts When CHO Logging hold request Un G1008 to Un G1011 is changed from On 1 to Off 0 CHO Number of logging data Un G1106 to Un G1109 is cleared to zero 42 CHO Number of logging data Un G1106 to Un G1109 ZUR The number of data stored in CHO Logging data Un G5000 to Un G44999 can be checked during the logging For details on the logging function refer to the following e Logging Function gt Page 108 Section 8 14 Point The number of logging data increases one by one each time data is stored from the logging starts When the number of logging data reaches 10000 CHO Number of logging data Un G1106 to Un G1109 is fixed to 10000 since the data points are overwritten from the head again When CHO Logging hold request Un G1008 to Un G1011 is changed from On 1 to Off 0 CHO Number of logging data Un G1106 to Un G1109 is cleared to zero sessaippy Aiowayy yng Jo sjieleg Z xipueddy 225 43 CHO Trigger pointer Un G1114 to Un G1117 Uy The address of buffer memory which stores the data of when a hold trigger was executed can be checked in CHU Logging dat
280. th 2011 uonoun 4 607 10113 91g 133 2 Checking error history You can check the start address of the latest stored error at Latest address of error history Un G1800 lex When the third error occurs The third error is stored in error history No 3 and the value 1830 start address of error history No 3 is stored to Latest address of error history Un G1800 Latest address of error history The start address of the error history Un G1800 where the latest error is stored is stored Details of error history An error history consists of the following Address data 1810 Error history No 1 1st error 1820 Error history No 2 aes 1830 Error history No 3 Error code First two digits Last two digits of the year ofthe year Error Month occurrence Hour time Second Day of the wee a Empty 1960 Error history No 16 Empty 134 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS Ex When a 17th error occurs The 17th error is stored in error history No 1 and the value 1810 start address of error history No 1 gets stored to Latest address of error history Un G1800 Latest address of error history Un G1800 Address 1810 Error history No 1 gt lt UNS 1820 Error history No 2 The 17th error is stored in Error history No 1 and the 1st error history will be erased oeer 1830 Error history No 3 EED 1960 Error history No 16 16th error Point
281. the CPU module and operate the level trigger in CH1 create a program as follows 1 Set 1073 Level data 1 to CH1 Trigger data Un G1064 When Level data 1 is used 2 Store the storage data of D100 in Level data 1 Un G1073 by the program continuously The start I O number is set to 104 in the following program example uonoun4 Bub p19 X10 Y19 X19 U1 c TMO 1100 G1073 Point Specify appropriate data such as CHO Digital output value Un G11 to Un G14 CHO Scaling value digital operation value Un G54 to Un G57 and Level data O Un G1072 to Un G1081 to CHO Trigger data Un G1064 to Un G1067 When a setting area or a system area is specified normal operation is not guaranteed 119 120 b Setting of the condition e Seta condition to generate a hold trigger to CHO Level trigger condition setting Un G1056 to Un G1059 Setting value Description A hold trigger is generated under Above 1 Stored value of a device the condition a to be monitored A hold trigger is generated under Below 2 gg g the condition b Trigger setting value Time A hold trigger is generated under a A hold trigger is generated when the relation between the values the condition a or b changes from Stored value of a buffer memory area to be monitored lt Trigger setting value to Stored value of a buffer memory area to be monitored gt Trigger setting value b A hold trigger is generated when the relatio
282. the CPU module or base unit The CE mark on the side of the programmable controller indicates compliance with EMC and Low Voltage Directives 2 Additional measures No additional measures are necessary for the compliance of this product with the EMC and Low Voltage Directives RELEVANT MANUALS 1 CPU module user s manual Manual name manual number model code MELSEC L CPU Module User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection SH 080890ENG 13JZ36 MELSEC L CPU Module User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals SH 080889ENG 13JZ35 2 Head module User s Manual Manual name manual number model code MELSEC L CC Link IE Field Network Head Module User s Manual SH 080919ENG 13JZ48 3 Operating manual Manual name manual number model code GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Common SH 080779ENG 13JU63 GX Developer Version 8 Operating Manual SH 080373E 13JU41 Description Specifications of the CPU modules power supply modules display unit branch module extension module SD memory cards and batteries information on how to establish a system maintenance and inspection and troubleshooting Functions and devices of the CPU module and programming Description Specifications procedures before operation system configuration installation wiring settings and troubleshooting of the head module Description System configuration parameter settings and online operati
283. the Switch Setting of the PLC parameter Parameter contains an out of ange value x om uoneinbiyuoDy Wae1SAS psepue s e Ul jnpon 2y BuISA uayM Z OL 159 4 Initial setting description a Channel setting Description Item 5 A D conversion enable disable setting Enable Disable Averaging process setting Sampling processing Sampling processing Ti tA Movi Average Conversion speed setting 20us Process alarm upper upper limit value a Ce 0 Process alarm upper lower limit value a ao Cee 0 Process alarm lower upper limit value ee ao Ce 0 Input signal error detection setting value 10 0 5 0 Input signal error detection extension PEREN S Disable Disable Disable Disable setting oo p fpo p Scaling lower limit value we o aS e l 0 Digital clipping function enable disable l _ 3 Disable Disable Enable Disable setting 4 When using the L6OADVL8 or L60ADIL8 configure the same setting for CH5 to CH8 2 When using the L6OADVL8 or L60ADIL8 set values within the digital output range of the input range used 3 The L60ADVL8 or L6OADIL8 does not supprt this item Scaling enable disable setting Scaling upper limit value b Device for user 160 Device Description D1 D11 CH1 Digital output value D2 D12 CH2 Digital output value D8 Input signal error detection flag D10 Error code D18 Warning output flag D28 D13 CH3 Scaling value digital operation value MO CH1 A D conversion completed flag
284. the value is fixed to 0 52 CHO Flow amount integration temporary stop request Un G1356 to Un G1359 Ze Stops the integral processing temporarily while the flow amount integration function is operating For details on the flow amount integration function refer to the following e Flow amount integration function lt gt Page 123 Section 8 15 Flow amount integration temporary stop request Setting value No request 0 Temporary stop request 1 e In the channel where a setting value other than the above is set an error occurs The error code 2150 is stored in Latest error code Un G19 Error flag XF turns on and the setting is ignored e When CHO Flow amount integration temporary stop request Un G1356 to Un G1359 is turned No request 0 Temporary stop request 1 while the flow amount integration function is operating the flow amount integration function temporarily stops e When CHO Flow amount integration temporary stop request Un G1356 to Un G1359 is turned Temporary stop request 1 No request 0 while the flow amount integration function temporarily stops the flow amount integration function restarts a Default value All channels are set to No request 0 230 APPENDICES 53 CHO Flow amount integration temporary stop flag Un G1364 to Un G1367 EUZ Flow amount integration temporary stop request status can be checked with this flag Flow amount integration temporary stop request status Stor
285. this manual are either trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies SPREAD Copyright C 1997 FarPoint Technologies Inc 274 SH NA 080899ENG F OH NA O80899ENG F 1506 MEE MODEL L A D U E MODEL CODE 13J2Z42 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION HEAD OFFICE TOKYO BUILDING 2 7 3 MARUNOUCHI CHIYODA KU TOKYO 100 8310 JAPAN NAGOYA WORKS 1 14 YADA MINAMI 5 CHOME HIGASHI KU NAGOYA JAPAN When exported from Japan this manual does not require application to the Ministry of Economy Trade and Industry for service transaction permission Specifications subject to change without notice
286. ting and offset gain setting value in the user range stored in the CPU module to the A D converter module e There are two interlock signals of G P OGSTOR a completion device and a completion status indication device 0 1 a Completion device The device turns ON at the END processing for the scan where the G P OGSTOR instruction is completed and turns OFF at the next END processing b Completion status indication device This device turns on and off depending on the status of the G P OGSTOR instruction completion e Normal completion the device is kept to be OFF e Error completion the device turns ON at the END processing for the scan where the G P OGSTOR instruction is completed and turns OFF at the next END processing END END END END processing processing processing processing Program SSS SS ti Execution completion of the ON G P OGSTOR instruction G P OGSTOR OFF instruction ION Completion device D _ vy ON Execution failed Completion status OFF i OFF Execution succeeded indication device D 1 1 scan c Accuracy The accuracy after the restoration of the offset gain setting value is lower than the one before the restoration The difference is about three times 4 Errors In the following cases an error occurs and error code is stored in completion status area S 1 Error code Description of operation error 161 G P OGSTOR instruction is executed in offset gain setting mo
287. tion 8 8 Input signal error detection extension function This function outputs alarm when a digital output value is in the range Warning output function process set in advance When an operation function such as the scaling Page 85 Section alarm function is used the scaling value digital operation value is the target 8 9 of detection The A D converter module scale converts the output digital value to Scaling function the set range of the scaling upper limit value and scaling lower limit value This omits the programming of the scale conversion Page 88 Section 8 10 The A D converter module adds the set shifting amount to conversion value to the scaling value digital operation value and stores in the Page 94 Section buffer memory Fine adjustment can be performed easily when the 8 11 system starts Shift function 25 Applicable model Item Description L60AD4 L60ADVL8 L60ADIL8 When the input voltage or current exceeds the input range the Digital clipping function maximum value of the scaling value digital operation value can be set to 20000 and the minimum value can be set to 0 or 20000 This function subtracts the difference conversion reference value from Difference conversion function the scaling value digital operation value and stores the acquired value in the buffer memory This function logs the digital output value or scaling value digital Logging function operation value The data of 10000 p
288. truction within the range of Bit specified device In error completion D 1 also turns ON 244 APPENDICES 2 Control data a L60AD4 Slmem A A The status on instruction completion is stored S 1 Completion status 0 normal completion System Other than 0 error completion error code Specify the type of offset gain setting value to read out 0 voltage S 2 Pass data classification setting 1 current 0000H to OOOFH User b15 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 Eae 0 onsjonafona ons os fma O S S oo S 6 CH1 Industrial shipment settings gain value L amp J System S 7 CH1 Industrial shipment settings gain value H ae System S 10 CH2 Industrial shipment settings gain value L a aes eee System S 11 CH2 Industrial shipment settings gain value H Cl errrrr System S 14 CH3 Industrial shipment settings gain value L a ee eee System a a S 15 CH3 Industrial shipment settings gain value H o e o OoOo System 2 S 18 CH4 Industrial shipment settings gain value L a ee ee System gt 3 S 19 CH4 Industrial shipment settings gain value H ee ae System 5 S 20 CH1 User range settings offset value L ee eee System S 21 CH1 User range settings offset value H Jj System S 24 CH2 User range settings offset value L a es ae System S 25 CH2 User range settings offset value H a ee ee System S 28 CH3 User range settings offset value L a ee ee System S 29 CH3 User range settings offset va
289. tting 3 When the ALM LED turns on or flashes a When turning on Check item Action Check Warning output flag Process alarm Un G50 For the action refer to the following Alarm Code List gt Page 183 Section 11 5 Is there any alarm output b When flashing Check item Action Check Input signal error detection flag Un G49 Input signal error detection flag Un G49 turns on when an analog input value becomes the input signal error detection upper limit value or greater or input signal error detection lower limit value or smaller When Input signal error detection flag Un G49 is on check the external wiring voltage value or current value of analog input signal Is there any input signal error Bujooysesqnoll 9 4 185 11 6 2 Troubleshooting for the A D conversion 1 When digital output value cannot be read Wy Check item Is there any problem with wiring such as off or disconnection of analog signal lines Is the CPU module in the STOP status Is the offset gain setting correct Is input range setting correct Is A D conversion disable 1 set to A D conversion enable disable setting Un GO of the channel to input a value Is Operating condition setting request Y9 performed Are the V and I terminals connected if the input source is current Are the setting values correct when the average processing is specified Is there any potential difference between the AG term
290. tting range is 0 to 4999 e Inthe channel where a value out of the above range is set an error occurs Then the error code 2060 is stored in Latest error code Un G19 Error flag XF turns on and logging cannot be performed e When CHO Logging enable disable setting Un G1000 to Un G1003 is set to Disable 1 the setting for CHO Trigger data Un G1064 to Un G1067 is ignored Point Set the following buffer memory addresses for CHO Trigger data Un G1064 to Un G1067 For buffer memory addresses refer to the list of buffer memory addresses lt gt Page 28 Section 3 5 e CHO Digital output value Un G11 to Un G14 11 to 14 e CHO Scaling value Un G54 to Un G57 54 to 57 Level data O Un G1072 to Un G1081 1072 to 1081 Buffer memory addresses shown with R in the list of buffer memory addresses Do not use the buffer memory addresses shown with R W and W except for Level data O Un G1072 to Un G1081 and system areas in the list If the above areas are set normal operations of the A D converter module are not guaranteed b Enabling the setting Turn on and off Operating condition setting request Y9 to enable the setting c Default value Channel Default value Buffer memory to be monitored CH1 CH1 Scaling value digital operation value Un G54 CH2 n CH2 Scaling value digital operation value Un G55 54 55 CH3 CH3 Scaling value digital operation value Un G56 CH4 CH4 Scaling value
291. tting value Enable 0 Disable 1 e In the channel where a setting value other than the above is set an error occurs The error code 2010 is stored in Latest error code Un G19 and Error flag XF turns on e In the channel where the conversion speed is set to 20us or 80us and CHO Flow amount integration enable disable setting Un G1300 to Un G1303 is Enable 0 an error occurs The error code 2010 is stored in Latest error code Un G19 Error flag XF turns on and the flow amount integration function is not enabled a Enabling the setting Turn on and off Operating condition setting request Y9 to enable the setting b Default value All channels are set to Disable 1 47 CHO Integration cycle setting Un G1308 to Un G1311 ZUR Set the integration cycle of flow amount integration in each channel For details on the flow amount integration function refer to the following e Flow amount integration function lt gt Page 123 Section 8 15 a Setting range e Setting range is 1 to 5000 ms e In the channel where a value other than the above is set an error occurs Then the error code 2110 is stored in Latest error code Un G19 Error flag XF turns on and the flow amount integration function cannot be performed e When the set integration cycle is below the data updated cycle of CHO Scaling value digital operation value Un G54 to Un G57 an error occurs Then the error code 2120 is stored in Lates
292. u ret necessary an the CPU doss k eutcmaticaly Leoving this setting bisik wil net couse on error tocar Te Page Sesion 712 Mosa nane Page 7 Seeron 713 Pans Page Sesion TA zi Page 74 Sesion 7 15 Satch Setting Configure the switch setting of the built in I O or intelligent function modules Page 74 Section 7 1 6 Set the following Error Time Output Mode Detaled Setting PLC Operation at HW Error Page 75 Section 7 1 7 VO Response Time The section of the current page is shown Setting Start X Y enables modification on the start I O numbers assigned to connected modules shows setting or ex jivnen 1000 is specified in Start X Y to the slot where a 16 point module is connected the assignment ope rati ng exam ples Tange of an input module is changed to X1000 to X100F For details refer to the following shows reference esc CPU Module User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals manuals Point Set the type of the connected module in Type Setting a different type results in SP UNIT LAY ERR eptie intelligent function module the I O points must also be the same in addition to the I O assignment setting Page 30 Section 4 2 2 Point Pshows notes that requires attention Remark shows useful information KL shows reference pages When an intelligent module is connected I O assignment can be omitted by selecting connected modules from Intelligent Function
293. ue All channels are set to 0 Point Change the setting value to use the scaling function since 0 is set as the default value 210 APPENDICES 21 CH1 Process alarm lower lower limit value Un G86 to CH8 Process alarm upper upper limit value Un G117 QH Set the digital output value range for each channel Configure the 4 step setting of process alarm upper upper limit value process alarm upper lower limit value process alarm lower upper limit value and process alarm lower lower limit value For details on warning output function process alarm refer to the following e Warning Output Function Process Alarm Page 85 Section 8 9 a Setting range e Setting range is 32768 to 32767 e When a value which does not satisfy the formula of process alarm upper upper limit value gt process alarm upper lower limit value gt process alarm lower upper limit value gt process alarm lower lower limit value is set to a channel an error occurs in the channel The error code is stored in Latest error code Un G19 and Error flag XF turns on The operation is performed in the setting configured before the error occurrence e When the following functions are used warning targets are scaling values that reflect the operations of each function Set values considering operation results of each function Module Functions L60AD4 Digital clipping function scaling function shift function or difference conversion function
294. uest 1 the difference conversion starts just when the analog input value returns within the setting value treating the scaling value digital operation value as the difference conversion reference value Detected Not detected O Included Analog input value mA l e a a 1 CHO Analog input value l l 22 A E ca igh AS aa ae 9 pawn rere enn c eno gy 2 n Input signal error is occurring 0 Time I Timing when an analog a oe input value reached back i Input signal error detection in the set range flag Un G49 OFF l l l l Input signal error detection signal XC OEF ON A D conversion completed flag Un G10 CHU Difference conversion l trigger No request 0 XTrigger request 1 Un G172 to Un G175 l CHU Difference conversion reference value 0 Digital value in approximately 2 2mA Un G180 to Un G183 CHU Difference conversion status flag Not converted 0 Converting difference 1 Un G190 to Un G193 105 UOHOUN UOISJSAUOD SOUSISOHIG E48 106 b Operation of when Operating condition setting request Y9 is turned on and off during difference conversion During the difference conversion even if Operating condition setting request Y9 is turned on and off the difference conversion before Operating condition setting request Y9 continues and the difference conversion reference value is not updated To
295. ule name gt Parameter tem CL OC E Basic setting Sets method of A D c o A D conversion P enable disable setting MEURE E n Averaging process setting EH Time Average Count 1 Disable 2 Set Warning output setting to 0 Enable E Warning output function Sets for warnings on A D con a Warning output setting 0 Enable Process alarm upper upper limit 0 Enable value 1 Disable 3 Specify the values for Process alarm upper upper limit value Process alarm upper lower limit value Process alarm lower upper limit value and Process alarm lower lower limit value Warning output function Sets for warnings on A D cor ee Warning output setting 0 Enable m ee alarm upper upper limit sooo0 a ee alarm upper lower limit 1000 l oe alarm lower Upper limit i0000 epee alarm lower lower limit ann Item Setting range Process alarm upper upper limit value Process alarm upper lower limit value 32768 to 32767 Process alarm lower upper limit value Process alarm lower lower limit value Point Process alarm output settings must meet the following condition Process alarm upper upper limit value gt Process alarm upper lower limit value gt Process alarm lower upper limit value gt Process alarm lower lower limit value wey SS800 qg UOIIOUNY nd no PuiueM 6 g 8 8 10 Scaling Function Common The A D converter module scale
296. ustment can be easily performed when the system starts 2 Scaling value 1 CHU Digital output value 20000 are Hsesr sae eee serene Hs digital operation value Un G11 to Un G14 JOGO A soe eee ae j after adjustment Fae CHU Shifting amount to 10 1 conversion value ao 1 Digital output value Un G150 to Un G153 before adjustment te 2 CHO Scaling value ao digital operation value Un G54 to Un G57 Analog input voltage V CHUO Scaling value V Un G11 to Un G14 digital operation value 0 10 Un G54 to Un G57 5 11990 0 20000 1 Operation of the shift function The set shifting amount to conversion value is added to the scaling value digital operation value The scaling value digital operation value with shift addition is stored in CHO Scaling value digital operation value Un G54 to Un G57 The shit amount is added in every sampling cycle for sampling processing while it is added in every averaging process cycle for averaging processing Then those added values are stored in CHO Scaling value digital operation value Un G54 to Un G57 If some value is set to the shifting amount to conversion value the shifting amount to conversion value is added regardless of the status change OFF ON OFF of Operating condition setting request Y9 CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS 2 Setting procedure 1 Set A D conversion enable disable setting to 0 Enable kT Project window gt In
297. ut signal error detection function The detection cycle is changed to the sampling cycle For details on the input signal error detection function refer to the following e Input signal error detection function lt _ gt Page 77 Section 8 7 a When the non compatible version of the L60AD4 is used The detection cycle is detected per sampling cycle or averaging process cycle depending on the specified A D conversion method 4 Warning output function Process alarm The alarm output function monitors CHO Digital output value Un G11 to Un G14 for alarm output When any of the following functions is used the alarm output function monitors CHO Scaling value digital operation value Un G54 to Un G57 for alarm output e Digital clipping function e Scaling function e Shift function e Difference conversion function suoljounj Jo sbueyy ZZ xipusddy suoljoun 4 jo eabueyy pue uonippy xipueddy For details on the warning output function refer to the following e Warning output function Process alarm gt Page 85 Section 8 9 a When the non compatible version of the L60AD4 is used When the scaling function is not used the alarm output function monitors CHO Digital output value Un G11 to Un G14 for alarm output When the scaling function is used the alarm output function monitors CHO Scaling value digital operation value Un G54 to Un G57 for alarm output 297 258 5 Scaling function The scaling
298. value 55 Tri t to 4999 ngoer dale CH3 default value 56 CH4 default value 57 Trigger setting vale setting Trigger setting vale 32768 to 32767 default value 0 Flow amount integration enable disable 0 Enabled setting 1 Disabled default value Integration cycle setting 1 to 5000ms default value 4ms s default value Flow amount Flow amount time unit setting min Page 123 integration function A Section 8 15 x 1 default value x 10 Unit scaling setting x 100 x 1000 x 10000 4 The L60ADVL8 or L6OADIL8 does not support this function 2 To use the logging function with the LEGOADVL8 or L60ADIL8 use the data logging function of the CPU module For the data logging function of the CPU module refer to the following L QNUDVCPU LCPU User s Manual Data Logging Function 08 CHAPTER 7 VARIOUS SETTINGS 7 4 Auto Refresh Set the buffer memory areas of the A D converter module to be refreshed automatically By the auto refresh setting reading writing data by programming is unnecessary 1 Setting procedure Open the Auto_Refresh dialog box 1 Start Auto Refresh T Project window gt Intelligent Function Module gt module name c gt Auto Refresh 2 Click the item to setup and input the auto refresh target device 5 0010 L60AD4 Auto_Refresh Display Filter Display All z E Transfer fo PLE Transfers buffer memory data to the specified device AD c
299. value Input signal error defection status and processing at error detection 4 j say MOV Ww1008 K1M50 Reads the input signal error detection kssmaca ad M50 Processing at input signal error ii Processing when an input signal error is detected onal detection in CH1 ar a i SET Y100F Turns on Error clear request to reset the input signal error Error code display and reset processing E E A X100F BCD W1010 K4Y30 4 Outputs the error code in BCD X24 s SET Y100F Turns on Error clear request Y100F X100C X100F RST Y100F Turns off Error clear request MCR NO JEND 1 When using the L60ADVL8 or L60ADIL8 and enabling A D conversion for five channels or more increase the number of digits to be specified For example change K1MO to K2M0 174 CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING This chapter describes errors that may occur while the use of the A D converter module those troubleshooting 1 Checking for the error codes and the alarm codes Errors and alarms occurred in the A D converter module can be checked by any of the following methods Choose the checking methods for the purpose and application e Checking on the module detailed Information lt gt Page 176 Section 11 1 e Checking by Latest Error Code Un G19 lt gt Page 177 Section 11 2 e Checking on the module error collection function lt gt Page 178 Section 11 3 e Checking by a display unit lt Page 155 Section 9
300. value will be shown in the dialog if the Switch Setting of the PLC Parameter contains an out of ange value E EN jNpoW pe H 0 p pP uuopJ SI NMponN J y suo C V USUM E04 171 5 Display the initial setting screen for the A D converter module L60AD4 and configure the setting as follows KO Project window Intelligent Function Module c gt L60AD4 c gt Parameter E gt 0000 L60AD4 Parameter Display Filter Display All x a Basic setting AJD conversion enable disable setting Averaging process setting Time Average Count Average Moving Average oe Conversion speed setting Warning output function so Warning output setting Process alarm upper upper limit value Process alarm upper lower limit value Process alarm lower upper limit value Process alarm lower lower limit value Input signal error detection Input signal error detection setting Input signal error detection setting value Input signal error detection E enhancing Available to Product Information 130410000000000 A4 or later Input signal error detection extension setting Scaling function Scaling enable disable setting Scaling upper limit value 1 Scaling lower limit value Shift function Available to Product Information 130410000000000 4 or later Shifting amount to conversion value Digital clipping function Available to Product Information 130410000000000 A or later Dig
301. values can be always obtained Page 71 Section 8 3 2 c Moving average The input range to use can be selected from the following ranges e Factory default range 4 to 20mA 0 to 20mA 1 to 5V 0 to 5V 10 to 10V 0 to 10V Page 54 Section e User range 7 2 e Extended mode range 4 to 20mA Extended mode 1 to 5V Extended mode Page 75 Section Conversion speed switch function The conversion speed can be selected from 20us 80us or 1ms o fe 8 This function extends the input range of 4 to 20mA and that of 1 to 5V Input range extension function By combining this function with the input signal error detection function simple disconnection detection can be executed Range switching function S17 UONOUNY EE Page 74 Section 8 4 This function stores the maximum digital value and minimum digital Maximum value minimum value hold output value in the buffer memory for each channel When an Page 76 Section function operation function such as the scaling function is used the maximum 8 6 and minimum scaling values digital operation values are stored This function outputs an alarm when the analog input value exceeds a Page 77 Section Input signal error detection function preset range 8 7 The detection method of the input signal error detection function can be extended Use this function to detect the input signal error only in the lower limit or upper limit or to execute the disconnection detection Page 82 Sec
302. version speed 80 us Set number of times 20 times 20 x 0 08 x 4 6 4 ms gt An average value is output every 6 4ms Point Because the count average requires a sum of at least two counts not counting the maximum and minimum values the set number of times should be set to 4 or more c Moving average The average of a specified number of digital output values is calculated at every sampling cycle and is stored in the buffer memory Because the target set of values for averaging processing shifts to another to involve a subsequent value at every sampling processing the latest digital output values can be always obtained For the L60AD4 the moving average processing for a set number of times of 4 is shown below Digital output value Sampling cycle 20000 3 r whi Poya uosa C V 8 10000 1st storage a 2nd storage b 3rd storage c Time ms CH1 Digital output l T a a a eae value Un G11 0 K a A XO ee ee ee oe a A D conversion ol completed flag XE Data transition in buffer memory 1st storage a 2nd storage b 3rd storage c Pe a a 4 4 4 11 3 Setting procedure a Sampling processing 1 Set A D conversion enable disable setting to 0 Enable kT Project window gt Intelligent Function Module gt module name gt Parameter E Basic setting Sets method of A D c _ AD conversion enable disable setting 0 Enable rm Pn Averaging proce
303. verter module in normal mode check if the program to change the value in Mode switching setting Un G158 Un G159 has been mistakenly executed The value in Mode switching setting Un G158 Un G159 has been changed and the mode has been switched to offset gain setting mode b When turning off Check item Action Is the power supplied Check that the supply voltage of power supply module is within the rated range Make sure that the power capacity is enough by calculating the current consumption Is th ity of dul h Pe ano nen ay Carn ens eee nee such as a connected CPU module an I O module and an intelligent function modules Is the module connected properly Check the module connection A watchdog timer error may have occurred Reset the CPU module and check if the RUN LED turns on If the RUN LED remains off the module may be failed Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative The case other than the above 184 CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 2 When the ERR LED turns on or flashes a When turning on Check item Action Check Latest error code Un G19 and take the action described in the error code list Does any error occur Error Code List Page 179 Section 11 4 b When flashing Check item Action Is the value other than 0 set for Switch 5 of the intelligent function With the parameter setting set 0 for Switch 5 in the intelligent function module switch module switch setting se
304. xtended mode or 1 to 5V extended mode cannot be used b Enabling the setting Turn on and off Operating condition setting request Y9 to enable the setting c Default value All channels are set to 5 50 212 APPENDICES 23 CHO Shifting amount to conversion value Un G150 to Un G153 Z Set the shifting amount to conversion value that is to be used for the shift function For details on the shift function refer to the following e Shift function gt Page 94 Section 8 11 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO LT T TTT T ttt ttt it l Data section Sign bit 1 Negative 0 Positive a Setting range Setting range is 32768 to 32767 b Enabling the setting When the value is set set shifting amount to conversion value turns valid regardless of turning on and off Operating condition setting request Y9 c Default value All channels are set to Disable 0 24 Mode switching setting Un G158 Un G159 0H Set the setting value for the mode to be switched to Setting value Mode switching to Un G158 Un G159 Normal mode 0964H 4144H Offset gain setting mode 4144H 0964H a Enabling the setting Turn on and off Operating condition setting request Y9 to enable the setting b After the mode is switched When the mode is switched this area is cleared to zero and Operating condition setting completed flag X9 is turned to OFF After checking that the operating

MELSEC-L Analog-Digital Converter Module User`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents